ACADEMIC REGULATIONS

COURSE STRUCTURE
AND
DETAILED SYLLABUS

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

B.Tech Four Year Degree Course

(Applicable for the batches admitted from 2017-18)

GUDLAVALLERU ENGINEERING COLLEGE

(An Autonomous Institute with Permanent Affiliation to JNTUK, Kakinada)
Seshadri Rao Knowledge Village
GUDLAVALLERU - 521 356, Krishna District, Andhra Pradesh
Electronics and Communication Engineering
 CONTENTS
I. COLLEGE VISION, MISSION 01
II. DEPARTMENT VISION, MISSION 01
III. PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs) 02
IV. PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs) 02
V. PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs) 03
Vi. ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 04
1. UG - B.Tech Programs 04
2. Duration of the Program 04
3. Minimum Instruction Days 04
4. Program Credits 04
5. Attendance Regulations 05
6. Examinations and Scheme of Evaluation 05
7. Criteria for Passing a Course and Award of Grades 09
8. Supplementary Examinations 11
9. Conditions for Promotion 11
10. Revaluation 12
11. Re-admission Criteria 12
12. Break in Study 12
13. Transitory Regulations 13
14. Withholding of Results 13
15. Malpractices 13
16. Other Matters 18
17. General 18
VII. CURRICULAR COMPONENTS 18
VIII. COURSE STRUCTURE 21
IX. SYLLABUS 29
1st Year 1st Semester
i) Functional English 29
ii) Linear Algebra & Differential Equations 36
iii) Engineer & Society 38
iv) Solid State Physics 40
v) Problem Solving through Computer Programming 42
vi) Functional English Lab 44
vii) Solid State Physics Lab 46
viii) Computer Programming Lab 47

Electronics and Communication Engineering

 1st Year 2nd Semester
i) Professional Communication 49
ii) Integral Transforms and Vector Calculus 54
iii) Applied Chemistry 56
iv) Environmental Studies 58
v) Linear Electrical Networks 60
vi) Numerial Methods & Complex Analysis 62
vii) Engineering Drawing 64
viii) Professional Communication Lab 66
ix) Applied Chemistry Lab 68
2nd Year 1st Semester
i) Probability Theory and Stochastic Process 69
ii) Electronic Devices 71
iii) Signals and Systems 73
iv) Engineering Economics and Project Management 75
v) Electromagnetic Field Theory 77
vi) Elements of Electrical Engineering 79
vii) Electronic Devices Lab 81
viii) Networks and Electrical Technology Lab 83
2nd Year 2nd Semester
i) Transmission Lines and Waveguides 84
ii) Analog Circuits 86
iii) Analog Communications 88
iv) Digital Circuit Design 90
v) Fundamentals of Data Structures 92
vi) Open Elective – I
Elements of Civil Engineering 94
Building Services 96
Electrical Materials 98
Control Systems Engineering 100
Elements of Manufacturing Processes 102
Automotive Engineering 104
Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 106
Fundamentals of Communications 108
Computer Graphics 110
Object Oriented Programming through JAVA 112
Systems Software 114
Web Programming 116
Mathematical Cryptography 118
Semiconductor Physics 120
vii) Analog Circuits Lab 122
viii) Digital Circuit Design Lab 124
Optional Elective – I
Introduction to Python Programming 125
Database Management Systems 127
Electronic Switching Systems 129
Optional Elective – II (MOOCs)
3rd Year 1st Semester
i) Linear Integrated Circuits Applications 131
ii) Digital Communications 133
iii) Antennas and Wave Propagation 135
iv) Principles of VLSI Design 137
v) Professional Elective – I
CAD for VLSI 139
Computer Organization 141
Computer and Communication Networks 143
Biomedical Engineering 145
vi) Open Elective – II
Geoinformatics 147
Environmental Sanitation 149
Modeling and Simulation of Engineering Systems 151
Power Systems Engineering 153
Elements of Mechanical Transmission 155
Material Handling Equipment 157
Automotive Electronics 159
Introduction to MEMS 161
Data Science 163
Virtual and Augmented Reality 165
Open Source Software 167
Cyber Laws 169
Quality, Reliability and Operations Research 171
vii) Linear Integrated Circuits Applications Lab 173
viii) Analog and Digital Communications Lab 175
Optional Elective – III
Data Warehousing and Data Mining 177
Mechatronics 179
Introduction to MEMS 181
Optional Elective – IV (MOOCs)
3rd Year 2nd Semester
i) Digital Signal Processing 183
ii) Control Systems 185
iii) Microprocessor, Microcontroller and Applications 187
iv) Microwave and Optical Communications 189
v) Professional Elective – II
Analog IC Design 191
Nano Electronics 193
Smart Antennas 195
Coding Theory 197
vi) Open Elective – III
Hydrology 199
Planning for Sustainable Development 201
Electrical and Hybrid Vehicles 203
Power Plant Instrumentation 205
Material Science 207
Renewable Energy Sources 209
Assistive Technologies 211
Bio-Medical Engineering 213
Node and Angular JS 215
Cyber Security 217
Scripting Languages 219
Software Project Management 221
Elements of Stochastic Processes 223
Academic Communication 225
vii) Microprocessor and Microcontroller Interfacing Lab 227
viii) Digital Signal Processing Lab 229
ix) VLSI Lab 231
Optional Elective – V
Big Data analytics 233
Cognitive Radio Networks 235
Cryptography and Network Security 237
Optional Elective – VI (MOOCs)
4th Year 1st Semester
i) CMOS Digital IC Design 239
ii) Embedded System Design 241
iii) Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation 243
iv) Professional Elective – III
Mixed Signal IC Design 245
Cellular and Mobile Communications 247
Digital TV Engineering 249
DSP Processors and Architectures 251
 Professional Elective – IV
System on Chip Design 253
Wireless Sensor Networks 255
Satellite Communication 257
Digital Image Processing 259
vi) Open Elective – IV
Disaster Management 261
Repair and Retrofitting Techniques 263
Modern Optimization Techniques 265
Electrical Power Utilization 267
Green Engineering 269
Non Destructive Evaluation 271
Cyber Physical Systems 273
Signals and Systems 275
Digital Forensics 277
Business Intelligence and Decision Support Systems 279
Adhoc and Sensor Networks 281
Information Retrieval Systems 283
Fuzzy Logic 285
vii) Microwave and Optical Communications Lab 287
Optional Elective – VII
Digital Control Systems 289
Artificial Intelligence 291
Transform Techniques 293
Optional Elective – VIII (MOOCs)
4th Year 2nd Semester
i) Professional Elective – V
Low Power VLSI Circuits 295
Real Time Operating Systems 297
Speech Processing 299
Adaptive Signal Processing 301
iii) Professional Elective – VI
ASIC Design 303
Embedded C 305
RADAR Engineering 307
Multi Rate Signal Processing 309
Electronics and Communication Engineering
 VISION, MISSION
OF THE
COLLEGE & DEPARTMENT
PEOs, POs & PSOs
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
AND
CURRICULAR COMPONENTS

Electronics and Communication Engineering

Electronics and Communication Engineering
 VISION & MISSION OF THE COLLEGE
Vision
To be a leading institution of engineering education and research, preparing
students for leadership in their fields in a caring and challenging learning
environment.
Mission
­ To produce quality engineers by providing state-of-the-art engineering education.
­ To attract and retain knowledgeable, creative, motivated and highly skilled
individuals whose leadership and contributions uphold the college tenets of
education, creativity, research and responsible public service.
­ To develop faculty and resources to impart and disseminate knowledge and
information to students and also to society that will enhance educational level,
which in turn, will contribute to social and economic betterment of society.
­ To provide an environment that values and encourages knowledge acquisition
and academic freedom, making this a preferred institution for knowledge seekers.
­ To provide quality assurance.
­ To partner and collaborate with industry, government, and R and D institutes to
develop new knowledge and sustainable technologies and serve as an engine
for facilitating the nation’s economic development.
­ To impart personality development skills to students that will help them to
succeed and lead.
­ To instil in students the attitude, values and vision that will prepare them to
lead lives of personal integrity and civic responsibility.
­ To promote a campus environment that welcomes and makes students of all
races, cultures and civilizations feel at home.
­ Putting students face to face with industrial, governmental and societal
challenges.
VISION & MISSION OF THE DEPARTMENT
Vision
To be a leading centre of education and research in Electronics and Communica-
tion Engineering, making the students adaptable to changing technological and
societal needs in a holistic learning environment.
Articulations
­ To be a leading centre of education and research hub in Electronics and
Communication Engineering with holistic learning environment.
­ Students to be adaptable for the changes in technology and societal needs.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 01

 ­ Students to be recognized and valued for their commitment to excellence
and enthusiasm for learning.
Mission
­ To produce knowledgeable and technologically competent engineers for providing
services to the society.
­ To have a collaboration with leading academic, industrial and research
organizations for promoting research activities among faculty and students.
­ To create an integrated learning environment for sustained growth in electronics
and communication engineering and related areas.
Articulations
­ To craft the graduates knowledge and technologically competent engineers
for providing services to the society.
­ To have alliance with leading academicians, industries and research
organizations and encourage the faculty and students for performing
research activities.
­ To develop a multidiscipline learning environment for continuous growth in
electronics and communication engineering and its associated fields.

III. PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

Graduates of the Electronics and Communication Engineering program will
­ demonstrate a progression in technical competence and leadership in the
practice/field of engineering with professional ethics.
­ continue to learn and adapt to evolving technologies for catering to the needs
of the society.

IV. PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

The ECE Graduates will be equipped with the ability of
1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science,
engineering fundamentals, and an engineering specialization to the solution
of complex engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze
complex engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first
principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering
problems and design system components or processes that meet the specified
needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety, and the
cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 02

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge
and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation
of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources,
and modern engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex
engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual
knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional
engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate
the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of the engineering practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a
member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities
with the engineering community and with society at large, such as, being
able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding of the engineering and management principles and apply these
to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects
and in multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and
ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context
of technological change.

V. PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

The ECE Graduates will be equipped with the ability of
­ designing electrical, electronics and communication systems in the domains
of VLSI, embedded systems, signal processing and RF communications,
and applying modern tools.
­ applying the contextual knowledge of Electronics an Communication
Engineering to assess societal, environmental, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues with professional ethics.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 03

VI. ACADEMIC REGULATIONS
Applicable for the students of B.Tech from the Academic Year 2017-18.
1. UG – B.Tech Programs
The following B.Tech Programs are offered at present
i. Civil Engineering (CE)
ii. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EEE)
iii. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
iv. Electronics and Communication Engineering (ECE)
v. Computer Science and Engineering (CSE)
vi. Information Technology (IT)
2. Duration of the Program
The duration of the program is four academic years consisting of eight
semesters. However, a student is permitted to complete the course work of
B.Tech program in the stipulated time frame of EIGHT years from the date of
joining. Students admitted into third semester of B.Tech program directly,
through Lateral Entry (LE), shall have to complete the course work of B.Tech
program in the stipulated time frame of SIX years from the date of joining.
3. Minimum Instruction Days
Each semester consists of a minimum of ninety instruction days.
4. Program Credits
i) Each discipline of the B.Tech program is designed to have a total of 160
credits and the student shall have to complete the four year course work
and earn all the 160 credits for the award of B.Tech Degree.
ii) Students joining the B.Tech program into the II year 1st semester directly
through Lateral Entry (LE) Scheme shall have to complete the three
year course work and earn 120 credits for the award of B.Tech degree.
iii) Students may register for optional elective courses beyond 160 (120 for
Lateral Entry) credits for a maximum of 20 credits from II year 2nd semester
to IV year 1st semester, five credits in each semester, subject to the
condition that there shall not be any backlogs up to previous semester
with CGPA not less than 7.5. Optional elective courses shall be treated
on par with self study courses, but performance in optional elective
courses shall not be included in calculating the SGPA.
iv) Student shall register for a course only once in any semester in the
entire program. He shall not register that course as open elective or
optional elective or professional elective further.
v) Students with no backlogs up to III year 1st semester with CGPA not
less than 7.5 may register for two professional elective courses offered
in IV year 2nd semester in advance i.e. one in III year 2nd semester and
another one in IV year 1st semester so as to have exclusive project work
during the IV year 2nd semester.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 04

5. Attendance Regulations
5.1 A student shall be eligible to appear for End Semester Examinations if he
acquires a minimum of 75% of attendance in aggregate of all the subjects.
5.2 Condoning of shortage of attendance in aggregate upto 10% (65% and
above and below 75%) in each semester will be considered for genuine
reasons such as medical grounds and participation in co-curricular and
extra-curricular activities and shall be granted only after approval by a
committee duly appointed by the college. The student should submit
application for medical leave along with medical certificate from a registered
medical practitioner within three days from reporting to the class work after
the expiry of the Medical Leave. In case of participation in co-curricular
and extra-curricular activities, either in the college or other colleges, students
must take prior written permission from HoD concerned and should also
submit the certificate of participation from the organizer of the event within
three days after the completion of the event. Only such cases will be
considered for condoning attendance shortage.
5.3 A student shall be eligible to claim for condonation of attendance shortage
for a maximum of two times during the four year (eight semesters) course
work of B.Tech / three year (six semesters) course work of B.Tech, Lateral
Entry. However, additional one time condonation exclusively during IV
Year shall be considered on genuine valid reasons.
5.4 A student will not be promoted to the next semester unless he satisfies the
attendance requirement of the current semester. He may seek re-admission
for that semester when offered next.
5.5 Shortage of Attendance below 65% in aggregate shall in NO case be
condoned.
5.6 Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester
are not eligible to take their end examination of that class and their
registration shall stand cancelled.
5.7 A fee stipulated by the college shall be payable towards condonation of
attendance shortage.
5.8 A student is required to put up a minimum of 75% of attendance in the
mandatory non-credit courses such as Sports & Games /Cultural and Fine
Arts/ Yoga /Self Defence /NSS despite satisfactory performance /
participation in the activities organized under each event for getting the
satisfactory grade.
6. Examinations and Scheme of Evaluation
6.1 Theory / Elective / Self Study Courses (2 or 3 or 4 credits):
Each theory course shall be evaluated for a total of 100 marks, consisting
of 40 marks for internal assessment and 60 marks for semester end
examination.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 05
 Internal Assessment:
i) Of 40 marks for internal assessment, 10 marks are for continuous
assessment in the form of two quiz or subjective tests and 30 marks are
based on two mid-term examinations. The first mid-term examination
shall be from the first three units of syllabus and second mid-term from
the last three units of syllabus, conducted during the semester.
ii) Two quiz or subjective tests, one before first mid-term examination from
I & II units of syllabus and another before second mid-term examination
from IV & V units of syllabus, each for 10 marks, with 45 minutes duration,
are conducted in a semester and the average marks of the two tests are
taken as the marks for the continuous evaluation process.
iii) Each mid-term examination is conducted for 40 marks with two hours
duration. Each mid-term examination consists of five questions, each
for 10 marks and four questions need to be answered. First question
shall have 5 short questions from all the three units, each of two marks
or 10 objective questions each of one mark and is compulsory, three
questions are of descriptive type, one from each unit of syllabus and the
fifth question is from all the three units of syllabus.
iv) Sum of the 75% marks of better scored mid-term examination and 25%
marks of less scored mid-term examination are scaled down for 30 marks.
v) For the subjects such as Engineering Graphics, Engineering Drawing,
Machine Drawing, Design & Drawing of R.C., Structures, Steel Structures,
Irrigation Structures, Estimation Cost and Valuation, Building Planning
and Drawing etc., the distribution of 40 marks for internal evaluation shall
be 20 marks for day-to-day work, and 20 marks based on two mid-term
examinations. Each mid-term examination is conducted for 40 marks
with two hours duration. Sum of the 75% marks of better scored mid-
term examination and 25% marks of less scored mid-term examination
are scaled down for 20 marks.
vi) For subjects like Functional English and Professional Communication,
the pattern of mid-term examination is given along with the syllabus of
respective subject.
vii) For the integrated course with theory and laboratory, the distribution of
40 marks for internal evaluation shall be 20 marks for theory based on
two mid-term examinations and 20 marks for laboratory. Each mid-term
examination is conducted for 40 marks with two hours duration. Each
mid-term examination consists of five questions, each for 10 marks and
four questions need to be answered. First question shall have 5 short
questions from all the three units, each of two marks or 10 objective
questions each of one mark and is compulsory, three questions are of
descriptive type, one from each unit of syllabus and the fifth question is

Electronics and Communication Engineering 06

 from all the three units of syllabus. Sum of the 75% marks of better
scored mid-term examination and 25% marks of less scored mid-term
examination are scaled down for 20 marks. Of 20 marks for laboratory,
10 marks for day-to-day performance and 10 marks for semester end
internal examination.
viii) For the project based theory course, the distribution of 40 marks for
internal evaluation shall be 20 marks for theory, based on two mid- term
examinations and 20 marks for project. Each mid-term examination is
conducted for 40 marks with two hours duration. Each mid-term
examination consists of five questions, each for 10 marks and four
questions need to be answered. First question shall have 5 short
questions from all the three units, each of two marks or 10 objective
questions each of one mark and is compulsory, three questions are of
descriptive type, one from each unit of syllabus and the fifth question is
from all the three units of syllabus. Sum of the 75% marks of better
scored mid-term examination and 25% marks of less scored mid-term
examination are scaled down for 20 marks.
External Assessment:
i) Semester End Examination will have six questions with internal choice,
one question from each unit. All questions carry equal marks of 10 each.
ii) For the integrated theory and laboratory course, the pattern of examination
is same as above. There will not be any external assessment for
laboratory component.
iii) For the project based theory course, semester end examination will
have three questions, each for 20 marks, with internal choice. All the
questions need to be answered. There will be no external assessment
for project component.
iv) For subjects like Functional English, Professional Communication,
Building Planning & Drawing, etc, the pattern of semester end examination
is given along with the syllabus of respective subject.
6.2 Laboratory Courses (1 or 2 credits) :
i) For practical courses the distribution shall be 40 marks for Internal
Evaluation and 60 marks for the semester end examinations. There shall
be continuous evaluation by the internal subject teacher during the
semester for 40 internal marks of which 25 marks shall be for day-to-day
performance (15 marks for day-to-day evaluation and 10 marks for Record)
and 15 marks shall be evaluated by conducting an internal laboratory
test towards the end of semester.
ii) Semester end examination shall be conducted by the teacher concerned
and external examiner for 60 marks.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 07

 6.3 Mandatory Non-Credit Courses:
A student is required to take up two Non-Credit courses, viz. Sports & Games
/ Cultural and Fine Arts/Yoga,/Self Defence/NSS, one in II year 1st semester
and the other in II year 2nd semester. Marks are awarded based on the day-to-
day participation and performance in the activities organized under each event.
A student is required to score 40 marks out of 100 marks despite putting up a
minimum of 75% attendance to be declared satisfactory in each mandatory
non-credit course. The B.Tech degree shall only be awarded if a student gets
satisfactory grade in each of the two mandatory non-credit courses and besides
acquiring 160 (120 for Lateral Entry) credits of the B.Tech degree course.
A student whose shortage of attendance is condoned in the case of credit
courses in that semester shall also be eligible for condoning shortage of
attendance up to 10% in the case of mandatory non-credit courses also.
A student has to repeat the course if he does not get satisfactory grade in
each non-credit course for getting the degree awarded.
6.4 Internship / Industrial Training / Practical Training:
Industrial / Practical training shall be evaluated for a total of 100 marks. Of 100
marks, 40 marks shall be awarded by an internal committee consisting of two
faculty members based on the presentation given and work carried out by a
student and the remaining 60 marks are for final Viva–Voce examination
conducted by the committee consisting of an External Examiner and the Head
of the Department at the end of IV B.Tech 1st semester.
6.5 Mini Project / Field Work :
Mini Project / field work shall be evaluated for a total of 100 marks.
i) Of 100 marks, 40 marks shall be awarded by the project supervisor based
on student’s involvement in carrying out the project and the remaining 60
marks are based on presentation and viva-voce before a committee
consisting of supervisor and a senior faculty of the department.
ii) There will be no external assessment for mini project / field work.
6.6 Project work:
i) The final project work shall be carried out during the IV year 2nd semester
and will be evaluated for 100 marks.
ii) Of 100 marks, 40 marks shall be for Internal Evaluation and 60 marks for
the project evaluation and semester end viva-voce examination.
iii) Each student needs to give two seminars on the topic of his project, and
each seminar is evaluated for 20 marks by a committee consisting of the
supervisor and a senior faculty of the department. The sum of the mark of
two seminars is taken as internal marks for 40.
iv) The project evaluation and semester end Viva–Voce shall be conducted by
the committee consisting of an External Examiner, Head of the Department

Electronics and Communication Engineering 08

 and the supervisor of the project. The evaluation of project work shall be
conducted at the end of the fourth year second semester.
7. Criteria for Passing a Course and Award of Grades:
7.1 Criteria for Passing a Course:
i) A candidate shall be declared to have passed in individual theory /
integrated theory and laboratory / Project based theory / drawing course
if he secures a minimum of 40% aggregate marks (internal & semester
end examination marks put together), subject to securing a minimum of
35% marks in the semester end examination.
ii) A candidate shall be declared to have passed in individual laboratory/
project / mini project / field work / industrial intership / practical training
course if he secures a minimum of 50% aggregate marks (internal &
semester end examination marks put together), subject to securing a
minimum of 40% marks in the semester end examination.
iii) On passing a course of a program, the student shall earn the credits
assigned to that course.
7.2 Method of Awarding Letter Grade and Grade Points for a Course:
A letter grade and grade points will be awarded to a student in each course
based on his performance, as per the grading system given below.
Theory / Drawing / Laboratory / Industrial /
Elective / Self Practical Training / Grade
Points Letter Grade
Study Course Mini Project / Project
(%) Work (%)
≥ 90 ≥ 90 10 O (Outstanding
≥ 80 & < 90 ≥ 80 & < 90 9 A+ (Excellent)
≥ 70 & < 80 ≥ 70 & < 80 8 A (Very Good)
≥ 60 & < 70 ≥ 60 & < 70 7 B+ (Good)
≥ 50 & < 60 ≥ 50 & < 60 6 B (Above Average)
≥ 45 & < 50 − 5 C (Average)
≥ 40 & < 45 − 4 P (Pass)
< 40 < 50 0 F (Fail)
7.3 Calculation of Semester Grade Point Average (SGPA)* for semester:
The performance of each student at the end of the each semester is indicated
in terms of SGPA. The SGPA is calculated as given below:
∑ (CR X GP )
SGPA = for each semester.
∑ CR
where CR = Credits of a course
GP = Grade Points awarded for a course
* SGPA is calculated for a candidate who passed all the courses in that semester.
* Performance in optional elective courses shall not be included in calculating
the SGPA.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 09
7.4 Eligibility for Award of B.Tech Degree:
A student will be declared eligible for the award of the B.Tech. Degree if he
fulfills the following academic regulations.
i) 4 Year B.Tech Course:
(a) Pursued a course of study for not less than four academic years and
not more than eight academic years.
(b) Registered for prescribed 160 credits and secured 160 credits.
(c) Students, who fail to complete their Four years Course of study within
Eight years or fail to acquire the 160 Credits for the award of the degree
within eight academic years from the year of their admission shall
forfeit their seat in B.Tech course and their admission shall stand
cancelled.
ii) 3 Year B.Tech Course under Lateral Entry:
(a) Pursued a course of study for not less than three academic years and
not more than six academic years.
(b) Registered for prescribed 120 credits and secured 120 credits.
(c) Students, who fail to complete their Three years Course of study within
Six years or fail to acquire the 120 Credits for the award of the degree
within six academic years from the year of their admission shall forfeit
their seat in B.Tech course and their admission shall stand cancelled.
7.5 Calculation of Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for Entire Program:
The CGPA is calculated as given below:
∑ (CR X GP)
CGPA = for entire program.
∑CR
where CR = Credits of a course
GP = Grade points awarded for a course
7.6 Award of Division:
After satisfying the requirements prescribed for the completion of the program,
the student shall be eligible for the award of B.Tech Degree and shall be
placed in one of the following grades:

CGPA Class
≥ 7.5 First Class with Distinction
≥ 6.5 & < 7.5 First Class
≥ 5.5 & < 6.5 Second Class
< 5.5 Pass Class

Electronics and Communication Engineering 10

7.7 Consolidated Grade Card
A consolidated grade card containing credits & grades obtained by the
candidate will be issued after completion of the four year B.Tech program.
8. Supplementary Examinations
i) Supplementary examinations will be conducted twice in a year at the end
of odd and even semesters.
ii) Semester end supplementary examinations shall be conducted till next
regulation comes into force for that semester, after the conduct of the last
set of regular examinations under the present regulation.
iii) Thereafter, supplementary examinations will be conducted in the equivalent
courses as decided by the Board of Studies concerned.
iv) There is no makeup examination in case of supplementary examinations.
9. Conditions for Promotion
i) A student shall be eligible for promotion to next Semester of B.Tech program,
if he satisfies the conditions as stipulated in Regulation 5.
ii) The following academic requirements have to be satisfied in addition to the
attendance requirements mentioned in Regulation 5 for promotion into
III Year I semester and IV year I semester.
a) 4 Year B.Tech Program:
i) A student shall be promoted from II year to III year only if he acquires the
academic requirement of a minimum of 50% credits up to second year
second semester as shown below.
1. Two regular and two supplementary examinations of I year I semester,
2. Two regular and one supplementary examinations of I year II semester,
3. One regular and one supplementary examinations of II year I semester
4. One regular examination of II year II semester,
irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination or not.
ii) A student shall be promoted from III year to IV year only if he acquires the
academic requirement of a minimum of 50% of credits upto third year
second semester as shown below.
1. Three Regular and three supplementary examinations of I year I sem.,
2. Three Regular and two supplementary examinations of I year II sem.,
3. Two Regular and two supplementary examinations of II year I semester,
4. Two Regular and one supplementary examinations of II Year II semester,
5. One Regular and one supplementary examinations of III Year I semester,
6. One regular examination of III Year II semester,
irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination or not.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 11

 b) 3 Year B.Tech Program under Lateral Entry Scheme:
i) A student shall be promoted from III to IV year only if he acquires the
academic requirement of a minimum of 50% credits up to third year second
semester as shown below.
1.Two regular and two supplementary examinations of II year I semester,
2.Two Regular and one supplementary examinations of II year II semester,
3.One regular and one supplementary examinations of III year I semester
4.One regular examination of III year II semester,
irrespective of whether the candidate takes the examination or not.
10. Revaluation
i) Students can submit the applications for revaluation, along with the
prescribed fee receipt for revaluation of his answer script(s) of theory
course(s) as per the notification issued by the Controller of Examinations.
ii) The Controller of Examinations shall arrange for revaluation of such answer
script(s).
iii) An examiner, other than the first examiner, shall revaluate the answer script(s).
iv) If the variation in marks of two evaluations is less than 15% of total marks,
the best mark of two evaluations shall be taken into consideration.
v) If the variation in marks of two evaluations is more than 15% of total marks,
there shall be third evaluation by an examiner other than the first two
examiners. The best marks of two evaluations (which are nearer) shall be
taken into consideration.
11. Re-admission Criteria
i) A candidate, who is detained in a semester due to lack of attendance
has to obtain written permission from the Principal for readmission into the
same semester after duly fulfilling the required norms stipulated by the
college and by paying the required tuition fee and special fee in addition to
paying an administrative fee of Rs.1,000/-.
ii) A candidate, who is not promoted either to III year or IV year due to lack of
required credits can seek admission into III / IV year in subsequent years
after obtaining the required credits as stipulated in regulation 10 by paying
the required tuition fee and special fee in addition to paying an administrative
fee of Rs. 1,000/-.
12. Break in Study
Student, who discontinues the studies for what-so-ever reason, can get
readmission into appropriate semester of B.Tech program only with the prior
permission of the Principal of the College, provided such candidate shall follow
the transitory regulations applicable to the batch he joins. An administrative fee
of Rs.2,000/- per each year of break in study in addition to the prescribed tuition
and special fees should be paid by the candidate to condone his break in study.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 12
13.Transitory Regulations
A candidate, who is detained or discontinued in a semester, on readmission
shall be required to do all the courses in the curriculum prescribed for the
batch of students in which the student joins subsequently. However, exemption
will be given to those candidates who have already passed such courses in
the earlier semester(s) he was originally admitted into and substitute subjects
are offered in place of them as decided by the Board of Studies. However, the
decision of the Board of Studies will be final.
Transfer candidates (from an autonomous college affiliated to JNTUK)
A student who has secured the required credits upto previous semesters as
per the regulations of other autonomous institutions shall only be permitted to
be transferred to this college. A student who is transferred from the other
autonomous colleges to this college in second year first semester or
subsequent semesters shall join with the autonomous batch in the appropriate
semester. Such candidates shall be required to pass in all the courses in the
program prescribed by the Board of Studies concerned for that batch of
students from that semester onwards to be eligible for the award of degree.
However, exemption will be given in the courses of the semester(s) of the
batch which he had passed earlier and substitute subjects are offered in their
place as decided by the Board of Studies. The total number of credits to be
secured for the award of the degree will be the sum of the credits up to
previous semester as per the regulations of the college from which he is
transferred and the credits prescribed for the semester in which a candidate
joined after transfer and subsequent semesters under the autonomous stream.
The class will be awarded based on the academic performance of a student in
the autonomous pattern.
14. Withholding of Results
If the student has not paid the dues, if any, to the College or if any case of
indiscipline is pending against him, the result of the student will be withheld.
His degree will also be withheld in such cases.
15. Malpractices
i) The Principal shall refer the cases of malpractices in internal assess-
ment tests and semester end examinations to a malpractice enquiry
committee constituted by him for the purpose. Such committee shall
follow the approved levels of punishment. The Principal shall take
necessary action against the erring students based on the recommenda-
tions of the committee.
ii) Any action by the candidate trying to get undue advantage in the
performance or trying to help another, or derive the same through unfair
means is punishable according to the provisions contained hereunder.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 13

 DISCIPLINARY ACTION FOR MALPRACTICES/IMPROPER
CONDUCT IN EXAMINATIONS
Nature of
Punishment
Malpractices / Improper conduct
If the candidate
1.a Possesses or keeps accessible in Expulsion from the examination hall
examination hall, any paper, note and cancellation of the performance
book, programmable calculators, in that subject only.
Cell phones, pager, palm computers
or any other form of material
concerned with or related to the
subject of the examination (theory
or practical) in which he is appearing
but has not made use of (material
shall include any marks on the body
of the candidate which can be used
as an aid in the subject of the
examination.)
b Gives assistance or guidance or Expulsion from the examination hall
receives it from any other candidate and cancellation of the performance
orally or by any other body in that subject only of all the
language methods or candidates involved. In case of an
communicates through Cell phones outsider, he will be handed over to the
with any candidates or persons in police and a case is registered against
or outside the exam hall in respect him.
of any matter.
2. Has copied in the examination hall Expulsion from the examination hall
from any paper, book, and cancellation of the performance in
programmable calculators, palm that subject and all other subjects
computers or any other form of the candidate has already appeared
material relevant to the subject of including practical examinations and
the examination (theory or practical) project work and shall not be
in which the candidate is appearing. permitted to appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that
semester.
The hall ticket of the candidate shall
be cancelled.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 14

 3. Impersonates any other candidate The candidate who has impersonated
in connection with the examination. shall be expelled from examination hall.
The candidate is also debarred and
forfeits the seat. The performance of the
original candidate who has been
impersonated shall be cancelled in all
the subjects of the examination
(including practicals and project work)
already appeared and shall not be
allowed to appear for the examinations
of the remaining subjects of that
semester. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters
from class work and all university
examinations. The continuation of the
course by the candidate is subject to
the academic regulations in connection
with forfeiture of seat. If the impostor is
an outsider, he will be handed over to
the police and a case is registered
against him.
4. Smuggles in the Answer book or Expulsion from the examination hall and
takes out or arranges to send out cancellation of the performance in that
the question paper during the subject and all other subjects the
examination or answer book during candidate has already appeared
or after the examination. including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted
to appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that
semester. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive semesters
from class work and all university
examinations. The continuation of the
course by the candidate is subject to
the academic regulations in connection
with forfeiture of seat.
5. Uses objectionable, abusive or Cancellation of performance in that
offensive language in the answer subject.
paper or in letters to the examiners
or writes to the examiner requesting
him to award pass marks.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 15

 6. Refuses to obey the orders of the Chief In case of students of the college, they
Superintendent/Assistant shall be expelled from examination
Superintendent / any officer on duty or halls and cancellation of their
misbehaves or creates disturbance of performance in that subject and all
any kind in or around the examination other subjects the candidate(s) has
hall or organises a walkout or instigates (have) already appeared and shall not
others to walkout or threatens the officer- be permitted to appear for the
in-charge or any person on duty in or remaining examinations of the
outside the examination hall of any injury subjects of that semester. The
to his person or to any of his relations candidates also are debarred and
whether by words, either spoken or forfeit their seats. In case of outsiders,
written or by signs or by visible they will be handed over to the police
representation, assaults the Officer-in- and a police case is registered against
charge or any person on duty in or them.
outside the examination hall of any of
his relations or indulges in any other act
of misconduct or mischief which results
in damage to or destruction of property
in the examination hall or any part of the
college campus or engages in any other
act which in the opinion of the Officer on
duty amounts to use of unfair means or
misconduct or has the tendency to disrupt
the orderly conduct of the examination.
7. Leaves the exam hall taking away Expulsion from the examination hall
answer script or intentionally tears of the
and cancellation of the performance
script or any part thereof inside or in that subject and all other subjects
outside the examination hall. the candidate has already appeared
including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted
to appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that
semester. The candidate is also
debarred for two consecutive
semesters from class work and all
university examinations. The
continuation of the course by the
candidate is subject to the academic
regulations in connection with forfeiture
of seat.
8. Possess any lethal weapon or firearm Expulsion from the examination hall
in the examination hall. and cancellation of the performance
in that subject and all other subjects
the candidate has already appeared
including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted
to appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that
semester. The candidate is also
debarred and forfeits the seat.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 16

 9 If student of the college who is not a Expulsion from the examination hall
candidate for the particular and cancellation of the performance in
examination or any person not that subject and all other subjects the
connected with the college indulges candidate has already appeared
in any malpractice or improper including practical examinations and
conduct mentioned in clause 6 to 8. project work and shall not be permitted
to appear for the remaining
examinations of the subjects of that
semester. The candidate is also
debarred and forfeits the seat.
Person(s) who do not belong to the
college will be handed over to the
police and a police case is registered
against them.
10. Comes in a drunken condition to the Expulsion from the examination hall
examination hall. and cancellation of the performance in
that subject and all other subjects the
candidate has already appeared
including practical examinations and
project work and shall not be permitted
for the remaining examinations of the
subjects of that semester.
11. Copying detected on the basis of Cancellation of the performance in that
internal evidence, such as, during subject and all other subjects the
valuation or during special scrutiny. candidate has appeared including
practical examinations and project
work of that semester examinations.
12. If any malpractice is detected which is not covered in the above clauses 1
to 11 shall be referred to the Chief Superintendent of Examinations for
future action towards suitable punishment.

iii) The involvement of the staff, who are in charge of conducting

examinations, valuing examination papers and preparing / keeping records
of documents related to the examinations in such acts (inclusive of
providing incorrect or misleading information) that infringe upon the course
of natural justice to one and all concerned at the examination shall be
viewed seriously and appropriate disciplinary action will be taken after thor-
ough enquiry.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 17

16. Other Matters
i) Physically challenged candidates who have availed additional examination
time and a scribe during their Intermediate/EAMCET examinations will be
given similar concessions on production of relevant proof/documents.
Students who are suffering from contagious diseases are not allowed to
appear either for internal or semester end examinations.
ii) The students who participated in coaching / tournaments held at State /
National / International levels through University / Indian Olympic Association
during semester end external examination period will be promoted to
subsequent semesters as per the guidelines of University Grants
Commission Letter No. F.1-5/88 (SPE/PES), dated 18-08-1994.
iii) The Principal shall deal in an appropriate manner with any academic problem
which is not covered under these rules and regulations, in consultation
with the Heads of the Departments and subsequently such actions shall
be placed before the Academic Council for ratification. Any emergency
modification of regulation, approved in the meetings of the Heads of the
Departments shall be reported to the Academic Council for ratification.
17. General
i) The Academic Council may, from time to time, revise, amend or change the
regulations, schemes of examination and /or syllabi.
ii) The academic regulations should be read as a whole for the purpose of any
interpretation.
iii) In case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the
decision of the Chairman of the Academic Council is final.
iv) Wherever the word he, him or his occurs, it will also include she, her and hers.

VII. CURRICULAR COMPONENTS

Total % of % of
Sl. Course Work - Subject Areas No.of Total Credits as
No. Credits Credits per UGC
1 Baisc Sciences (BS) 21 13.13 15 - 20
2 Humanities and Social Sciences (HSS) 14 8.75 10 - 15
3 Engineering Sciences (ES) 24 15.00 10 - 20
4 Professional Core (PC) 57 35.62 25 - 35
5 Professional Electives (PE) 18 11.25 8 - 12
6 Open Electives (OE) 12 7.50 5 - 10
7 Others (Project, Survey Camp, Internship, etc.) 14 8.75 8 - 10
8 Mandatory Non-Credit Courses - - -

Electronics and Communication Engineering 18

 COURSE STRUCTURE
&
SYLLABUS

Electronics and Communication Engineering 19

Electronics and Communication Engineering
VIII. COURSE STRUCTURE
I Year - I Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
Name of the Course / Laboratory
No. Code Credits
L T P
1 EG2501 Functional English 4 - - 3
2 MA2501 Linear Algebra & Differential Equations 4 1 - 4
3 EN2502 Engineer & Society 3 - - 2
4 PH2504 Solid State Physics 4 - - 3
5 CT2502 Problem Solving through Computer Programming 4 - - 3
6 EG2502 Functional English Lab - - 2 1
7 PH2505 Solid State Physics Lab - - 2 1
8 CT2503 Computer Programming Lab - - 4 2
Total 19 1 8 19

I Year - II Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 EG2503 Professional Communication 3 - - 2
2 MA2504 Integral Transforms and Vector Calculus 4 1 - 4
3 CH2503 Applied Chemistry 3 - - 2
4 EN2501 Environmental Studies 3 - - 2
5 EE2504 Linear Electrical Networks 3 - - 2
6 MA2505 Numerical Methods & Complex Analys 3 1 - 3
7 ME2501 Engineering Drawing 1 - 4 3
8 EG2504 Professional Communication Lab - - 4 2
9 CH2504 Applied Chemistry Lab - - 2 1
Total 20 2 10 21

L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 21

 II Year - I Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
Name of the Course / Laboratory
No. Code Credits
L T P
1 EC2524 Probability Theory and Stochastic Process 3 1 - 3
2 EC2525 Electronic Devices 4 - - 3
3 EC2508 Signals and Systems 3 1 - 3
4 BA2501 Engineering Economics and Project Management 3 - - 2
5 EC2526 Electromagnetic Field Theory 4 - - 3
6 EE2505 Elements of Electrical Engineering 3 - - 2
7 EC2527 Electronic Devices Lab - - 4 2
8 EE2507 Networks and Electrical Technology Lab - - 2 1
Total 20 2 6 19
9 NS2501 NSS / Fine Arts / Yoga / Self Defense - - 2 -
(Mandatory Non-Credit Course)

II Year - II Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 EC2528 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 4 - - 3
2 EC2529 Analog Circuits 4 - - 3
3 EC2530 Analog Communications 3 - - 2
4 EC2505 Digital Circuit Design 3 1 - 3
5 CS2501 Fundamentals of Data Structures 3 - - 2
6 Open Elective-I (see list of Open Electives) 4 - - 3
7 EC2533 Analog Circuits Lab - - 4 2
8 EC2506 Digital Circuit Design Lab - - 4 2
Total 21 1 8 20
9 SG2501 Sports and Games / Cultural - - 2 -
(Mandatory Non-Credit Course)
10 Optional Elective - I - - - 3
CS2502 i) Introduction to Python Programming
CT2513 ii) Database Managemnent Systems
EC2534 iii) Electronic Switching Systems
11 EC2535 Optional Elective - II (MOOCs) - - - 2
Student shall opt from teh list of MOOCs given by the Department)
L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 22

III Year - I Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 EC2536 Linear Integrated Circuits Applications 3 1 - 3
2 EC2537 Digital Communications 3 - - 2
3 EC2538 Antennas and Wave Propagation 4 - - 3
4 EC2539 Principles of VLSI Design 3 - - 2
5 Professional Elective - I 4 - - 3
6 Open Elective-II (see list of Open Electives) 4 - - 3
7 EC2545 Linear Integrated Circuits Applications Lab - - 4 2
8 EC2546 Analog and Digital Communications Lab - - 4 2
Total 21 1 8 20
9 Optional Elective - III - - - 3
CT2528 i) Data Warehousing and Data Mining
ME2549 ii) Mechatronics
EC2544 iii) Introduction to MEMS
10 EC2547 Optional Elective - IV (MOOCs) - - - 2
Students shall opt from the list of MOOCs given by the Department)

III Year - II Semester

No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 EC2511 Digital Signal Processing 4 - - 3
2 EE2512 Control Systems 3 1 - 3
3 EC2510 Microprocessors, Microcontrollers and Applications** 3 - 1 3
4 EC2548 Microwave and Optical Communications 3 - - 2
5 Professional Elective - II 4 - - 3
6 Open Elective-III(see list of Open Electives) 4 - - 3
7 EC2515 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Interfacing Lab - - 4 2
8 EC2552 Digital Signal Processing Lab - - 4 2
9 EC2553 VLSI Lab - - 4 2
Total 21 1 13 23
10 Optional Elective - V - - - 3
CT2534 i) Big Data Analytics
EC2554 ii) Cognitive Radio Networks
CT2533 iii) Cryptography and Network Security
10 EC2555 Optional Elective - VI (MOOCs) - - - 2
Students shall opt from the list of MOOCs given by the Department)
** Project Based Theory Course
L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 23

IV Year - I Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 EC2517 CMOS Digital IC Design 4 - - 3
2 EC2512 Embedded System Design 3 - - 2
3 EC2556 Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation 3 - - 2
4 Professional Elective - III 4 - - 3
5 Professional Elective - IV 4 - - 3
6 Open Elective-IV(see list of Open Electives) 4 - - 3
7 EC2564 Microwave and Optical Communications Lab - - 4 2
8 EC2565 Mini Project on Smart Applications - - 4 2
9 EC2566 Internship / Industrial Training / Practical Training - - - 2
Total 22 - 8 22
9 Optional Elective - VII - - - 3
EE2554 i) Digital Control Systems
CT2521 ii) Artificial Intelligence
EC2567 iii) Transform Techniques
10 EC2568 Optional Elective - VIII (MOOCs) - - - 2
Students shall opt from the list of MOOCs given by the Department)

IV Year - II Semester
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
1 Professional Elective - V 4 - - 3
2 Professional Elective - VI 4 - - 3
3 EC2577 Project - - 20 10
Total 8 - 20 16

L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 24

 Open Elective - I
Department No.of Periods
Sl. Title of the Subject per week No.of
Offering the
No. Credits
Subject L T P
1 CE2515 Elements of Civil Engineering CE 4 - - 3
(Other than CE)
2 CE2516 Building Services CE 4 - - 3
3 EE2515 Electrical Materials EEE 4 - - 3
4 EE2516 Control Systems Engineering EEE 4 - - 3
(Other than EEE & ECE)
5 ME2520 Elements of Manufacturing Processes ME 4 - - 3
(Other than ME)
6 ME2521 Automotive Engineering ME 4 - - 3
(Other than ME)
7 EC2531 Introduction to MPMC ECE 4 - - 3
(Other than ECE/EEE/CSE/IT)
8 EC2532 Fundamentals of Communications ECE 4 - - 3
(Other than ECE)
9 CT2514 Computer Graphics (Other than IT) CSE 4 - - 3
10 CT2507 Object Oriented Programming through Java CSE 4 - - 3
(other than CSE & IT)
11 CT2515 Systems Software IT 4 - - 3
12 IT2502 Web Programming(Other than CSE & IT) IT 4 - - 3
13 MA2516 Mathematical Cryptography(Other than CSE) BS&H 4 - - 3
14 PH2508 Semiconductor Physics (Other than ECE) BS&H 4 - - 3
Open Elective - II
Department No.of Periods
Sl. Title of the Subject per week No.of
Offering the
No. Credits
Subject L T P
1 CE2530 Geoinformatics (other than CE) CE 4 - - 3
2 CE2531 Environmental Sanitation CE 4 - - 3
3 EE2523 Modeling & Simulation of Engineering Systems EEE 4 - - 3
4 EE2524 Power Systems Engineering EEE 4 - - 3
(Other than EEE)
5 ME2532 Elements of Mechanical Transmission ME 4 - - 3
(Other than ME)
6 ME2533 Material Handling Equipment ME 4 - - 3
7 EC2543 Automotive Electronics ECE 4 - - 3
8 EC2544 Introduction to MEMS ECE 4 - - 3
(other than ECE)
9 CS2508 Data Science CSE 4 - - 3
10 CT2524 Virtual and Augmented Reality CSE 4 - - 3
(other than IT)
11 IT2505 Open Source Software IT 4 - - 3
12 IT2506 Cyber Laws IT 4 - - 3
13 MA2517 Quality, Reliability and Operations Research BS&H 4 - - 3
L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 25

 Open Elective - III
Department No.of Periods
Sl. Title of the Subject per week No.of
Offering the
No. Credits
Subject L T P
1 CE2543 Hydrology (Other than CE) CE 4 - - 3
2 CE2544 Planning for Sustainable Development CE 4 - - 3
3 EE2531 Electrical and Hybrid Vehicles EEE 4 - - 3
4 EE2532 Power Plant Instrumentation EEE 4 - - 3
5 ME2541 Material Science (Other than ME) ME 4 - - 3
6 ME2542 Renewable Energy Sources ME 4 - - 3
(Other than ME)
7 EC2523 Assistive Technologies ECE 4 - - 3
(Other than ECE)
8 EC2507 Bio-Medical Engineering ECE 4 - - 3
(Other than EEE & ECE)
9 CS2512 Node and Angular JS CSE 4 - - 3
10 CS2513 Cyber Security CSE 4 - - 3
11 CT2529 Scripting Languages IT 4 - - 3
(Other than CSE)
12 CT2531 Software Project Management IT 4 - - 3
(Other than CSE)
13 MA2518 Elements of Stochastic Processes BS&H 4 - - 3
14 EG2505 Academic Communication ENGLISH 4 - - 3
Open Elective - IV
Department No.of Periods
Sl. Title of the Subject per week No.of
Offering the
No. Credits
Subject L T P
1 CE2562 Disaster Management CE 4 - - 3
(Other than CE)
2 CE2563 Repair and Retrofitting Techniques CE 4 - - 3
3 EE2542 Modern Optimization Techniques EEE 4 - - 3
4 EE2543 Electrical Power Utilization EEE 4 - - 3
(Other than EEE)
5 ME2553 Green Engineering ME 4 - - 3
6 ME2554 Non Destructive Evaluation ME 4 - - 3
(Other than ME)
7 EC2563 Cyber Physical Systems ECE 4 - - 3
8 EC2508 Signals and Systems ECE 4 - - 3
(Other than EEE & ECE)
9 CS2521 Digital Forensics CSE 4 - - 3
10 CS2522 Business Intelligence & Decision Support Systems CSE 4 - - 3
11 IT2521 Adhoc and Sensor Networks IT 4 - - 3
12 CT2537 Information Retrieval Systems IT 4 - - 3
(Other than CSE)
13 MA2514 Fuzzy Logic (Other than EEE, ME & CSE) BS&H 4 - - 3

L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 26

 Professional Electives
No.of Periods
Sl. Course per week No.of
No. Code Name of the Course / Laboratory
Credits
L T P
Professional Elective - I 4 - - 3
EC2540 i) CAD for VLSI
EC2541 ii) Computer Organization
EC2542 iii) Computer and Communication Networks
EC2507 iv) Biomedical Engineering

Professional Elective - II 4 - - 3
EC2549 i) Analog IC Design
EC2516 ii) Nano Electronics
EC2550 iii) Smart Antennas
EC2551 iv) Coding Theory

Professional Elective - III 4 - - 3

EC2557 i) Mixed Signal IC Design
EC2558 ii) Cellular and Mobile Communications
EC2559 iii) Digital TV Engineering
EC2514 iv) DSP Processors and Architectures

Professional Elective - IV 4 - - 3
EC2560 i) System on Chip Design
EC2561 ii) Wireless Sensor Networks
EC2562 iii) Satellite Communication
EC2518 iv) Digital Image Processing

Professional Elective - V 4 - - 3
EC2569 i) Low Power VLSI Circuits
EC2570 ii) Real Time Operating Systems
EC2571 iii) Speech Processing
EC2572 iv) Adaptive Signal Processing

Professional Elective - VI 4 - - 3
EC2573 i) ASIC Design
EC2574 ii) Embedded C
EC2575 iii) RADAR Engineering
EC2576 iv) Multi Rate Signal Processing
L : Lecture T : Tutorial P : Practical

Electronics and Communication Engineering 27

Electronics and Communication Engineering
IX. SYLLABUS

FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH
(Common to All Branches)
I Year – I Semester
Lecture :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives:
To equip the students for their present and future academic pursuits involving the
following:
• listening to (and viewing) classroom lectures and other academic
presentations with a reasonable degree of accuracy, understanding, and
appreciation, and responding to them appropriately;
• Speaking in academic (e.g. classroom discussions) and social contexts with
a fair degree of fluency, accuracy and intelligibility, and with due attention to
factors such as purpose, audience, context, and culture;
• reading a wide range of informational and functional texts, including course
books and reference materials, from print and non-print sources and using
them for a variety of purposes; and
• writing for academic purposes (e.g. assignments, examination answers)
in an organized way following the rules of discourse and using vocabulary
and grammar appropriately and accurately; and
• To develop in them the communication strategies and social graces necessary
for functioning effectively in social, academic, and other situations in which
they may be called upon to use English.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of Functional English, the students will be able to
• speak with a reasonable degree of fluency using communication strategies
as well as conventions of politeness and courtesy;
• listen to short audio and video clips in both standard Indian accent and native
English accent and gain both understanding of messages and sensitivity to
native- speaker accents;
• read fluently comprehending texts of different kinds;
• write coherent paragraphs and technical reports; and
• guard against mistakes Indians typically make in their speech and writing in
English

Electronics and Communication Engineering 29

Course Content
LEVEL - I: Intermediate (for the first mid-semester)
1. (a) From the textbook “Innovate with English”: Unit II
Listening : Conversations using Communicative functions.
Reading Comprehension : Text: ‘Concerning the Unknown Engineer’
Remedial Grammar : Simple Present, Present Continuous, Use of have
to structure and Indianism.
Writing : Paragraph Writing
(b) From the textbook “Innovate with English”: Unit III
Listening : Conversations using Communicative functions
(Narrating Events)
Reading Comprehension : Text: ‘Man and his endangered home’
Remedial Grammar : Simple past tense, Present Perfect, articles.
Writing : Organization: coherence
2. From the textbook “Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering and
Technology”
The following portions only:
GRE Words (Unit 1.1) One-Word Substitutes (Unit 4.1)
Collocations (Unit 2.1) Idioms (Unit 5.1)
Commonly Confused Words (Unit 3.1) Phrasal Verbs (Unit 6.1)
3. From Great Stories in Easy English
“The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn” by Mark Twain
LEVEL - II: Advanced (for the second mid-semester)
1. From the textbook “Innovate with English”: Unit IV
Listening : Interacting with faculty members
Reading Comprehension : Text: ‘Clutter’
Remedial Grammar : Futurity
Writing : Clutter-free writing
2. From Department-produced materials
Technical report writing
3. From the textbook “Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering and
Technology”
The following portions only:
GRE Words (Unit 1.2) One-Word Substitutes (Unit 4.2)
Collocations (Unit 2.2) Idioms (Unit 5.2)
Commonly Confused Words (Unit 3.2) Phrasal Verbs (Unit 6.2)
4. From Great Stories in Easy English
“More Tales from Shakespeare” by Charles and Mary Lamb

Electronics and Communication Engineering 30

Text books
a) Samson, T. (2010). Innovate with English. Hyderabad: Foundation
• Units TWO, THREE and FOUR only
b) Vijayalakshmi, M. et al (2014). Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering
and Technology. Hyderabad: Maruthi Publications.
c) The following simplified classics, one for each mid-semester, from the
series, Great Stories in Easy English, published by S. Chand & Company
Limited:
• The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn by Mark Twain
• More Tales from Shakespeare
d) Audio and video clips carefully selected by the Department in order to sensitize
the students to native-speaker accents
e) Department-produced material on technical report writing
Testing Pattern
First Mid-Term Examination
The paper consists of four questions. All questions are compulsory; there is no
choice.
I. Reading an unseen passage and answering two sets of questions on it:
a) Ten comprehension questions. Critical questions requiring analysis, inference,
prediction, evaluation, etc. are to be set. Five of the ten questions will be
multiple-choice questions. In case of non-multiple-choice questions, the length
of each answer should not exceed 50 words. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Writing a discussion either on an aspect related to the ideas expressed in the
passage but not explicitly dealt with in it, or on an idea not fully dealt with,
allowing scope for discussion. Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
II. Ten contextualized questions of the following from Vocabulary Builder: GRE
Words: 1.1; Collocations: 2.1; Commonly confused words: 3.1; One-word
substitutes: 4.1; Idioms: 5.1; and Phrasal verbs: 6.1 Marks: 10 x 1 = 10
III.
a) Correction of grammatical errors: ten sentences with grammatical errors of
the following types (dealt with in Units 2 and 3 of Innovate with English) will be
given: simple present, present continuous, use of have to structure and
Indianism Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Ten objective-type questions based on one retold classic: The Adventures of
Huckleberry Finn. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
IV.
a) Completing a conversation (in which informational and interactional functions
are performed) with appropriate expressions. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Reading two poorly-written paragraphs and performing the following tasks:

Electronics and Communication Engineering 31

 i. Identifying the topic sentence of paragraph (a) and the sentences that do
not support the topic sentence, and writing in the answer book the topic
sentence and the irrelevant sentences. Marks: 5 x ½ = 2½
ii. Re-writing paragraph (b), which is poorly organized, into a coherent
paragraph choosing appropriate sequence signals or connectives.
Marks: 5 x ½ = 2½
Second Mid-Term Examination
The paper consists of four questions All questions are compulsory; there is no
choice.
I.a)Ten contextualized questions on the following from Vocabulary Builder: GRE
Words: 1.2; Collocations: 2.2; Commonly confused words: 3.2; One- word
substitutes: 4.2; Idioms: 5.2; and Phrasal verbs: 6.2. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Analyzing a service encounter – an interaction, either a direct personal one,
or over the telephone (e.g. making enquires at the reception counter in a
hotel, an interaction with a salesman at a mall, asking for information on the
telephone) – and
i. identifying the reasons for the failure or breakdown of communication in the
conversation. Marks: 5 x ½ = 2½
ii. rewriting the conversation making the communication successful. In the rewritten
conversation, the partners in the conversation must sound polite and positive,
using the communication strategies listed in the question.Marks: 5 x ½ = 2½
II. Reading an unseen passage and answering two sets of questions on it:
a) Ten comprehension questions. Critical questions requiring analysis, inference,
prediction, evaluation, etc. are to be set. Five of the ten questions will be
multiple-choice questions. In case of non-multiple-choice questions, the length
of each answer should not exceed 50 words. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Writing a discussion either on an aspect related to the ideas expressed in the
passage but not explicitly dealt with in it, or on an idea not fully dealt with,
allowing scope for discussion. Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
III.
a) Writing a technical report on the given situation. The report must:
follow the conventions of technical report writing
use language and style appropriate to technical report writing
Marks: 5 x 1 = 5
b) Writing a paragraph of 100 - 150 words on the given topic (e.g. Should there be
a dress code in colleges?). The paragraph must have:
adequate and relevant ideas on the topic with the ideas properly organized
using strategies such as coherence and cohesion;
a topic sentence; and
proper choice of vocabulary and grammatical accuracy.Marks: 5 x 1 = 5

Electronics and Communication Engineering 32

IV.
a) Correction of grammatical errors: ten sentences with grammatical errors of
the following types (dealt with in Unit 4 of Innovate with English) will be given:
futurity and Indianism. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Ten objective-type questions based on one retold classic: More Tales from
Shakespeare. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
Semester End Examination
Answer any five questions. Question one is compulsory.

I. Reading an unseen (unfamiliar) passage, preferably one taken from a

newspaper or a magazine, on a topical event or situation and answering three
sets of questions on it:
a. Ten comprehension questions:
• Critical questions requiring analysis, inference, prediction, evaluation,
etc. are to be set; ‘information’ questions involving a mere reproduction
of the content should be avoided.
• Three of the ten questions should be multiple-choice questions.
• In case of non-multiple-choice questions, the length of each answer
should not exceed 50 words. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b. Finding four one-word substitutes in the passage for the expressions given.
Marks: 4 x ½ = 2
c. Writing a discussion either on an aspect related to the ideas expressed in the
passage but not explicitly dealt with in it, or on an idea not fully dealt with,
allowing scope for discussion. Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
II. Reading a dialogue (in which informational and interactional functions are
performed) and answering two questions on it:
a. Completing the dialogue with appropriate expressionsMarks: 10 x ½ = 5
b. Extending the scope of the dialogue using at least five of the given
communication strategies/functions. Marks: 1 x 7 = 7
III. Analysing a service encounter – an interaction, either a direct personal one, or
over the telephone, e.g. making enquiries at the reception counter in a hotel,
an interaction with a salesman at a mall, asking for information on the telephone
– and
a. identifying the reasons for the failure or breakdown of communication in the
onversation Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
b. rewriting the conversation making the communication successful. In the
rewritten conversation, the partners in the conversation must sound polite
and positive, using the communication strategies listed in the question.
Marks: 1 x 7 = 7

Electronics and Communication Engineering 33

IV. Reading two badly-written paragraphs and performing the following tasks:
a. Identifying the topic sentence of paragraph (a) and the sentences that do
not support the topic sentence, and writing in the answer book the topic
sentence and the irrelevant sentences. Marks: 1 x 6 = 6
b. Re-writing paragraph (b), which is poorly organized, into a coherent
paragraph choosing appropriate sequence signals or connectives
Marks: 1 x 6 = 6
V.
a. Writing two paragraphs of 150 words each on the given topics (e.g. Should
there be a dress code in colleges?, Women are better administrators than
men). Each paragraph must have:
• adequate and relevant ideas on the topic with the ideas properly organized
using strategies such as coherence and cohesion;
• a topic sentence; and
• proper choice of vocabulary and grammatical accuracy. Marks: 1 x 6 = 6
b. Writing a technical report on the given situation. The report must:
• follow the conventions of technical report writing
• use language and style appropriate to technical report writing
Marks: 1 x 6 = 6
VI. Contextualized vocabulary questions with two items on each one of the following from
Vocabulary Builder (listed as 2 under F. TEXTBOOKS above):
• GRE Words (Units 1.1 and 1.2)
• Collocations (Units 2.1 and 2.2)
• Commonly Confused Words (Units 3.1 and 3.2)
• One-Word Substitutes (Units 4.1and 4.2)
• Idioms (Units 5.1 and 5.2)
• Phrasal Verbs (Units 6.1 and 6.2)
For example, in the question on idioms, two sentences/contexts with an idiom
in each may be given, and the examinee will have to identify the most appropriate
meaning of the idiom from among the four options given.Marks: 12 x 1 = 12
VII. Correction of grammatical errors:
• Either a conversation with twelve grammatical errors of the types dealt with
in Textbook 1 (listed under F. TEXTBOOKS in Section 2), or isolated
sentences with twelve grammatical errors will be given.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 34

 • The errors will include at least six typical instances of Indianism widely
believed to be inappropriate in standard English.
• If isolated sentences with errors are given, they are not to be given in
isolation from their contexts; a conversation with errors of the kind specified
above will serve the purpose better.
• The examinees are expected to rewrite the sentences in the answer book,
correcting them. Marks: 12 x 1 = 12

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 35

 LINEAR ALGEBRA & DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
(Common to CE, EEE, ME & ECE)
I Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 4 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand the concepts of eigenvalues and eigenvectors.
• To know the procedures to find the solutions of first and second order differential
equations.
• To understand different procedures to solve first order linear & non-linear
partial differential equations.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• use the concepts of eigenvalues and eigenvectors in solving engineering
problems.
• apply 1st & 2nd order differential equations to solve various engineering
problems.
• apply the techniques of partial differentiation to find maxima and minima of
two/three variables.
• solve first order linear & non-linear partial differential equations.
Course Content
UNIT– I: System of Linear Equations
Rank of a matrix - Echelon form, Normal form, System of equations - consistence
and inconsistence, solving non-homogeneous system of equations by LU-
Decomposition.
UNIT– II: Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Properties of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors (without
proof), Cayley –Hamilton theorem (without Proof) –finding inverse and power of a
matrix.
UNIT– III: First order ordinary Differential Equations
Exact and non-exact differential equations, Applications- Newton’s Law of cooling
and Orthogonal trajectories.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 36

UNIT– IV: Higher Order Linear ordinary Differential Equations
Solving Homogeneous differential equations, solving Non-Homogeneous differential
equations when RHS terms are of the form eax sin ax, cos ax, polynomial in x, eax
v(x), xv(x) and Euler-Cauchy equation.

UNIT– V: Partial Differentiation

Total derivative, chain rule, Jacobian, Application- finding maxima and minima
(two & three variables).
UNIT– VI: First order P.D.E
Forming PDE by eliminating arbitrary functions. Solutions of linear PDE (by
Lagrange’s subsidiary equation). Solutions of Non-linear PDE by Charpit’s method.
Text Books
nd
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 edition, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi, 2012.
2. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata-Mc Graw Hill Company
Limited.
Reference Books
1. U.M.Swamy, A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics – I & II, 2nd Edition,
Excel Books, New Delhi, 2011.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th edition, Maitrey
Printech Pvt. Ltd, Noida, 2009.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 37

 ENGINEER AND SOCIETY
(Common to CE, EEE & ECE)
I Year – I Semester
Lecture :3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To understand the Ethics and Human Values.
• To equip the students to have a basic awareness on environmental and socio-
economic factors.
• To familiarize with the rights and responsibilities of an engineer.
• To elucidate the rules and regulations of patents and trade laws.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• comprehend different moral perspectives and one’s own Ethical standards.
• understand the concept of safety and risk.
• explain different initiatives to protect nature.
• identify the role of Information Technology.
• understand different types of infringement of Intellectual Property Rights.
• analyze the importance of Entrepreneurship.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Human Values
What is engineering – who is an engineer - Morals, Values and Ethics – Integrity
– Work Ethics – Service Learning – Civic Virtue -Value time – Co-operation –
Commitment – Empathy–Self-confidence –Character.
UNIT–II: Engineer’s Responsibilities and Rights
Safety and risk –Types of risks – Voluntary vs. Involuntary risk –Short Term vs.
Long Term Consequences – Expected Probability – Reversible Effects –Threshold
Levels for Risk – Delayed vs. Immediate Risk – Collegiality – Techniques for
achieving Collegiality- Two senses of Loyalty –Rights – Professional Responsibilities
– Confidential and Proprietary information.
UNIT–III: Global climatic issues and mitigation strategies
Greenhouse effect – global warming – acid rain – ozone layer depletion –
International efforts-key initiatives of Montreal protocol, Rio declaration, Kyoto
protocol, Johannesburg summit.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 38

UNIT–IV: Future challenges to society
Sustainable development – Measures for sustainable development – Water
conservation practices – Rain water harvesting methods- Watershed management
– Resettlements and Rehabilitation of people- waste land reclamation – Role of
information technology- Role of an engineer in mitigating societal problems.
UNIT–V: Patent law, Trade Marks and Copyrights
Introduction, Types of IPR – Patent requirements - Application process
– Ownership – Transfer – Infringement – Litigation.
Trade Mark and Copyrights: Introduction – Registration Process – Transfer –
Infringement.
UNIT–VI: Entrepreneurship
Meaning, definition& concept of Entrepreneurship, characteristics &skills of
entrepreneur, Role of an entrepreneur in economic development.
Text Books
1. Professional ethics and human values by Ddharanikota Suyodana, Maruti
publications(unit 1,2).
2. Environmental studies” by Deeksha Dave, P. Udaya Bhaskar,Cengage
Learning.(unit 3,4).
3. “Intellectual Property” by Deborah E.Bouchoux, Cengage Learning, New
Delhi.(unit 5).
4. “Entrepreneurship”, by Narayana Reddy, Cengage Learning.(unit 6)
Reference Books
1. Professional Ethics and Human Values, by A. Alavudeen, R. KalilRahman
and M.Jayakumaran- University Science Press.
2. Environmental Studies by R. Rajagopalan 2nd Edition 2011, Oxford University
Press.
3. Intellectual Property Rights, R.Radha Krishnan, S.Balasubramanian Excel
Books, New Delhi.
4. Intellectual Property Rights, Prabhuddha Ganguli. Tata McGrawHill, New
Delhi.
5. Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship by P H.Nandan, PHI Learning, New Delhi.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 39

 SOLID STATE PHYSICS
I Year – I Semester
Lecture :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
The course is designed to make the students to learn the conditions for propagation
of laser light in guided medium understand principles of solid state materials for
use in the engineering applications
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain construction and working of laser
• relate the principles of propagation of light in optical fibers for applications in
communications.
• identify conductivity mechanism in semiconductors
• determine types of polarization and classius-mossoti relation
• Differentiate classical and quantum free electron theories
• derive orbital and spin contribution for magnetism
Course Content
UNIT– I: Laser
Spontaneous and stimulated emission - Einstein’s coefficient and their relations -
basic characteristics of laser - Basic Requirements of laser - Helium-Neon laser
- Semiconductor laser - CO2 laser - Applications of Laser
UNIT– II: Optical fiber
Basic principle of optical fiber - Construction of optical fiber - Acceptance angle,
Acceptance cone - Numerical Aperture - Types of optical fiber - Light wave
communication by using optical fiber
UNIT– III: Physics of Semiconductor
Properties of Fermi Dirac energy distribution function - Concentration of carriers
in conduction band , valance band - Intrinsic carrier concentration - Drift and
diffusion currents - Einstein’s relations - Hall effect - Applications of hall effect
UNIT– IV: Dielectrics
Expression for local field - Classius mosotti relation - Types of polarization -
Frequency response curve of dielectics - Dielectric loss - Dielectric strength -
Loss tangent
UNIT– V: Free electron and band theory of metals
Classical free electron theory - Drawbacks of classical free electron theory –
Fermi level and Fermi Dirac energy distribution function - Quantum free electron
theory – Band theory-Bloch function - Kronig -penney model

Electronics and Communication Engineering 40

UNIT– VI: magnetic materials
Permeability, magnetization - Origin of magnetism - Classification of magnetic
materials - Domain theory (qualitative) – Hystyresis - Soft and hard magnetic -
Applications
Text Books
1. S.O.Pillai, Solid state physics, (7th Edition), New Age International. (unit -
3,4,5,6)
2. Dr.M.N. Avadhanulu,Dr. P.G.Kshirsagar, Engineering Physics (9th Edition),
S.Chand Publications (unit-1,2)
Reference Books
1. A.J.Dekker, Solid state physics, Published by Macmillan India.
2. Charles Kittel, Introduction to solid state physics, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.
3. B.B. Laud, Laser and Non-Linear Optics, New Age international publishers
4. P.K. Palanisamy, Engineering Physics , SciTech publications

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 41

PROBLEM SOLVING THROUGH COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
(Common to ECE, CSE & IT)
I Year – I Semester
Lecture :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To emphasize the use of flowcharts and pseudo code in problem solving.
• To gain knowledge in C language.
• To apply C language in problem solving.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline problem solving steps, c-tokens and data types.
• design algorithm and flowchart for solving problem.
• use control statements for writing the programs.
• apply the concepts of arrays and strings in problem solving.
• use pointers and funtions to develop C programs.
• distinguish structures and unions and develop programs using structures.
• demonstrate the operations on files.
Course Content
UNIT–I
Problem Solving Steps – Understanding problem, developing algorithm, flowchart,
coding, debugging and testing.
General form of a C program, C Tokens, basic data types, type conversion, variable
declarations, console I/O statements, order of evaluation.
Sample problems such as evaluating formulae.
UNIT–II
Control Statements: Selection Statements – if, if-else, nested if, else-if, switch
and conditional operator.
Iteration Statements – for, while and do-while.
Jump Statements – return, goto, break, exit and continue.
Problem Solving - Factorial computation, generation of Fibonacci sequence,
reversing digits of an integer, generating prime numbers.
UNIT–III
Arrays and Strings– Declaring, initializing, accessing and display of one dimensional
and two dimensional arrays.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 42

Problem Solving – Computing mean and variance of a set of numbers, reverse
the elements in an array, addition of two matrices.
UNIT–IV
Pointers – Declarations, initialization and operations.
Functions – General form of functions, passing parameters by value and by address,
recursive functions, dynamic memory allocation functions, pointers and arrays,
pointers and functions, and string handling functions.
Problem solving - Print the sum of all elements of the array using pointers,
swapping of two numbers, calculate the GCD of two non-negative integers using
recursion.
UNIT–V
Structures -Definition, declaration, initialization, accessing structure members,
nested structures, structures and functions, unions.
Problem solving- Implement a structure to read and display the Name, Date of
Birth and Salary of Employees, Functions to perform read, add and write two
complex numbers using Structures.
UNIT–VI
File Handling - Text and binary files, file handling functions, file processing operations
– inserting, deleting, searching and updating a record and displaying file contents,
random access to files.
Problem solving – Copy the contents of one file to another, count the number of
characters, words and lines in a file.
Text Books
1 Programming in C, Second Edition Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, OXFORD
Higher Education.
2 C Programming, E Balaguruswamy, 3rd edition, TMH.
Reference Books
1 Programming in C, Reema Thareja, OXFORD.
2 C Programming, A Problem Solving Approach, Forouzan, Gilberg, Prasad,
CENGAGE.
3 R G Dromey, How to Solve it by Computer, Prentice-Hall of India, 1999.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 43

 FUNCTIONAL ENGLISH LAB
(Common to All Branches)
I Year – I Semester
Practical :2 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :1 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
Functional English (Lab) seeks to develop in the students
• the communication strategies and social graces necessary in order to function
effectively in social and other situations in which they may be called upon to
speak in English; and
• a greater awareness of English pronunciation and provides for focused practice
with the sounds of English and intonation patterns improve their pronunciation
skills and to enable them to speak with a reasonable degree of intelligibility.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of Functional English (Lab), the students will be able to
• give short impromptu speeches with confidence and fluency and take part in
conversations in different functional contexts using English following
appropriate communication strategies.
• check the pronunciation of words in a dictionary using their knowledge of
phonemic symbols.
• speak English with adequate attention to stress, rhythm, and intonation; and
• speak without their pronunciation being marred by regional peculiarities,
achieving thereby greater intelligibility in their communication with non-Telugu
speakers of English.
Course Content
UNIT–I
a. Greeting, introducing and taking leave b. Pure vowels
UNIT–II
a. Giving information and asking for information b. Diphthongs
UNIT–III
a. Inviting, accepting and declining invitations b. Consonants
UNIT–IV
a. Commands, instructions and requests b. Accent and rhythm
UNIT–V
a. Suggestions and opinions b. Intonation

Electronics and Communication Engineering 44

Text Books
1. Hari Prasad, M., Salivendra Raju, J., and Suvarna Lakshmi, G. (2013).
Strengthen Your Communication Skills. Hyderabad: Maruthi Publications.
2. Handouts produced by the Department on “difficult sounds,” consonant
clusters, the other problems of Telugu learners of English, listening
comprehension, and oral reading
3. The following pieces of software:
• ‘Multimedia Language Lab’ provided by K-Van Solution, Hyderabad
• ‘Foundation Course in Communication Skills’ provided by the Andhra
Pradesh State Council of Higher Education (APSCHE), Government of Andhra
Pradesh.
4. Audio and video clips such as ‘BBC English’
Testing Pattern
I. Internal 40 marks
a. Regular performance in the Language/Communications Lab 15 marks
b. Completing the tasks in the lab manual 10 marks
c. Testing of listening : Listening to a short audio clip of a speech/conversation
in British accent and answering questions at the ‘information’ level.
05 marks
d. Test of reading: Role-playing a dialogue with proper pronunciation and with
reasonable attention to tone groups, stress, rhythm and intonation.
10 marks
II. External 60 marks
a. Test of writing
Writing a dialogue on the situation set 10 mark
Answering ‘Yes/No’ questions on pronunciation 05 mark
Marking sentence stress and intonation 05 marks
b. Test of speaking 20 marks
Role-playing a situational dialogue (e.g. ‘At the railway station,’ ‘At the
restaurant’) with proper pronunciation and with reasonable attention to tone
groups, stress, rhythm, and intonation
c. Viva voce (with an external examiner) 20 marks
Speaking for one minute on a given topic
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 45

 SOLID STATE PHYSICS LAB
I Year – II Semester
Practical :2 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :1 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To draw the relevance between the theoretical knowledge and to imply it in a
practical manner with respect to analyze various electronic circuits and its
components.
• Understand the behaviour and characteristics of various active and passive
components.
• To learn utilization of laser source for optical fiber communication
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify energy gap of a semiconductor
• draw characteristic curves to estimate thermal coefficient of a thermsitor
• observe self timer and tuning nature of passive components like RC,LCR
• verify magnetic field along the axis of a circular coil.
• determine frequency of AC and unknown tuning fork
• calculate light gathering power of optical fiber
• estimate wavelength of unknown source
List of Experiments
S.No. Name of the experiment- Aim
1 Determination of bending losses in optical fiber
2 Determination of numerical aperture of an optical fiber
3 Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor
4 Determination of thermal resistance by thermistor
5 Determination of time constant of RC circuit
6 Determination of resonance frequency of LCR circuit in series and parallel
7 Study of the characteristics of a zenar diode.
8 Determination of magnetic field along the axis of circular disc by using
Stewart and Gee’s Apparatus
9 Study normal modes in string using forced vibrations in rods-Melde’s experiment.
10 Determination of Frequency of A.C supply by sono meter.
11 Determination of Hall coefficient by Hall effect
12 Draw Hysteresis curve of a ferro magnetic material
Reference Books
1. Vijay Kumar & T. Radha Krishna, Practical Physics for engineering students.
2. Dr. Y.Aparna and Dr. K.Venkateswara Rao, Lab manual of Engineering
Physics, VGS Books links, Vijayawada.
3. R.Jayaraman,V.Umadevi,S.Maruthamuthu,B.Saravana Kumar, Engineering
Physics laboratory manual(1st edition) Pearson publishers.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 46

 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LAB
(Common to ECE, CSE & IT)
I Year – I Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the discrete components of a computer, MS Office
• To develop C Programs to solve problems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Identify discrete components of computers.
• Prepare applications using MS Office.
• Apply problem solving steps to solve a problem.
• Develop a C program for a given problem.
List of Exercises
Exercise 1:
a. Identifying the discrete components of a computer.
b. Creating a document using MS Word.
Exercise 2:
a. Familiarizing with the usage and applications of MS Excel.
b. Creating a presentation using MS PowerPoint.
Exercise 3: Basics of C
a. Write a C program to calculate the area of triangle using the formula area =
(s (s-a) (s-b)(s-c))1/2 where s= (a+b+c)/2
b. Write a C program to find the largest of three numbers using ternary operator.
Exercise 4: Selection Statements
Implement a C program for the following:
a. Find the roots of a quadratic equation.
b. Calculate electricity bill for the consumed units – assume suitable
constraints.
c. Read two integer operands and one operator form the user, perform the
operation and then print the result. (Consider the operators +,-,*, /, % and
use Switch Statement)
Exercise 5: Iterative statements
Develop a C program for the following:
a. Display first N natural numbers.
b. Check whether given number is Prime (or) not.
c. Find the reverse of a given number.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 47

Exercise 6: Arrays
Design a C program for the following :
a. To Search whether the given element is in the array.
b. To Perform Addition and multiplication of two Matrices.
Exercise 7: Strings
Develop a C program for the following:
a. To Check whether the given String is a Palindrome (Without using String
Handling functions).
b. To Illustrate string handling functions-strlen(), strcmp(), strcat(), strcpy(),
strrev()
Exercise 8: Functions
Implement a C program for the following:
a. To Sort a given set of numbers in ascending order using functions.
b. To find the factorial of a given integer using recursive function.
c. To generate Fibonacci series using non-recursive function
Exercise 9: Pointers
Implement a C program for the following:
a. Function to exchange (Swap) values of two integers using call by reference.
b. Illustrate the usage of dynamic memory management functions.
Exercise 10: Structures
Develop a C program for the following:
a. To implement a structure to read and display the Name, date of Birth and
salary of an Employee.
b. To display the Name, Marks in five subjects and total marks of given number
of students. (Using array of structures).
c. Functions to perform the following operations using Structure:
i) Addition of two complex numbers
ii) Multiplication of two complex numbers.
Exercise 11: Files
Implement a C program for the following:
a. To copy contents of one file to another.
b. To count the number of characters, words and lines in a file.

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 48

 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION
(Common to All Branches)
I Year – II Semester
Lecture :3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To equip the students with common employability skills (the skills required for
gaining employment and performing successfully in different careers) which can
enable them to perform communication tasks of increasing length and complexity.
• To develop in them the interactional communication strategies and social graces
which have the potential to add to the effectiveness of professional communication.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of Professional Communication, the students will be
able to
• speak with a reasonable degree of fluency and accuracy in professional
communication situations (such as arriving at a consensus through discussion,
making a presentation, and taking part in a telephone conversation)
• listen to short audio and video clips in native English accent (British and American),
and gain both understanding of messages and sensitivity to native-speaker accents
• read fluently, comprehending texts of different kinds using multiple strategies
and higher-order skills
• produce written discourses of different kinds;
• guard against grammatical errors Indians typically make in their speech and
writing in English
Course Content
LEVEL - I: Intermediate (for the first mid-semester)
1. From the textbook “Innovate with English”: Unit VII
Listening : Conversations using Communicative functions
Reading Comprehension : Text: ‘Priming the Pump’
Remedial Grammar : if-clause and Indianism
Writing : Email writing
2. From the textbook “Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering and
Technology”
The following portions only:
GRE Words (Unit 1.3) One-Word Substitutes (Unit 4.3)
Collocations (Unit 2.3) Idioms (Unit 5.3)
Commonly Confused Words (Unit 3.3) Phrasal Verbs (Unit 6.3)
3. From Great Stories in Easy English
“Pride and Prejudice” by Jane Austen

Electronics and Communication Engineering 49

LEVEL - II: Advanced (for the second mid-semester)
1. From the textbook “Innovate with English”: Unit VIII
Listening : Conversations using communicative functions
Reading Comprehension : Text: ‘Bionics’
Remedial Grammar : Articles and Indianism
Writing : Email writing
2. From the textbook “Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering and
Technology”
The following portions only:
GRE Words (Unit 1.4) One-Word Substitutes (Unit 4.4)
Collocations (Unit 2.4) Idioms (Unit 5.4)
Commonly Confused Words (Unit 3.4) Phrasal Verbs (Unit 6.4)
3. From Great Stories in Easy English
“Gulliver’s Travels” by Jonathan Swift
Textbooks
1. Samson, T. (2010). Innovate with English. Hyderabad: Foundation
• Unit SEVEN and EIGHT only
2. Vijayalakshmi, M. et al (2014). Vocabulary Builder for Students of Engineering
and Technology. Hyderabad: Maruthi Publications.
3. The following simplified classics, one for each mid-semester, from the series,
Great Stories in Easy English, published by S. Chand & Company Limited:
• Pride and Prejudice by Jane Austen
• Gulliver’s Travels by Jonathan Swift
4. Audio and video clips carefully selected by the Department in order to sensitize
the students to native-speaker accents.
Testing Pattern
First Mid-Term Examination
The paper consists of four questions. All questions are compulsory; there is no
choice.
I. Reading an unseen passage and answering two sets of questions on it:
a) Ten comprehension questions. Critical questions requiring analysis, inference,
prediction, evaluation, interpretation of the writer’s ideas, etc. are to be set.
Five of the ten questions will be multiple-choice questions. In case of non-
multiple-choice questions, the length of each answer should not exceed 50
words. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Writing an essay expressing a point of view on one or more of the issues
flagged up in the question and making a convincing case for the standpoint.
Length: 100 – 150 words. Marks: 1 x 5 = 5

Electronics and Communication Engineering 50

II. Reading a poorly-written e-mail message and doing the following tasks:
a) Analyzing the reasons for the e-mail failing to meet the standards of professional
e-mail communication. The analysis must identify and discuss at least five
reasons. (Length: 100 – 150 words) Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
b) Rewriting the e-mail using the standards of professional e-mail communication.
Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
III.
a) Ten contextualized questions on the following from Vocabulary Builder: GRE
Words: 1.3; Collocations: 2.3; Commonly confused words: 3.3; One- word
substitutes: 4.3; Idioms: 5.3; and Phrasal verbs: 6.3 Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Correction of grammatical errors: ten sentences with grammatical errors of
the following types (dealt with in Unit 7 of Innovate with English) will be given:
if-clause and Indianism Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
IV.
a) Completing a conversation (where informational and interactional functions
are performed) with suitable expressions. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
b) Answering ten ‘true-or-false’ questions on communication strategies and
functions given in form of short dialogues. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
Second Mid-Term Examination
The paper consists of four questions. All questions are compulsory; there is no
choice.
I. Reading a poorly-written e-mail message and doing the following
a) Analyzing the reasons for the e-mail failing to meet the standards of professional
e-mail communication. The analysis must identify and discuss at least five
reasons. (Length: 100 – 150 words) Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
b) Rewriting the e-mail using the standards of professional e-mail communication
Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
II. Reading an unseen passage and answering two sets of questions on it.
a) Ten comprehension questions. Critical questions requiring analysis, inference,
prediction, evaluation, interpretation of the writer’s ideas, etc. are to be set.
Five of the ten questions will be multiple-choice questions. In case of non-
multiple-choice questions, the length of each answer should not exceed 50
words. Marks 10 x ½ = 5
b) Writing an essay expressing a point of view on one or more of the issues
flagged up in the question and making a convincing case for the standpoint.
Length: 100 – 150 words. Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
III.
a) Ten contextualized questions on the following from Vocabulary Builder: GRE
Words: 1.4; Collocations: 2.4; Commonly confused words: 3.4; One- word
substitutes: 4.4; Idioms: 5.4; and Phrasal verbs: 6.4 Marks: 10 x ½ = 5

Electronics and Communication Engineering 51

b) Correction of grammatical errors: ten sentences with grammatical errors of the
following types (dealt with in Unit 8 of Innovate with English) will be given:
articles and Indianism. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
IV. Reading an expository text and doing two tasks:
a) Making notes (identifying the main points of the text and writing them down in
note form)
b) Summarizing the text using the notes already made Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
Semester End Examination
Answer any five questions: Question I is compulsory.
I. Reading a poorly-writen e-mail message and doing the following
task:(Compulsory)
a. Analyzing the reasons for th email failing to meet the standards of professional
email communication. The analysis must identify and discuss at least five
reasons. ( Length: 100-150 words) Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
b. rewriting the email using the standards of professional email communication.
Marks: 1 x 7 = 7
II. Reading the text of a presentation made in a professional context and answering
the following questions:
a. Analysing the passage from the point of view of language and style and identifying
the reasons for the presentation falling short of the standards of professional
presentations (Length of the answer: 100 – 150 words) Marks: 1 x 5 = 5
b. Rewriting the text of the presentation in the light of the analysis made in (a)
above and following the conventions of professional presentations as far as
language and style are concerned. Marks: 1 x 7 = 7
III. Reading an unseen (unfamiliar) passage on an issue related to engineering and
technology or on a professional issue or situation and answering two sets of
questions on it:
a. Ten comprehension questions:
• Critical questions requiring analysis, inference, prediction, evaluation,
interpretation of the writer’s ideas, pinpointing the writer’s attitude/bias, etc.
are to be set; ‘information’ questions involving a mere reproduction of the
content should be avoided.
• At least three of the ten questions should be multiple-choice questions.
• In case of non-multiple-choice questions, the length of each answer should
not exceed 50 words. Marks: 10 x ½ = 5
a. Writing an essay expressing a point of view on one or more of the issues
flagged up in the question and making a convincing case for the standpoint.
Length: 200 – 250 words. Marks: 1 x 7 = 7

Electronics and Communication Engineering 52

IV. Filling in blanks in sentences using GRE words, collocations, one-word
substitutes, commonly-confused words, idioms, and phrasal verbs. The contexts
will be clearly given for each expression, and the questions will be multiple-
choice ones.
• GRE Words (Units 1.3 and 1.4)
• Collocations (Units 2.3 and 2.4)
• Commonly Confused Words (Units 3.3 and 3.4)
• One-Word Substitutes (Units 4.3 and 4.4)
• Idioms (5.3 and 5.4)
• Phrasal Verbs (Units 6.3 and 6.4) Marks: 12 x 1 = 12
V. Reading a dialogue (in which informational and interactional functions are
performed) and answering two questions on it:
a. Completing the dialogue with appropriate expressionsMarks: 10 x ½ = 5
b. Extending the scope of the dialogue using at least five of the given
communication strategies/functions. Marks: 1 x 7 = 7
VI. Correction of grammatical errors:
• Either a conversation with twelve grammatical errors (in the areas of articles,
modal verbs, prepositions, phrasal verbs, and Indianism), or isolated
sentences with twelve grammatical errors will be given.
• If isolated sentences with errors are given, they are not to be given in isolation
from their contexts; a conversation with errors of the kind specified above
will serve the purpose better.
The examinees are expected to rewrite the sentences in the answer book,
correcting hem. Marks: 12 x 1 = 12
VII. Reading an expository text and doing two tasks:
a. Making notes (identifying the main points of the text and writing them down
in note form) Marks: 4 x 1 = 4
b. Summarizing the text using the notes already made Marks: 1 x 8 = 8
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 53

 INTEGRAL TRANSFORMS AND VECTOR CALCULUS
(Common to EEE & ECE)
I Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 4 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To gain the knowledge of Laplace and inverse transforms.
• To understand the concepts of Fourier series and Fourier Transforms.
• To find the solutions of integral problems using vector concepts.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply Laplace transforms to find the solutions of ordinary differential equations.
• express a function in Fourier series and in Fourier integral form.
• apply the concepts of vector differentiation and integration to the surface and
volume integrals.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Laplace Transforms
Laplace transforms of standard functions – Shifting Theorems - Multiplication and
division by t, transforms of derivatives and inproper integrals – Unit step function –
Dirac Delta function.
UNIT– II: Inverse Laplace Transforms
Inverse Laplace transforms – by partial fractions – Convolution theorem (without
proof).
Application: Solution of ordinary differential equations.
UNIT–III: Fourier Series
Fourier series: Determination of Fourier coefficients (without proof) – Fourier
series – Fourier series in an arbitrary interval– Half-range sine and cosine
series
UNIT– IV: Fourier Transforms
Fourier integral theorem (only statement) – Fourier transform – sine and cosine
transforms – properties (without proofs) – inverse Fourier transforms.
UNIT–V: Vector Differentiation
Vector Differentiation: Gradient- Divergence- Curl - Laplacian operator

Electronics and Communication Engineering 54

UNIT–VI: Vector Integration
Line, surface and volume integrals.
Integral theorems: Greens - Stokes - Gauss Divergence Theorems (Without
proof) and related problems. Applications: Work done, flux across the surface
Text Books
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics : 42nd edition, Khanna
Publishers,2012 , New Delhi.
2. B.V.Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata-Mc Graw Hill company
Ltd.
Reference Books
1. U.M.Swamy, A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics – I & II : 2nd Edition,
Excel Books, 2011, New Delhi.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics: 8th edition, Maitrey
Printech Pvt. Ltd, 2009, Noida.
3. Dr. T.K.V.Iyengar, Dr. B.Krishna Gandhi, S.Ranganatham and
th
Dr.M.V.S.S.N.Prasad, Engineering Mathematics, Volume-I , II, III: 11
edition, S. Chand Publishers, 2012, New Delhi.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 55

 APPLIED CHEMISTRY
I Year – II Semester
Lecture :3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the knowledge of batteries, solar cells, sensors and bio-sensors
and boiler troubles with hard water.
• To impart the knowledge of advanced materials viz., LCD, nano materials,
polymers and instrumental methods of analysis.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain the working of lead acid battery, nickel – cadmium battery, lithium ion
battery and fuel cells and to explain the applications of sensors and bio-
sensors.
• explain about new generation photo voltaic cells.
• apply a suitable method of water treatment depending on the quality
requirement.
• explain the methods of synthesis of liquid crystals, nano materials properties
and applications of CNTs and quantum dots.
• explain properties and engineering applications of fibre reinforced plastics,
conducting polymers and bio degradable polymers.
• explain the principles and working of spectrophotometer and flame photometer
for the determination of a given ion in a given solution.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Electrochemical Energy Systems and Sensors
(a) Differences between primary cells and secondary cells, Construction, electro
chemical reactions and applications of secondary cells- Ni-Cd battery, Lithium
ion battery, Pb-acid storage battery, maintenance free lead acid battery.
Construction, electro chemical reactions and applications of Fuel cells - H2-
O2 fuel cell, Methanol-oxygen fuel cell.
(b) Sensors and Bio-Sensors – principle, description of electro chemical sensor
–applications – working of glucometer – applications of bio-sensors.
UNIT–II: Solar Energy Devices
Photo Voltaic cells – Working principle – Applications – New generation Solar
cells (Thin film Solar cells, organic solar cell, dye sensitized solar cells) – Solar
reflectors – Solar trough, Solar dish, Solar tower - Solar water heater.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 56

UNIT–III: Hard Water and Boiler Troubles
Hardness of water – calculation of hardness- disadvantages of using hard water in
boilers – priming and foaming – sludge and scale formation – caustic embrittlement
– boiler corrosion. Treatment of boiler feed water – Zeolite process, Ion exchange
process – Internal treatment – Calgon conditioning – Phosphate conditioning –
Colloidal conditioning – Desalination of Brackish water by RO method.
UNIT–IV: Nano Materials and Liquid Crystals
Nano materials : Concept of Nano materials - synthesis of nano materials –
Sol-gel, Thin film preparation by Chemical vapour deposition method, carbon nano
tubes (CNTs) – types, properties, applications of CNTs, quantum dots – applications.
Liquid crystals - types, properties, applications, working of LCD
UNIT–V: Polymers
Fibre reinforced plastics – Definition of matrix and reinforcement – Glass Fibres,
Carbon fibres, aramid fibres – preparation methods – hand layup method, matched
metal die moulding method – properties – applications. Conducting Polymers -
types, properties, applications- OLED, poly aniline, Bio-Degradable Polymers—
PHBV.
UNIT–VI: Instrumental Methods of Analysis
Electronic transition in molecules – Absorption Spectra, Beer Lambert’s Law, UV
spectrophotometer - principle and working – determination of Ferric Iron by
spectrophotometry - Flame photometry – principle and working, estimation of
sodium by flame photometry.
Text Books
1. Text book of Engineering Chemistry by Jain & Jain. Dhanpat Rai Publishing
Company, 16th Edn., 2015.
2. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry by Shashi Chawla. Dhanpat Rai
Publications, 3rd Edn., 2013.
Reference Books
1. A Text book of Engineering Chemistry by S.S.Dara. S.Chand&Company Ltd.,
12th Edn.,2010.
2. Engineering Chemistry by J.C.Kurisascose and J.Rajaram. volumes 1 & 2,
Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishing.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 57

 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
(Common to CE, EEE & ECE)
I Year – II Semester
Lecture :3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the basic knowledge about the environment and ecology.
• To develop an attitude of concern for biodiversity and its conservation.
• To assess the environmental impacts of developmental activities.
• To create awareness on environmental pollution and waste management.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the role of a citizen in protection of environment.
• analyze functional attributes of an ecosystem.
• enumerate the values of biodiversity.
• identify appropriate processes to control pollution
• identify waste management practices
• understand various stages of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
Course Content
UNIT–I : Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies
Definition – Scope – Importance - Need for Public Awareness – Multidisciplinary
nature of Environmental Studies – Awareness activities-Role of a citizen in protection
of environment
UNIT–II: Ecosystem
Concept of an Ecosystem – Structural features of Ecosystem – Food Chain –
Food Web – Ecological Pyramids – Energy Flow – Biogeochemical Cycles –
Ecological Succession-Major ecosystems.
UNIT–III: Biodiversity &Its Conservation
Definition – Levels of Biodiversity – Bio-geographical zones of India – Values of
biodiversity (Consumptive use, productive use, Social, Ethical, Aesthetic, Option
values, Ecosystem service values) – India as a mega diversity nation – Threats to
biodiversity – Endangered &Endemic species of India – Conservation of biodiversity
(In-situ & Ex-Situ)-Biodiversity Act,2002.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 58

UNIT–IV: Environmental Pollution
Definition – Causes – Effects & Control measures of – Air pollution – Water pollution
– Noise pollution – Soil pollution –Radioactive pollution.
UNIT–V: Environmental Management
Environmental Impact Assessment – Environmental Impact Statement –
Environmental Management Plan – Environmental Audit – Ecotourism – Green
building – Green Development – Mechanism-Environmental legislations-Wild life
( protection) Act,1972-Water (prevention and control of pollution) Act, 1974-Forest
(conservation) Act,1980-Air (prevention and control of pollution) Act, 1981-
Environmental(protection) Act,1986.
UNIT–VI: Waste Management
Liquid waste: Industrial waste water treatment -Municipal water treatment-Drinking
water treatment
Solid waste: Municipal solid waste- Biomedical waste- Hazardous waste- E-
waste
Text Books
1. Environmental studies:AnubhaKaushik,C.P.Kaushik: New age international
publishers (UNIT-1,2,3,5).
2. Environmental Science &Engineering :P.Anandan, R.Kumaravelan, Scitech
Publications (India) Pvt. Lted.(UNIT-4,5,6)
Reference Books
1. “Environmental Studies” by Shashichawala:TataMcgraw hill education private
limited.
2. “Environmental Studies” by Deeshita Dave & P. UdayaBhaskar, Cengage
Learning.
3. “Society and Environmen” by Dr.SureshK.Dhameja:S.K.Kataria and sons
4. “Environmental studies” by Benny Joseph:Tata Mc Graw-Hill publishing company
limited.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 59

 LINEAR ELECTRICAL NETWORKS
I Year – II Semester
Lecture :3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand basic laws and theorems of Electrical circuits.
• To familiarize with the steady state behaviour of DC and single phase AC
circuits.
• To familiarize the concepts of electrical resonance.
• To familiarize the students to two port networks.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply various circuit laws to analyze the electrical circuits.
• analyze the steady state behavior of DC and AC circuits.
• apply network theorems to analyze the electrical circuits.
• analyze the behavior of electrical resonance
• evaluate different two port network parameters.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Introduction To Electrical Engineering
Network elements classification, Circuit concepts –Resistor(R) - Inductor(L) -
Capacitor(C) -Voltage and Current Sources (Ideal and Non-Ideal)- Independent
and Dependent Sources- Voltage - Current relationship for passive elements.
UNIT–II: Methods Of Analysis
Ohm’s law - Kirchhoff’s laws – Source transformation - Network reduction
techniques series, parallel, series parallel, star-to-delta or delta-to-star
transformation, Nodal analysis, mesh analysis, super node and super mesh for
D.C excitations.
UNIT–III: Introduction To Single Phase Ac Circuits
Generation of alternating sinusoidal quantities - R.M.S, Average values and form
factor for different periodic wave forms – sinusoidal alternating quantities – Phase
and Phase difference – Complex and polar forms of representations, J Notation,

Electronics and Communication Engineering 60

UNIT–IV: Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis & Resonance
Steady state analysis of R, L and C (in series, parallel and series parallel
combinations) with sinusoidal excitation-Concept of Reactance, Impedance,
Susceptance and Admittance-Power Factor and significance of Real and Reactive
power, Complex Power.
Resonance - series, parallel circuits, concept of band width and Q factor.
UNIT– V: Network Theorems
Superposition, Reciprocity, Thevenin’s, Norton’s, Maximum Power Transfer,
Millman’s, Tellegen’s and compensation theorems for D.C and sinusoidal
excitations.
UNIT–VI: Two Port Networks
Two port network parameters – Z, Y, ABCD, hybrid, Inverse transmission and
inverse hybrid parameters and their relations, Cascaded networks.
Text Books
1. Engineering Circuit Analysis by William Hayt and Jack E.Kemmerley, Mc
th
Graw Hill Company, 6 edition
2. Theory & Problems of Electric Circuits by Joseph A Edminister- schaum
series, 6th edition.
3. Fundamentals of Electric Circuits by Alexander & Sadiku, 2nd edition.
Reference Books
th
1. Network Analysis by Van Valkenburg, Prentice-Hall of India Private Ltd., 8
edition.
2. Network Analysis and Synthesis by Kuo, Franklin. F, John Wiley Publishers,
2nd edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 61

 NUMERICAL METHODS & COMPLEX ANALYSIS
I Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand the various numerical techniques.
• To introduce the complex functions, complex differentiation and complex
integration
• To introduce the concepts of conformal and bilinear transformations of standard
functions.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply numerical techniques for solutions of Algebraic, transcendental and
ordinary differential equations.
• compute interpolating polynomial for the given data.
• find derivatives and integrals by using numerical techniques.
• test the differentiability(analyticity) of a complex function
• find the complex integration with the use of Cauchy’s integral formula.
• apply the concepts of conformal and bilinear transformations of standard
functions.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations- Introduction –Bisection
Method – Method of False Position – Newton-Raphson Method.
UNIT–II: Interpolation
Interpolation- Introduction – Finite differences- Forward Differences – Backward
differences –Central differences – Symbolic relations – Newton formulae for
interpolation – Lagrange’s interpolation.
UNIT–III: Numerical differentiation and integration
Approximation of derivative using Newton’s forward and backward formulas.
Integration using Trapezoidal and simpon’s rules.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 62

UNIT–IV: Numerical Solutions of Ordinary Differential Equations
Taylor’s Series Method, Euler Method, Modified Euler Method, Runge – Kutta
Fourth order Method
UNIT–V: Complex differentiation & Integration (without proofs)
Introduction of the complex functions, derivative of f(z), analytic functions, C-R
equations in polar coordinates, harmonic functions and orthogonal systems.
Introduction of line integral and evaluation along the path, Cauchy’s integral theorem-
statement, Cauchy’s generalized integral formula.
UNIT–VI: Conformal mapping
1
Transformation by e Ζ , lnz, Z 2 , Z n (n ∈ Ζ + ) , SinZ, Cos Z, Z + , Translation,
Z
rotation, Inversion and Bilinear transformation, Fixed points, Cross-ratio properties.
Text Book
nd
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics : 42 edition, Khanna
Publishers,2012 , New Delhi.
2. B.V.Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata-Mc Graw Hill company
Ltd.
Reference Books
1. U.M.Swamy, A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics – I & II : 2nd Edition,
Excel Books, 2011, New Delhi.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics: 8th edition, Maitrey
Printech Pvt. Ltd, 2009, Noida.
3. Dr. T.K.V.Iyengar, Dr. B.Krishna Gandhi, S.Ranganatham and
th
Dr.M.V.S.S.N.Prasad, Engineering Mathematics, Volume-I , II, III: 11
edition, S. Chand Publishers, 2012, New Delhi.
4. S. Armugam, A. Thangapandi Isac, A. Soma Sundaram, Numerical Methods,
Scitech Publications.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 63

 ENGINEERING DRAWING

I Year – II Semester
Lecture : 1 Practical : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To highlight the significance of universal language of engineers.
• To introduce the concepts of drawing 3-D objects in 2-D planes and vice
versa with proper dimensioning and scaling.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply principles of drawing in representing dimensions of an object.
• construct polygons and conical curves.
• draw projections of points, lines and planes.
• draw projections of solids in different positions.
• convert orthographic views into isometric views and vice-versa.
Course Content
UNIT–I: Introduction
Geometrical Constructions
Conic Sections: Ellipse, parabola, hyperbola – general method.
UNIT–II: Orthographic Projections
Introduction to Orthographic Projections, Projections of Points, Projections of
Straight Lines parallel to both planes, Projections of Straight Lines-Parallel to one
and inclined to other plane.
UNIT–III: Projections of Straight Lines
Projections of Straight Lines inclined to both planes.
UNIT–IV: Projections of Planes
Regular Planes Perpendicular / parallel to one Reference Plane and inclined to
other Reference Plane, inclined to both the Reference Planes.
UNIT–V: Projections of Solids
Regular solids with axis perpendicular to one reference plane, axis inclined to one
reference plane and perpendicular to other reference plane.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 64

UNIT–VI: Transformation of Projections
Conversion of Isometric Views to Orthographic Views and orthographic to Isometric
Views.
Semester End Examination Pattern
Semester end examination paper consists of eight questions out of which five
questions are to be answered. All questions carry equal marks.
Text Books
1. N.D. Bhatt (2014), Engineering Drawing, 53rd edition , Chariot Publications.
2. K.VenuGopal (2016), Engineering Drawing and Graphics, 5th edition , New
Age International (p) Ltd Publishers.
Reference Books
1. B.V.R.Gupta and M.Raja Roy(2016),Engineering Drawing with Autocad,3rd
edition , I.K. Publishers.
2. M. B. Shah and B. C. Rana(2009),Engineering Drawing , 2nd edition,Pearson
Education.
3. Dhanunjay A Jolhe (20014),Engineering Drawing , 2nd edition,Tata Mc GrawHill
Publishers.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 65

 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION LAB
(Common to All Branches)
I Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• Professional Communication (Lab) is a career-oriented programme. It seeks
to develop in the students the competence required to perform professional
communication tasks of increasing length and complexity, which can help
them secure employment and perform successfully in their careers.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of Professional Communication Lab, the students
will be able to
• enhance the effectiveness of their communication through body language;
• take part in interactional communication (i.e. communication that serves the
purpose of social interaction or small talk) with fluency
• take part in transactional communication (i.e. communication that serves
the purpose of carrying out functions such as giving directions, complaining,
and apologizing) with fluency
• speak professionally in telephone conversations;
• make effective presentations using a range of strategies, including a good
organization of the content, impressive opening and closing, the use of suitable
visual aids, the use of stories/anecdotes to illustrate a point, effective use of
body language, and good handling of the question-and-answer session;
• take part in group discussions and debates successfully;
• answer questions at an elementary level in job interviews; and
• use team-building skills with impact in different situations.
Course Content
UNIT–VI : Body Language
UNIT–VII : Dialogues
UNIT–VIII : Presentation Skills
UNIT–IX : Group Discussion
UNIT–X : Interviews and Telephonic Interviews
UNIT–XI : Debates
Text Books
1. Hari Prasad M., Salivendra Raju J., and Suvarna Lakshmi G., (2013).
Strengthen Your Communication Skills. Hyderabad: Maruthi Publications.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 66
 2. The following pieces of software:
• ‘Multimedia Language Lab’ provided by K-Van Solution, Hyderabad
• ‘Foundation Course in Communication Skills’ provided by the Andhra
Pradesh State Council of Higher Education (APSCHE), Government of
AndhraPradesh.
Testing Pattern
1. Internal 40 marks
a. Regular performance in the Communications Lab 15 marks
b. Completing the tasks in the lab manual 10 marks
c. Making a PowerPoint presentation (Pair/Group) 15 marks
(Note: A hard copy of the presentation is to be submitted)
2. External 60 marks
a. Test of writing
A telephone conversation 08 marks
The minimum number of exchanges to be specified
• Writing a resume 10 marks
The length (1page / 2 pages) is to be specified. The features to be included
in the resume are also to be specified; the examinees will, however, have
the option of including more features within the length specified.
• Answering 3 job-interview questions 12 marks
Questions at an elementary level. In other words, questions that require
candidates to talk about themselves, their ambitions, their personality, their
hobbies and interests, and their key skills.
Sample questions:
Can you tell us something about yourself?
What kinds of things do you worry about?
What are your key skills?
What skills do you need to improve?
What do you see as your strengths?
What do you like doing in your spare time?
How would you describe the way you work?
Tell us about a time when you showed strong leadership skills.
Tell us about a time when you had to make a difficult decision.
How do you see yourself in five years’ time?
b. Test of speaking
Group discussion 15 marks
Time: 10-15 minutes (approx.) per group
c. Viva voce with an external examiner 15 marks
* * *
Electronics and Communication Engineering 67
 APPLIED CHEMISTY LAB
I Year – II Semester
Practical :2 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :1 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To impart the skill on chemical and instrumental methods of analysis of various
parameters for determining the quality of water.
• To impart the skill on preparation of synthetic materials.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• test the quality parameters of water by volumetric and instrumental methods.
• to operate the sensors for testing the water quality.
• synthesize phenol – formaldehyde resin (Bakelite).
• operate spectrophotometer and determine the concentration of Ferric Iron in
a given solution.
Course Content
Introduction to Chemistry Lab (the teachers are expected to teach fundamentals
like Primary, Secondary Standard Solutions, Normality, Molarity, Molality etc and
laboratory ware used, error, accuracy, precision, Theory of indicators, use of
volumetric titrations).
1. Practice experiment-Determination of the amount of HCl using standard Na2CO3.
2. Determination of alkalinity of a given water sample.
3. Determination of acidity of a given water sample.
4. Determination of total hardness of the water sample by EDTA method.
5. (a) Determination of pH of different water samples by using pH meter.
(b) Determination of conductivity of different water samples by digital conductivity meter.
6. Determination of concentration of the given acid by using standard base
conductometrically.
7. Construction of an Electro Chemical Cell.
8. Determination of rate of corrosion of carbon steel metal in acid medium in
the absence and presence of Thiourea inhibitor by gravimetric method.
9. Preparation of polyaniline.
10. (a) Preparation of Printed Circuit Board. (b) Preparation of Phenol - Formaldehyde resin.
11. Determination of concentration of Ferric Iron in a given solution
spectrophotometrically.
Lab Manual
1. Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, Fifth edition, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc., New York
2. Engineering chemistry laboratory manual & record by Srinivasulu .D, Parshva
publications.
3. Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual by K.Mukkanti, B.S publications,2009.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 68

 PROBABILITY THEORY AND STOCHASTIC PROCESS
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize concepts of probability and random variables.
• To impart the moment generating and characteristic functions.
• To introduce the concepts of correlation functions and power spectral density.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• determine and understand probability, statistics of random variables and their
functions.
• decide statistics of random vectors and their functions.
• calculate statistics of random sequences, random processes, and their input
and output relationships and statistics in linear systems.
• apply the concepts of probability, random variables / processes to analyze
statistical problems in Electronics and communication Engineering field.
• apply the concepts of filtering and prediction of a random process
Course Content
UNIT - I: Review Of Probability
Sets and set operations and events, probability space, axiomatic definition of
probability, joint, conditional, total probabilities and Bayes theorem.
UNIT - II: Random Variables
Random variables, probability distribution of a random variable, discrete and
continuous random variables, and functions of a random variable,moments of a
distribution function, generating functions and characteristic function.
UNIT - III: Multiple Random Variables
Multiple random variables, independent random variables, functions of random
variables, covariance, correlation, moments, central limit theorem.
UNIT - IV: Random Process (Temporal Characteristics)
Discrete and continuous time processes with examples, mean, autocorrelation
and auto covariance functions, Stationary: strict-sense stationary (SSS) and wide-

Electronics and Communication Engineering 69

sense stationary (WSS) processes, autocorrelation function of a real WSS process
and its properties, cross-correlation function, ergodicity and its importance.
UNIT - V: Random Process (Spectral Characteristics)
Power spectral density, properties of power spectral density, cross-power spectral
density and properties, auto-correlation function and power spectral density of a
WSS random sequence, relationship between power spectral density and auto
correlation functions.
UNIT - VI: Linear Systems With Random Inputs
Linear time-invariant system with a WSS process as an input: stationary of the
output, auto-correlation and power-spectral density of the output, examples with
white-noise as input.
Text Books
1. P. Peebles Jr. “Probability, Random Variables, and Random Signal Principles”,
4thEdition, McGraw-Hill.
2. Henry Stark and John W. Woods, “Probability, Statistics, and Random
Processes for Engineers”, Prentice Hall, 4th Edition.
Reference Books
1. A.Papoulis and S.UnnikrishanaPillai, ‘’Probability, Random Variables and
Stochastic Processes’’, 2ndEdition, McGraw Hill.
2. B.P.Lathi , ‘’Modern Analog and Digital Communications’’, Oxford University
Press.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 70

 ELECTONIC DEVICES
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the operation and characteristics of electronic devices.
• To learn about the use of diodes for various applications.
• To know about the biasing of MOSFETs and BJTs, their small-signal operation.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the carrier transport in junctions.
•· analyze the behaviour of electronic devices.
• study the models for diodes and use them for various applications.
• design power supply using junction diode and Zener voltage regulator.
• characterize the current flow in BJTs and MOSFETs.
• bias the BJTs and MOSFETs for amplifier applications.
• analyze the behaviour of BJTs and MOSFETs under small-signal conditions.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Junctions
Diffusion and recombination, the continuity equation, equilibrium conditions, forward
and reverse-biased junctions, reverse-bias breakdown, the ideal diode, terminal
characteristics of junction diodes, metal-semiconductor junctions, ideal MOS
capacitor, MOS capacitance-voltage analysis, special diodes.
UNIT - II: Diode Models and Applications
Modelling the diode forward characteristic, Zener diode model, use of the Zener
as a shunt regulator, temperature effects, design of Zener voltage regulator, the
spice models for junction and Zener diodes, diode logic gates, diode as a rectifier,
design of power supply using bridge rectifier; limiting and clamping circuits.
UNIT - III: MOS Field-Effect Transistors (MOSFETS)
Device structure and physical operation, current-voltage characteristics, MOSFET
operation as a switch and as a linear amplifier, the depletion type MOSFET.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 71

UNIT - IV: Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTS)
Device structure and physical operation, current-voltage characteristics, BJT
operation as a switch and as an amplifier.
UNIT - V: Biasing Of MOSFET and BJT
Biasing of BJTs, bias stabilization, design of voltage-divider bias circuit from bias
stability considerations, biasing of MOSFETs, design of voltage-divider bias circuit.
UNIT - VI: Small - Signal Models of MOSFET and BJT
MOSFET small-signal models, SPICE MOSFET models, BJT small-signal models,
SPICE Ebers-Moll model and Gummel-Poon model.
Text Books
1. Ben G. Streetman and Sanjay Kumar Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic
Devices”, PHI Learning Private Limited, Sixth Edition, 2009 (Unit- I).
2. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Oxford
University Press Inc., Fifth Edition, 2004 (Units- I, II, III, IV & VI).
3. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory”, Pearson Education Inc., Eleventh Edition, 2013 (Unit-V).
Reference Books
1. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill International, 1987.
2. D. A. Neamen, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices” (IRWIN), Times Mirror
High Education Group, Chicago, 1997.
3. R.T. Howe and C.G. Sodini, “Microelectronics: An Integrated Approach”,
Prentice Hall International, 1997.
4. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - I”, NPTEL
Video Course.
5. S. Karmalkar, “Solid State Devices”, NPTEL Video Course.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 72

 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the basic concepts of signals and systems.
• To introduce various transform techniques on signals.
• To develop an understanding of sampling and correlation techniques on signals.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• classify the signals and various operations on signals.
• perform Fourier analysis on the signals.
• analyze the various systems.
• perform correlation operational on signals.
• apply the various sampling techniques on continuous time signals.
• analyze the various continuous time signals through transformation (Fourier
and Laplace) techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Signal Analysis
Classification of signals, basic operations on signals-amplitude and time scaling,
time shifting, addition and multiplication, introduction to elementary signals-unit
step, impulse, ramp, parabolic, rectangular, triangular, sinusoidal, exponential,
signum, sinc and gaussian functions.
UNIT - II: Fourier Series Representation of Continuous Time Signals
Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series, relationship between trigonometric
and exponential Fourier series, representation of a periodic function by the Fourier
series over the entire interval, convergence of Fourier series, alternate form of
trigonometric series, symmetry conditions-even and odd, complex Fourier
spectrum.
UNIT - III: Fourier Transform
Representation of an arbitrary function over the entire interval: Fourier transform,
Fourier transform of some useful functions and periodic function, properties of
Fourier transform, energy density spectrum, Parseval’s theorem.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 73

Sampling: Sampling theorem for band limited signals- explanation, reconstruction
of signal from samples, aliasing, sampling techniques- impulse, natural and flat
top sampling.
UNIT - IV:LTI Systems
Properties of systems, Linear Time Invariant (LTI) system, response of LTI system-
convolution integral, properties of LTI system, transfer function and frequency
response of LTI system.
Signal Transmission Through LTI Systems: Filter characteristics of LTI systems,
distortion less transmission through LTI system, signal bandwidth, System
bandwidth, ideal LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, causality and physical
realizability- Paley-Wiener criterion, relationship between bandwidth and rise-time.
UNIT - V: Correlation of Continuous Time Signals
Cross correlation and auto correlation of continuous time signals (finite and nonfinite
energy signals), relation between convolution and correlation, properties of cross
correlation and autocorrelation, power density spectrum, relation between auto
correlation function and energy/power spectral density function.
UNIT - VI: Laplace Transform
Laplace transform of signals, properties of Region of Convergence (ROC), unilateral
Laplace transform, properties of unilateral Laplace transform, inversion of unilateral
and bilateral Laplace transform, relationship between Laplace and Fourier
Transforms.
Text Books
1. B.P.Lathi, “Signals, Systems &Communications”, BS Publications, 2003 (Units
I-VI).
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”,PHI,
2nd Edition (Units I, III, VI)
Reference Books
1. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, “Signals &Systems”, Wiley, 2nd edition
2. Michel J. Robert , “Fundamentals of Signals and Systems”, TMGH Int. Edition,
2008
3. C.L.Philips, J.M. Parr and Eve A. Riskin, “Signals, Systems and Transforms”,
Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 74

ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To illustrate the importance of Managerial Economics and know its significant
role in achieving business objectives.
• To understand and articulate the importance of Project Management in any
business project
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Apply economic concepts in business decision making.
• Identify the influencing factors of Demand for a given product.
• Establish the suitable business organization with available resources.
• Analyze BEP for a project and adopt appropriate pricing strategies.
• Understand the importance of project management.
• Apply network concepts in business decision making.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Engineering Economics
Definition,nature and scope of managerial economics – relation of managerial
economics with other disciplines, concept of engineering economics.
Demand Analysis: Demand determinants, law of demand and its exceptions,
significance & types of elasticity of demand. factors governing demand forecasting-
methods of demand forecasting.
UNIT - II: Theory of Production and Cost Analysis
Production Function – Isoquants and Isocosts, MRTS, least cost combination
of inputs, cobb-douglas production function. production function, laws of returns,
internal and external economies of scale.
Cost Analysis: Cost concepts & BEP Analysis, break-even point (simple problems)
UNIT - III: Introduction to Markets & Pricing strategies
Market structures: Types of competition, features of perfect competition, monopoly
and monopolistic competition and oligopoly.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 75

Pricing strategies: Methods of pricing: cost based pricing, demand based pricing,
competition based pricing and strategy based pricing.
UNIT - IV: Introduction to Business Organizations
Characteristic features of business, features and evaluation of sole proprietorship,
partnership, joint stock company.
UNIT - V: Project Management Concepts
Concept and characteristics of a project, importance of project management.
project planning: project evaluation, financial sources, feasibility studies.
UNIT - VI: PERT and CPM
Introduction, development of project network, time estimation, determination of
the critical path, PERT model, measures of variability, CPM model, network cost
system (simple problems)
Text Books
1. Aryasri, “Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis”, TMH,2/e 2005.
2. K.Nagarajan, “Project Management”, New Age International , New Delhi,2010
Reference Books
1. Ambrish Gupta, “Financial Accounting for Management”, Pearson Education,
New Delhi.
2. H. Craig Peterson & W. Cris Lewis, “Managerial Economics”, PHI, 4th Ed.
3. Suma Damodaran, “Managerial Economics”, Oxford University Press.
4. Clifford F Gray, Erik W Larson, “Project Management-The Managerial Process”,
Tata Mcgraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd
5. John M Nicholas,”Project Management For Business And Technology”
Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 76

 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD THEORY
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of Electrostatics and Magneto statics.
• To familiarize with the concepts of Electromagnetic Waves and their
Propagation.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply the concepts of electric fields and magnetic fields in different
applications.
• analyze the electric and magnetic fields for different charge distributions.
• derive the wave equations in perfect dielectric and conducting media.
• calculate the energy stored in electric and magnetic fields.
• understand reflection and refraction of electromagnetic waves in different
media.
• determine the power flow in electromagnetic waves.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Electrostatics-I
Coulomb’s Law, charge distributions, electric field intensity, electric fields due to
point charge, line charge, surface charge, volume charge, electric flux density,
Gauss’s law, applications of Gauss law: point charge, infinite line charge.
UNIT - II: Electrostatics-II
Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field, electric potential
difference and potential, potential due to different charge configurations, potential
gradient, electric dipole and energy density in electrostatic field,conduction and
convection current, current density.
UNIT - III: Electrostatics-III
Continuity equation for current and relaxation time, conductor properties, boundary
conditions for dielectric–dielectric and conductor-dielectric interfaces, capacitance-
parallel plate, coaxial capacitors, Poisson’s and Laplace’s equations.
UNIT - IV: Magnetostatics-I
Current distributions, Biot-Savart’s law, Ampere’s circuital law-applications of
Ampere’s circuital law ; infinite line current, infinite sheet of current, magnetic

Electronics and Communication Engineering 77

flux and magnetic flux density, magnetic scalar and vector potentials, force on a
moving charge- Lorentz Force equation, force on a current element.
UNIT - V: Magnetostatics-II
Magnetic dipole and dipole moment, magnetic boundary conditions, magnetic
energy.
Time Varying Fields And Maxwell’s Equations: Faraday’s law, transformer
EMF and motional EMF, inconsistency of Ampere’s law, displacement current,
Maxwell’s equations, time harmonic fields, Maxwell’s equations using phasor
notation.
Electromagnetic Waves-I:Wave equations for perfect dielectrics and conducting
medium, uniform plane wave propagation, relation between E and H in a uniform
plane wave.
UNIT - VI: Electromagnetic waves-II
Wave propagation in lossless medium and conducting medium, conductors and
dielectrics-characterization, polarization, skin depth, Poynting’s theorem and
Poynting’s Vector. reflection and refraction of plane waves – normal and oblique
incidences for perfect conductor and perfect dielectrics- horizontal and vertical
polarization, total internal reflection and Brewster angle.
Text Books
1. Mathew NO Sadiku “Elements of Electromagnetics”, Oxford University Press,
2015.
2. EC Jordan and KG Balmain “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”,
PHI 2003.
Reference Books
1. W H Hayt and J A Buck “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 7th Edition TMH,
2011.
2. Joseph A Edminister “Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics”, Schaum’s
Outline Series, McGraw Hill International.
3. Nathan Ida “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2nd Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 78

 ELEMENTS OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
II Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the constructional details, working principle and
characteristics of DC, AC machines and electrical Instruments.
• To impart knowledge on performance of AC and DC machines.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe the performance of DC, three phase, single-phase AC machines
and measuring instruments.
• determine the emf equation of DC and AC machines
• realize magnetization and load characteristics of DC machines.
• determine the characteristics of three phase and single phase induction motor.
• find the losses and efficiency of AC and DC machines.
Course Content
UNIT - I: D.C. Machines
Principle of operation of DC machines- EMF equation – types of generators
DC Motors – types of DC motors – characteristics of DC motors – 3-point starters
for DC shunt motor – losses and efficiency – speed control of DC shunt motor –
flux and armature voltage control methods.
UNIT - II: Transformers
Principle of operation of single phase transformer – types – constructional features
–EMF equation, equivalent circuit-losses and efficiency of transformer and regulation
- simple problems.
UNIT - III: Three Phase Induction Motor
Principle of operation of three-phase induction motors –slip ring and squirrel cage
motors – slip-torque characteristics – efficiency calculation.
UNIT - IV: Alternators
Alternators – constructional features – principle of operation – types - EMF equation
– distribution and coil span factors - regulation using synchronous impedance
method.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 79

UNIT - V: Single Phase Induction Motors
Principle of operation -shaded pole motors – capacitor motors, AC servomotor,
stepper motors – characteristics.
UNIT - VI: Electrical Instruments
Basic principles of indicating instruments – moving coil and moving iron Instruments
(Ammeters and Voltmeters)
Text Books
1. P.S.Bimbra, “Electrical Machines”, Khanna Publications.
2. J.B.Gupta, “Electrical machines”, S.K.Kataria & sons.
Reference Books
1. D P.Kothari, I.J.Nagarth, “Electrical machines”, Mc GrawHill Publications, 4th
Edition.
2. M.S.Naidu and S.Kamaksiah, “Basic electrical engineering”,TMH Publications.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 80

 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB
II Year – I Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
To make the students familiarize with
• various electronic components and basic electronic lab instruments.
• conduct of experiments to obtain the characteristics of diodes, MOSFETs,
and BJTs.
• the use of diodes for various applications and biasing of MOSFETs and BJTs.
Learnng Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify various electronic components and basic electronic measuring
instruments and other lab equipment.
• perform experiment, take observations, present the results in proper form,
analyze and interpret results, draw conclusions by correlating with theory.
• use modern tools for simulation.
• verify the I-V characteristics of junction diode, Zener diode, LED, photodiode,
MOSFET, BJT, and obtain their parameters.
• design, simulate, hardware implement, and test - DC power supply, Zener
voltage regulator, diode clipper, clamper, and BJT and MOSFET voltage-
divider bias circuits.
• verify the switching action of transistor.
• make oral presentations and prepare written reports.
List of Experiments
PART-A: Orientation of electronic components and basic electronic lab
instruments.
PART-B:
1. I-V characteristics of Junction diode and breakdown characteristics of Zener
diode.
2. LED and photodiode I-V characteristics.
3. DC power supply (design, simulation, hardware implementation and testing).

Electronics and Communication Engineering 81

 4. Zener voltage regulator (design, simulation, hardware implementation and
testing).
5. Diode clipper – transfer characteristics / waveform generation (design,
simulation, hardware implementation and testing).
6. Diode clamper (design, simulation, hardware implementation and testing).
7. MOSFET characteristics (drain, transfer characteristics and measurement
of device parameters).
8. BJT characteristics (input, output characteristics and measurement of device
parameters).
9. Transistor switch.
10. BJT voltage-divider bias circuit with stabilization (design, simulation, hardware
implementation and testing).
11. MOSFET voltage-divider bias circuit (design, simulation, hardware
implementation and testing).
12. Open-ended experiment.
Reference Books
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Oxford
University Press Inc., 2004.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory”, Pearson Education Inc., 11th Edition, 2013.
3. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - I”, NPTEL
Video Course.
4. User manuals for basic electronic lab equipment.
5. Data sheets for electronic components.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 82

 NETWORKS AND ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB
II Year – I Semester
Practical :2 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :1 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• The ability to conduct testing and experimental procedures on Circuits.
• The capability to analyze the behavior of circuits
• The ability to conduct testing and experimental procedures on Machine.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• verify the applicability of network theorems to practical electrical circuits.
• specify and test RLC series and parallel resonant circuits.
• interpret /correlate physical observations and measurements involving
electrical circuits to theoretical principles
• predict the efficiency of DC Shunt motor by conducting No-Load Test and
able to draw performance curves by conducting brake test.
List of the Experiments
Any 10 of the following experiments are to be conducted:
1. Serial and Parallel Resonance – Timing, Resonant frequency, Bandwidth
and Q-factor determination for RLC network.
2. Two port network parameters – Transmission ,Hybrid Parameters.
3. Two port network parameters – Z, Y Parameters.
4. Verification of Superposition and Reciprocity theorems.
5. Verification of maximum power transfer theorem
6. Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem.
7. Verification of Norton’s Theorem
8. Magnetization characteristics of DC Shunt generator. Determination of critical
field resistance.
9. Swinburne’s Test on DC shunt machine (Predetermination of efficiency of a
given DC Shunt machine working as motor and generator).
10. Brake test on DC shunt motor. Determination of performance characteristics.
11. OC & SC tests on Single-phase transformer (Predetermination of efficiency
and regulation at given power factors and determination of equivalent circuit).
12. Speed control of DC Shunt Motor.
* * *
Electronics and Communication Engineering 83
 TRNSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the transmission line concepts.
• To introduce the concepts of various wave guides for practical applications.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply the knowledge of network theory in analyzing the concepts of
transmissions lines.
• analyze the transmission lines at different frequencies.
• measure the transmission line parameters using smith chart.
• demonstrate the knowledge of wave guides and fundamental principles.
• understand different modes of propagation in wave guides.
• select an appropriate wave guide to meet specified requirements.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Transmission Lines I
Types, primary constants of transmission line, equivalent circuit of transmission
line, transmission line equations, infinite length transmission line, secondary
constants- characteristic impedance, propagation constant, phase and group
velocities, wave length, line with any termination, input impedance, line impedance,
lossless line concepts.
UNIT - II: Transmission Lines II
Distortion in transmission lines, distortion less line, telephone cable, inductance
loading of telephone cables-loading types, short circuit and open circuit lines,
voltage and current variations, reflection coefficient, /4, /2, /8 transmission
lines, T and equivalent sections of lines.
UNIT - III: Transmission Line at Higher Frequencies
Open wire line at higher frequencies- secondary constants at higher frequencies,
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio, location of voltage maxima and minima. Smith
chart – configuration. calculation of reflection coefficient, VSWR, input impedance

Electronics and Communication Engineering 84

using Smith chart, impedance matching- quarter wave transform technique, single
stub matching design and double stub matching (designing not required).
UNIT - IV: Guided Waves
Waves between parallel planes, transverse electric waves, transverse magnetic
waves. characteristics of TE, TM, TEM waves- modes, cut-off frequencies, phase,
group velocities, free space, cutoff, guided wavelengths, wave impedances.
UNIT - V: Rectangular Wave Guides
Rectangular waveguide-, transverse electric waves (TE), transverse magnetic (TM)
waves. characteristics of TE, TM waves- modes, cut-off frequencies, phase, group
velocities, free space, cutoff, guided wavelengths, wave impedances.
UNIT - VI: Circular Wave Guides
Solution of the field equations in cylindrical co-ordinates, transverse electric waves
(TE), transverse magnetic (TM) waves. characteristics of TE, TM waves- modes,
velocities, wavelengths, wave Impedance.
Text Books
1. Nathan Ida “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2nd Edition.
2. C Jordan and K.G Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”,
PHI 2nd Edition.
Reference Books
1. Samuel Y.Liauo,”Microwave Devices and Circuits” 3rd Edition, Pearson
publications.
2. M. N. O. Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetics”, 6th Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2011
3. Joseph Edminister, “Electromegnetics”, Schaum’s Series TMH,
4. John D Ryder, “Networks Lines and Fields”, PHI, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 85

 ANALOG CIRCUITS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with circuit configuration and analysis of single-stage amplifiers,
differential amplifiers, tuned amplifiers, feedback amplifiers, oscillators, and
power amplifiers.
• To introduce inverting and non-inverting operation of op amps.
• To design op amp RC oscillators and class-B output stage.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• draw, analyse, and characterize the MOS and BJT single-stage amplifiers at
low and high frequencies.
• design CS and CE amplifiers at low frequencies.
• draw, analyze, and characterize - cascode, darlington, differential, feedback,
power amplifiers and oscillators.
• draw and analyze the behaviour of tuned amplifiers and op amp under inverting
and non-inverting configurations.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Low-Frequency Single-Stage Amplifiers
MOS amplifiers, low-frequency response of the common-source (CS) amplifier,
design of CS amplifier, BJT amplifiers, low-frequency response of the common-
emitter (CE) amplifier, design of CE amplifier.
UNIT - II: High-Frequency Single-Stage Amplifiers
General considerations, high-frequency response of CS and CE amplifiers, cascode
amplifier, Darlington configuration.
UNIT - III: Differential Amplifiers
MOS differential pair, small-signal operation of the MOS differential pair, frequency
response of resistively loaded MOS differential amplifier, BJT differential pair.
UNIT - IV: Introduction to OP-AMPS and Tuned Amplifiers
Ideal op amp, inverting and non-inverting configurations, Tuned amplifiers.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 86

UNIT - V: Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators
General feedback structure, some properties of negative feedback, four basic
feedback topologies, series-shunt feedback amplifier, series-series feedback
amplifier, shunt-shunt and shunt-series feedback amplifiers, determining the loop
gain, stability problem, Basic principles of sinusoidal oscillators, op amp - RC
oscillator circuits, design of op-amp RC oscillators, LC and crystal oscillators.
UNIT - VI: Output Stages and Power Amplifiers
Classification of output stages, class A output stage, class B output stage, design
of class B output stage, class AB output stage, biasing the class AB circuit,
power BJTs.
Text Book
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Oxford
University Press Inc., Fifth Edition, 2004.
Reference Books
1. R.T. Howe and C.G. Sodini, “Microelectronics: An integrated Approach”,
Prentice Hall International, 1997.
2. J. Millman and A. Grabel, “Microelectronics”, McGraw Hill International, 1987.
3. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory”, Pearson Education Inc., Eleventh Edition, 2013.
4. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - I”, NPTEL
Video Course.
5. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - II”, NPTEL
Video Course.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 87

 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize students with fundamentals of analog communication systems
and various techniques for analog modulation and demodulation schemes.
• To describe the impact of noise on analog modulation schemes.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• disseminate the fundamentals of analog modulation schemes.
• differentiate DSB-SC and SSB modulation schemes.
• understand the functioning of AM and FM transmitters and receivers.
• determine power relations for various modulation schemes and evaluate the
impact of noise in AM and FM modulation schemes.
• compare and contrast TDM and FDM techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Continuous Wave Modulation-I
Introduction, need for modulation, amplitude modulation-definition, description in
time and frequency domains, power relations, generation and detection.
UNIT - II: Continuous Wave Modulation-II
DSB-SC- time-domain and frequency-domain description, generation and coherent
detection, costas loop; AM SSB modulated waves- time-domain and frequency-
domain descriptions, generation and demodulation;
noise in AM systems; comparison of various AM techniques.
UNIT - III: AM Transmitters
Classification of transmitters, AM transmitters: high level and low level AM
transmitters. FDM.
UNIT - IV: AM Receivers
Receiver types- tuned radio frequency receiver, super heterodyne receiver; image
frequency and rejection ratio, RF section and receiver characteristics, AGC.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 88

UNIT - V: FM Generation
Introduction to angle modulation, relation between frequency and phase
modulations, Single tone frequency modulation, narrow band FM, wide band FM,
constant average power, transmission bandwidth of FM wave, generation of FM
waves: direct FM and Armstrong method.
UNIT - VI: FM Detection
Detection of FM waves: balanced frequency discriminator, FM transmitters, FM
receivers,noise in FM system, pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM. TDM.
Text Books
1. Simon Haykin, John Wiley, “Principles of Communication Systems”, 2nd
Edition.
2. George Kennedy and Bernard Davis, “Electronics & Communication Systems”,
TMH 2004.
Reference Books
1. H Taub & D. Schilling, Gautam Sahe, “Principles of Communication
Systems”, TMH, 2007 3rd Edition.
2. B.P. Lathi, “Communication Systems”, BS Publication, 2006
3. John G. Proakis, Masond, Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication
Systems”, PEA, 2006.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 89

 DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the concepts of different number systems and Boolean
algebra.
• To introduce the design techniques of combinational, sequential logic circuits.
• To give a model of combinational and sequential circuits using HDLs.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• design various logic circuits using Boolean laws.
• design combinational and sequential logic circuits.
• gain the knowledge of PLDs.
• develop digital circuits using HDL
Course Content
UNIT - I: Boolean Algebra and Logic Gates
Number systems - binary numbers, octal, hexadecimal, other binary codes;
complements, signed binary numbers, digital logic operations and gates, basic
theorems and properties of Boolean algebra, Boolean functions, canonical and
standard forms, complements of Boolean functions, two-level NAND and NOR
Implementation of Boolean functions.
UNIT - II: Combinational Logic Circuits
The map method (upto four variables), don’t care conditions, design procedure,
adders, subtractors, 4-bit binary adder/ subtractor circuit, BCD adder, carry look-
a-head adder, decoders and encoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers.
UNIT - III: Sequential Logic Circuits
Design procedure, flip-flops, truth tables and excitation tables, conversion of flip-
flops, design of counters, ripple counters, synchronous counters, ring counter,
Johnson counter, registers, shift registers, universal shift register.
UNIT - IV: Finite State Machines
Types of FSM, capabilities and limitations of FSM, state assignment, realization
of FSM using flip-flops, Mealy to Moore conversion and vice-versa, reduction of
state tables using partition technique.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 90

UNIT - V: Programmable Logic Devices & HDL
Types of PLD’s: PROM, PAL, PLA, basic structure of CPLD and FPGA, advantages
of FPGA’s. Introduction to Verilog - structural Specification of logic circuits,
behavioral specification of logic circuits, hierarchical Verilog Code.
UNIT - VI: Digital Design Using HDLs
Verilog for combinational circuits - conditional operator, if-else statement, case
statement, for loop; using storage elements with cad tools-using Verilog constructs
for storage elements, blocking and non-blocking assignments, non-blocking
assignments for combinational circuits, flip-flop with clear capability, using Verilog
constructs for registers and counters.
Text Books
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd Edition, PHI. (Unit I to IV)
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with
Verilog Design”, 3rd Edition, McGrawHill (Unit V, VI)
Reference Books
1. Charles H. Roth, Jr, “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 4th Edition, Jaico
Publishers.
2. Zvi Kohavi and Niraj K.Jha, “Switching and Finite Automata Theory, 3rd Edition,
Cambridge University Press, 2010.
3. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, 2nd
Edition, Prentice Hall PTR.
4. D.P.Leach, A.P.Malvino, “Digital Principles and Applications”, TMH, 7th Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 91

 FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA STRUCTURES
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To impart knowledge of linear and non-linear data structures.
• To familiarize with different sorting and searching techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• demonstrate the working process of sorting (bubble, insertion, selection and
heap) and searching (linear and binary) methods using a programming
language.
• design algorithms to create, search, insert, delete and traversal operations
on linear and non-linear data structures.
• evaluate the arithmetic expressions using stacks.
• compare array and linked list representation of data structures.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Linked lists
Introduction- Concept of data structures, overview of data structures,
implementation of data structures.
Linked Lists- Single linked list, Circular linked list, Double linked list, Circular
double linked list.
UNIT - II: Stacks
Representation using arrays and linked list, operations on stack, factorial
calculation, evaluation of arithmetic expression.
UNIT – III: Queues
Representation using arrays and linked list, operations on queue, circular queue,
queue using stack.
UNIT - IV: Trees
Binary Trees: Basic tree concepts, properties, representation of binary trees
using arrays and linked list, binary tree traversals, threaded binary tree.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 92

Binary search trees: Basic concepts, BST operations: search, insertion, deletion
and traversals, creation of binary search tree from in-order and pre (post)order
traversals.
UNIT - V: Sorting and Searching
Searching: Linear search, Binary search, Fibonacci search.
Sorting (Internal): Basic concepts, sorting by: insertion (Insertion sort), selection
(selection sort), exchange (Bubble sort, quick sort), distribution (radix sort) and
merging (merge sort).
UNIT - VI: Graphs
Basic concepts, representations of graphs, operations on graphs- vertex insertion,
vertex deletion, find vertex, edge addition, edge deletion, graph traversals (BFS &
DFS).
Text Books
1. Debasis samanta, Classic Data Structures, PHI, 2nd edition, 2011.
2. Richard F, Gilberg , Forouzan, Data Structures, 2nd edition, , Cengage.
Reference Books
1. Seymour Lipschutz, Data Structure with C, TMH.
2. G. A. V. Pai, Data Structures and Algorithms, TMH, 2008.
3. Horowitz, Sahni, Anderson Freed, Fundamentals of Data Structure in C,
University Press, 2nd edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 93

Open Elective - I
ELEMENTS OF CIVIL ENGINEERING
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce basics of Civil Engineering concepts in the fields of surveying,
building materials, water resources,Water Supply, Sanitary ,Electrical Works
in Building and Highway engineering.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• familiarizewith basics of civil engineering and concepts of surveying.
• identify the various properties of building materials and various types of building.
• get acquainted with fundamentals of Water Resources, Water Supply,
Sanitary and Electrical Works in Building.
• enumerate the fundamental concepts highway engineering.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction.
Introduction of Civil Engineering, Scope of Civil Engineering, Role of Civil Engineer
in Society.Impact of infrastructural development on economy of country.
UNIT - II: Surveying
Introduction: Definition of Surveying, Fundamental principles of surveying,
Classification of surveying
Linear Measurement: Methods, Instruments used in chain surveying, Selection
of stations, Chaining and Ranging
Angular Measurement: Instruments used, Types of compass, Types of meridians
and bearings, Measurement of bearings, computation of angles. Compass traversing
local attraction.
Levelling: Objectives and applications-terminology-Instruments,component parts
of dumpy level,Types of levelling ,levelling staff
UNIT - III: Building Materials and Construction
Materials: Introduction to construction materials - Stones, Bricks, Lime, Cement,
Timber, Sand, Aggregates, Mortar, Concrete and bitumen.
Construction: Classification of buildings, Building components and their functions.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 94

UNIT - IV: Water Resources
Hydrologic cycle, water use and its conservation, Introduction to dams, barrages
and check dams.
UNIT - V: Water Supply, Sanitary and Electrical Works in Building
Introduction, water supply system, water supply layout of a building, housedrainage,
traps, electrical works in building.
UNIT - VI: Transportation Engineering
classification of roads, Introduction of flexible and rigid pavements, Introduction to
road traffic and traffic control mechanism.
Text Books
1. Elements of Civil Engineering, Mimi Das Saikia, Bhargab Mohan Dasand
Madan Mohan Das Publisher: PHI Learning Private Limited New Delhi.
2. Elements of Civil Engineering, Dr. R.K. Jain and Dr. P.P. Lodha, Publisher:
McGraw Hill Education, India Pvt. Ltd.
3. Surveying Vol. I, Dr. B. C. Punmia, Ashokkumar Jain, ArunkumarJain, 16th
Edition Publisher: Laxmi Publication Delhi.
Reference Books
1. Surveying Theory and Practice, James M Anderson andEdward, 7th Edition,
M Mikhail Publisher: McGraw Hill Education, India Pvt. Ltd.
2. Surveying and Leveling, R. Subramanian Publisher, Oxford University.
3. Building drawing, M.G.Shah, C.M.Kale and S.Y.Patki Publisher: TataMcGraw
Hill.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 95

Open Elective - I
BUILDING SERVICES
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart knowledge on water supply, treatments and water distribution for
all type of buildings
• To acquire principles and best practices for Solid waste management in
residential units.
• To create awareness about the importance of electrical and mechanical
services in buildings and fire safety
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe water supply, treatments, distribution and plumbing systems for all
type of buildings.
• study waste water treatments, Sewer lines for all types of buildings.
• appraise the refuse collections, disposal, composting, landfill, bio gas for a
town and city.
• acquaint with distribution of electricity to all units of the project.
• adopt fire protection units at service points.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Water Quality, Treatments and Distribution
Sources of water supply – Water Quality - Water requirements for all type of
residential, commercial, Industrial buildings and for town – Water treatment methods
– Screening, aeration, Sedimentation, Filtration, Disinfection, Softening,
conveyance of water – Distribution of water – Choice of pipe materials - Types of
fixtures and fittings – System of plumbing in all type of buildings.
UNIT - II: Waste Water, Treatments and Disposal
Waste water – Sewage disposal, primary treatment.Secondary treatment,
Biological treatment and Modern types of Sewage Treatment Plants - Sewer
line fixtures and traps, Manholes, Septic tank.
UNIT - III: Room Acoustics
Key terms & Concepts, Introduction, Acoustic principles, Sound power and
pressure levels, Sound pressure level, absorption of sound, Reverberation time,

Electronics and Communication Engineering 96

Transmission of sound. Sound pressure level in a plant room, outdoor sound
pressure level, Sound pressure level in intermediate space, noise rating, Data
requirement, output data.
UNIT - IV: Electrical Services
Electrical systems – Basic of electricity – single/Three phase supply – protective
devices in electrical installation – Earthing for safety – Types of earthing – ISI
Specifications. Electrical installations in buildings – Types of wires, Wiring systems
and their choice – planning electrical wiring for building – Main and distribution
boards –Principles of illumination
UNIT - V: Heat Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Behaviour of heat propagation, thermal insulating materials and their co-efficient
of thermal conductivity.
General Methods of Thermal Insulation: Thermal insulation of roofs, exposed
walls.
Ventilation: Definition and necessity,system of ventilation. Principles of air
conditioning, Air cooling, Different systems of ducting and distribution, Essentials
of air-conditioning system.
UNIT - VI: Fire Fighting Services
Fire, causes of fire and spread of fire, Classification of fire, fire safety and fire
fighting method, fire detectors, heat detector, smoke detectors, fire dampers, fire
extinguishers.
Text Books
1. Water supply and sanitary engineering, S.C.Rangwala, Charotar publishing
house.
2. Environmental Engineering, A. Kamala & DL Kantha Rao, Tata McGraw –
Hill Publishing company Limited
Reference Books
1. Water supply and sanitary engineering, Charangith shah, Galgotia publishers.
2. Fire Safety in Building, V.K.Jain, Newage publishers (2010)
3. Heat pumps and Electric Heating, E.R.Ambrose, John and Wiley and Sons
Inc.
4. Handbook for Building Engineers in Metric systems, NBC,New Delhi.
5. National Building Code (2016).
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 97

Open Elective - I
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of dielectric and ferro magnetic materials.
• To impart knowledge on semiconductor materials.
• To familiarize with the required materials used for electrical applications.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe various insulating, conducting and magnetic materials used in
electrical applications.
• analyze the properties of liquid, gaseous and solid insulating materials.
• describe various semiconductor materials.
• select appropriate material for electrical and special purpose applications
Course Content
UNIT - I: Dielectic Materials
Dielectric as Electric Field Medium, leakage currents, dielectric loss, dielectric
strength, breakdown voltage, breakdown in solid dielectrics, flashover, liquid
dielectrics, electric conductivity in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics.
UNIT - II: Ferromagnetic Materials
Properties of ferromagnetic materials in static fields, spontaneous, polarization,
curie point, anti-ferromagnetic materials, piezoelectric materials, pyroelectric
materials.
UNIT - III: Magnetic Materials
Classification of magnetic materials, spontaneous magnetization in ferromagnetic
materials, magnetic Anisotropy, Magnetostriction, diamagnetism, magnetically
soft and hard materials, special purpose materials, feebly magnetic materials,
Ferrites, cast and cermet permanent magnets, ageing of magnets. factors effecting
permeability and hysteresis.
UNIT - IV: Semiconductor Materials
Properties of semiconductors, Silicon wafers, integration techniques, Large and
very large scale integration techniques (VLSI).
Electronics and Communication Engineering 98
UNIT - V: Materials for Electrical Applications
Materials used for Resistors, rheostats, heaters, transmission line structures,
stranded conductors, bimetals fuses, soft and hard solders, electric contact
materials, electric carbon materials, thermocouple materials. Solid Liquid and
Gaseous insulating materials. Effect of moisture on insulation.
UNIT - VI: Special Purpose Materials
Refractory Materials, Structural Materilas, Radiaoactive Materials, Galvonization
and Impregnation of materials, Processing of electronic materials, Insulating
varnishes and coolants, Properties and applications of mineral oils, Testing of
Transformer oil as per ISI.
Text Books
1. R K Rajput: A course in Electrical Engineering Materials, Laxmi Publications.
2009.
2. T K BasaK: A course in Electrical Engineering Materials:, New Age Science
Publications 2009 .
Reference Books
1. TTTI Madras: Electrical Engineering Materials
2. Adrianus J.Dekker: Electrical Engineering Materials , THM Publication

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 99

Open Elective - I
CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the basic concepts of control systems by developing
mathematical models for physical systems.
• To familiarize with the time domain behavior of linear control systems.
• To impart knowledge on analytical and graphical methods to quantify stability
of linear control systems.
• To introduce concepts on the state variable theory.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop mathematical models for physical systems.
• employ the time domain analysis to quantify the performance of linear control
systems and specify suitable controllers.
• quantify time and frequency domain specifications to determine stability margins.
• apply state variable theory to determine the dynamic behavior of linear control
systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop control systems and
their differences- Different examples of control systems- Classification of control
systems, Feed-Back Characteristics, Effects of feedback. Mathematical models
– Differential equations, Impulse Response and transfer function.
UNIT - II: Control Systems Components
Transfer Function of DC Servo motor - AC Servo motor-, Block diagram
representation of systems considering -Block diagram algebra – Representation
by Signal flow graph - Reduction is using Mason’s gain formula- simple problems
UNIT - III: Time Response Analysis
Standard test signals - Time response of first order systems – Characteristic
Equation of Feedback control systems, Transient response of second order
systems - Time domain specifications – Steady state response - Steady state
errors and error constants- simple problems.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 100

UNIT - IV: Stability Analysis in S-Domain
The concept of stability – Routh’s stability criterion – qualitative stability and
conditional stability – limitations of Routh’s stability.
Root Locus Technique: The root locus concept - construction of root loci –
simple problems
UNIT - V: Frequency Response Analysis
Introduction, Frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-Determination of
Frequency domain specifications- Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability Analysis
from Bode Plots. Polar Plots- simple problems.
UNIT - VI: State Space Analysis of Continuous Systems
Concept of state, state variables and state model, derivation of state models from
physical systems, solving the Time invariant state Equations- State Transition
Matrix and its Properties – simple problems.
Text Books
1. Control Systems Engineering – by I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, New Age
International Limited Publishers, 2nd edition.
2. Automatic control system – B.C.Kuo , john wiley and son’s 8th edition, 2003.
Reference Books
1. Modern control engineering – K.Ogata , prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 5th
Edition.
2. Control system – N.K.Sinha, New Age International (p) Limited Publishers,
3rd Edition, 1998.
3. Control system engineering – Norman S-Nice, Willey Studio Edition, 4th
Edition. Feed back and control system – Joseph J Distefa
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 101

Open Elective - I
ELEMENTS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the principles of manufacturing processes to convert materials
into desired shapes and sizes.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• select appropriate casting method to impart geometry to the material.
• choose appropriate type of welding process for joining of metals
• list out various welding defects and propose remedial measures
• distinguish between hot working and cold working processes
• identify suitable metal forming technique to impart desired geometry to the
product.
Course Content
UNIT - I
Introduction: Classification of manufacturing processes
Sand Casting: steps involved in making casting
Patterns: - Pattern Materials, Types of patterns, Pattern Allowances
Molding: – Molding sand, Types of molding sand and its properties, Methods of
molding
UNIT - II
Special casting processes – Centrifugal casting, Investment casting, Die casting,
Shell molding, Slush casting.
Casting defects – Cause and Remedies.
UNIT - III
Metal Joining Processes:- Classification of Metal joining processes
Welding:- Welding terminology, Types of weld joints and welds
Fusion Welding:- Principle of Oxy Acetylene welding, Equipment Setup, Types
of flames.
Types of Arc Welding Processes: SMAW, TIG, MIG

Electronics and Communication Engineering 102

UNIT - IV
Pressure welding: Principle of Resistance welding, Equipment set up, Different
resistance welding methods.
Solid state welding: Friction welding, Induction welding and Explosive welding
Welding Allied Processes: Soldering, Brazing and Braze welding
UNIT - V
Metal Forming: Classification of metal working processes.
Rolling –Types of Rolling mills, Rolling defects and remedies.
Drawing – drawing of rod, wire and tube – Drawing defects.
Extrusion – Classification of Extrusion process, Impact Extrusion
UNIT – VI
Forging – Basic forging operations ,Open die forging, Closed die forging, press
forging, Drop forging, Roll forging Defects
Sheet metal forming operations – Blanking and piercing, Bending Deep drawing,
Stretch forming, Embossing, Coining.
Text Books
1. M.P.Groover “Fundamentals of Modern Manufacturing, Materials, processing
and systems”, John wiley & sons, inc,4th Edition
2. H.S.Shan ,”Manufacturing Processes”, Cambridge, 2nd Edition.
Reference Books
1. Serope Kalpakjian and Steven R.Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering &
Technology”, Pearson Education, Inc., 5th edition..
2. Lindberg/PE , “Process and materials of manufacturing “, PHI.
3. Heine, Roper, Rosenthal, “Principles of Metal Castings “, Tata Mc Graw Hill
Publications, 2nd edition.
4. R.S.Paramar,”Welding Engineering and Technology “,khanna Publications,1st
edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 103

Open Elective - I
AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERING
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce various components of an automobile and engine sub systems.
• To familiarize with the various systems such as transmission system, steering
system, suspension system, braking system, and safety systems.
• To impart knowledge on various safety systems of an automobile and emission
norms.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe the various components of an automobile
• classify various fuel supply, lubrication, cooling and ignition systems
• explain transmission, suspension, steering and braking systems of an
automobile and their differences
• specify different safety norms for the operation of an automobile.
Course Content
UNIT - I
Introduction: classification of automobiles, Components of four wheeler
automobile- chassis, body, power unit, power transmission- front wheel drive, rear
wheel drive, four-wheel drive
Fuel supply systems: Carburettor-types, defects in carburettor, electronic injection
system, multi point fuel injection system, fuel injection system in diesel engine,
fuel injection pumps, fuel injector and nozzles.
UNIT - II
Lubricating System: Functions & properties of lubricants, methods of lubrication-
splash, pressure, dry sump and wet sump lubrication, oil filters and oil pumps.
Cooling System: Necessity, methods of cooling - air cooling & water cooling,
components of water cooling, radiator, thermostat.
UNIT - III
Ignition System: Functions, requirements, types of an ignition system, battery
ignition system - components, Magneto ignition system, Electronic ignition system.
Electrical System: charging circuit- generator, current-voltage regulator, stating
System-Bendix drive mechanism, lighting system, indicating devices, horn.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 104

UNIT - IV
Transmission system: Types and functions of the clutches- cone clutch, single
plate clutch, multi plate clutch, centrifugal and semi centrifugal clutch, Types of
gear boxes- Sliding mesh, Constant mesh, Synchromesh, propeller shaft, universal
joint and differential. wheels and tyres.
Steering System: steering geometry, condition for correct steering, types of
steering Mechanisms-Ackermann and Davis steering mechanism, steering gears,
power steering.
UNIT - V
Suspension System: Objectives of suspension system, front suspension system-
rigid axle suspension system, independent suspension system, rear axle
suspension, torsion bar, shock absorber.
Braking System: Mechanical brakes, hydraulic brakes-master cylinder, wheel
cylinder, tandem master cylinder, brake fluid, air brakes and vacuum brakes.
UNIT - VI
Emissions from Automobile: Emission norms - Bharat stage and Euro norms.
Engine emissions - exhaust and non-exhaust.
Safety Systems: seat belt, air bags, bumper, antilock brake system(ABS), wind
shield, suspension sensor, traction control, central locking, electric windows,
speed control.
Text Books
1. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering Vol-1 & vol-2”, Standard Publishers
Distributors, 11th edition.
2. William H Crouse & Donald L Anglin, Automotive Mechanics, Tata Mc Graw
Hill Publications, 10th edition.
Reference Books
1. R.B Gupta , Automobile Engineering, Satya Prakashan Publications, 6th
edition.
2. Newton steeds & Garrett, “The Motor vehicle”, Society of Automotive
Engineers, 13th edition.
3. G.B.S. Narang, “Automotive Engineering”, Khanna Publishers, 5th edition.
4. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics”, IPC Transport Press Ltd, 2nd Edition.
5. Harbons singh Reyat, “The Automobile”, S. Chand & company pvt. ltd., 6th
edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 105

Open Elective - I
INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with architecture of 8086 microprocessor and 8051
microcontroller.
• To introduce the assembly language programming concepts of 8086 processor.
• To expose with various interfacing devices with 8086 using 8255.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• gain the knowledge of the architecture and instruction set of 8086.
Microprocessor and 8051 micro controller.
• design and develop various interfacing circuits with 8086 using 8255.
• differentiate various Serial data transfer schemes.
• develop 8051 based different kinds of applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: 8086 Microprocessor
Introduction 8086 processor, architecture-functional diagram, register organization,
memory segmentation, physical memory organization, signal descriptions of 8086-
common function signals, minimum and maximum mode signals, timing diagrams.
UNIT - II: Instruction Set and Assembly Language Programming of 8086
Addressing modes, instruction set, assembler directives, macros, simple programs
involving logical, branch and call instructions, sorting, evaluating arithmetic
expressions, string manipulations.
UNIT - III: Interfacing with 8086
8255 PPI architecture, modes of operation, keyboard, stepper motor, D/A and A/
D converter, memory interfacing to 8086.
UNIT - IV: Interrupt Structure and Serial Communication
Interrupt structure of 8086, vector interrupt table, interrupt service routine, serial
communication standards, serial data transfer schemes,8251 USART architecture
and interfacing, RS- 232.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 106

UNIT - V: Introduction to 8051 Microcontroller
Overview of 8051 microcontroller, Architecture, I/O Ports, Memory organization,
Interrupts, timer/ Counter and serial communication.
UNIT - VI: Interfacing with 8051
Addressing modes and instruction set of 8051, interfacing 8051 to LED’s, seven
segment display, relays.
Text Books
1. D. V. Hall’ “Microprocessors and Interfacing”, TMH, 2nd edition 2006. (I to IV
Units).
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “The 8051
Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems”, Pearson, 2nd Edition. (IV to VI Units)
Reference Books
1. Barry B.Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors”, PHI, 7th Edition, 2006.
2. Liu and GA Gibson, “Micro Computer System 8086/8088 Family Architecture.
Programming and Design”, PHI, 2nd Edition.
3. Kenneth. J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, 3rd Edition, Cengage Learning,
2010.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 107

Open Elective - I
FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATIONS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce various analog and digital modulation and demodulation
techniques
• To familiarize with various multiplexing schemes and Data communication
protocols
• To impart the standards and mechanisms of television systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
•. understand the concepts of various analog and digital modulation techniques.
•. analyze transmission mechanism in transmission lines and optical fiber.
•. compare different multiplexing techniques.
•. understand the principles of wireless communication systems.
•. differentiate the different telephone systems.
•. ascertain error detection and correction capabilities of various codes.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Signals, Noise, Modulation and Demodulation
Signal analysis, electrical noise and signal-to-noise ratio, analog modulation
systems, information capacity, bits, bit rate, baud, and M-ary encoding, digital
modulation.
UNIT - II: Metallic Cable Transmission Media
Metallic transmission lines, transverse electromagnetic waves, characteristics of
electromagnetic waves
Optical Fiber Transmission Media: Advantages of optical fiber cables,
disadvantages of optical fiber cables, electromagnetic spectrum, optical fiber
communications system block diagram, propagation of light through an optical
fiber cable, optical fiber comparison.
UNIT - III: Digital Transmission
Pulse modulation, pulse code modulation, dynamic range, signal voltage to-
quantization noise voltage ratio, linear versus nonlinear PCM codes, companding,
delta modulation, differential PCM.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 108
UNIT - IV: Wireless Communications Systems
Electromagnetic polarization, electromagnetic radiation, optical properties of radio
waves, terrestrial propagation of electromagnetic waves, skip distance, free-space
path loss, microwave communications systems, satellite communications
systems.
UNIT - V: Telephone Instruments and Signals
The subscriber loop, standard telephone set, basic telephone call procedures,
call progress tones and signals, cordless telephones, caller ID, electronic
telephones, paging systems.
Cellular Telephone Systems: First- generation analog cellular telephone, personal
communications system, second-generation cellular telephone systems, digital
cellular telephone, global system for mobile communications.
UNIT - VI: Data Communications Codes, Error Control and Data
Formats: Data communications character codes, bar codes, error control, error
detection and correction, character synchronization.
Text Books
1. Wayne Tomasi “Introduction to Data Communications and Networking”,
Pearson Education.
2. Behrouz A Forouzan “Data Communications and Networking”, 4th Edition.
TMH.
Reference Books
1. William Stallings “Data and Computer communications”, 8th Edition, PHI.
2. Gallow “Computer Communications and Networking Technologies”, 2nd Edition.
3. Fred Halsll, Lingana Gouda Kulkarni “Computer Networking and Internet”, 5th
Edition, Pearson Education.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 109

Open Elective - I
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce computer graphics applications and functionalities of various
graphic systems.
• To familiarize with 2D and 3D geometrical transformations.
• To disseminate knowledge on the visible surface detection and animation.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• design a conceptual model for the mathematical model to determine the set
of pixels to turn on for displaying an object.
• analyze the functionalities of various display devices and visible surface
detection methods.
• analyze the performance of different algorithms to draw different shapes.
• choose different transformations and viewing functions on objects.
• apply raster animations for Engine oil advertisements.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Introduction: Application of computer graphics, raster scan and random scan
Displays.
Filled Area Primitives: Points and lines, inside and outside tests, line drawing
algorithms, Scan line polygon fill algorithm.
UNIT - II: 2-D Geometrical Transforms
Translation, scaling, rotation, reflection and shear transformations, matrix
representations and homogeneous coordinates, composite transformations.
UNIT - III: 2D Viewing
The viewing pipeline, window to view-port coordinate transformation, Cohen-
Sutherland line clipping algorithm, Sutherland –Hodgeman polygon clipping
algorithm.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 110

UNIT - IV: 3D Geometric Transformations
Translation, rotation, scaling, reflection and shear transformations, composite
transformations, types of projections.
UNIT - V: Visible Surface Detection Methods
Classification – types, back-face detection, depth-buffer, BSP tree, area sub-
division method.
UNIT - VI: Computer Animation
Animations: General computer animation, raster animation, key frame systems,
Graphics programming using OpenGL: Basic graphics primitives, drawing three
dimensional objects, drawing three dimensional scenes.
Text Books
1. Donald Hearn, M.Pauline Baker, “Computer Graphics C version”, 2nd Edition,
Pearson Education.
2. Francis S. Hill, Stephen M. Kelley, “Computer Graphics using OpenGL”, 3rd
edition, Pearson Education.
Reference Books
1. Foley, VanDam, Feiner, Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles and Practice”,
2nd edition, Pearson Education.
2. Rajesh K Maurya, “Computer Graphics with Virtual Reality Systems”, Wiley.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 111

Open Elective - I
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING THROUGH JAVA
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the concepts of object oriented programming.
• To impart the knowledge of AWT components in creation of GUI.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply Object Oriented approach to design software.
• create user defined interfaces and packages for a given problem.
• develop code to handle exceptions.
• implement multi tasking with multi threading.
• develop Applets for web applications
• design and develop GUI programs using AWT components.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Fundamentals of OOP and JAVA
Need of OOP, principles of OOP languages, procedural languages vs. OOP, Java
virtual machine, java features.
Java Programming constructs: variables, primitive data types, identifiers, keywords,
Literals, operators, arrays, type conversion and casting.
UNIT - II: Class Fundamentals and Inheritance
Class fundamentals, declaring objects, methods, constructors, this keyword,
overloading methods and constructors, access control.
Inheritance- Basics, types, using super keyword, method overriding, dynamic
method dispatch, abstract classes, using final with inheritance, Object class.
UNIT - III: Interfaces and Packages
Interfaces: Defining an interface, implementing interfaces, nested interfaces,
variables in interfaces and extending interfaces.
Packages: Defining, creating and accessing a package.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 112

UNIT - IV: Exception Handling and Multithreading
Exception Handling- exception-handling fundamentals, uncaught exceptions, using
try and catch, multiple catch clauses, nested try statements, throw, throws, finally,
user-defined exceptions.
Multi Threading - Introduction to multitasking, thread life cycle, creating threads,
synchronizing threads, thread groups.
UNIT - V: Applets and Event Handling
Applets- Concepts of Applets, differences between applets and applications, life
cycle of an applet, creating applets.
Event Handling- Events, event sources, event classes, event listeners, Delegation
event model, handling mouse and keyboard events, adapter classes.
UNIT - VI: AWT
The AWT class hierarchy, user interface components- label, button, checkbox,
checkboxgroup, choice, list, textfield, scrollbar, layout managers –flow, border,
grid, card, gridbag.
Text Books
1. Herbert Schildt, “Java The Complete Reference”, 7th edition, TMH.
2. Sachin Malhotra, Saurabh Choudhary, “Programming in Java”, 2nd edition,
Oxford.
Reference Books
1. Joyce Farrel, Ankit R.Bhavsar, “Java for Beginners”, 4th edition, Cengage
Learning.
2. Y.Daniel Liang, “Introduction to Java Programming”, 7th edition, Pearson.
3. P.Radha Krishna, “Object Oriented Programming through Java”, Universities
Press.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 113

Open Elective - I
SYSTEMS SOFTWARE
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objective
• To familiarize with the implementation details of assemblers, loaders, linkers,
and macro processors.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline the relationship between system software and machine architecture.
• analyze working of assembler for a simplified Instructional computer.
• describe the important features of linkage Editors and Dynamic Linking .
• identify the mostly used macro processors algorithms and data structures.
• compare the functions of Absolute Loader , Bootstrap Loaders.
UNIT - I: Introduction
System software and machine architecture, The Simplified Instructional Computer
(SIC), Machine architecture, Data and instruction formats, addressing modes,
instruction sets, I/O and programming System.
UNIT - II: Assemblers
Basic assembler functions, SIC assembler, assembler algorithm and data
structures, machine dependent assembler features.
UNIT - III: Implementation of Assemblers
Instruction formats and addressing modes, program relocation, machine
independent assembler features, literals, symbol, defining statements, expressions,
one pass assemblers, multi pass assemblers, implementation example, MASM
assemble.
UNIT - IV: Loaders
Basic loader functions, design of an absolute loader, simple bootstrap loader,
machine dependent loader features, relocation, loader options, loader design
options, bootstrap loaders.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 114

UNIT - V: Linkers
Program linking, algorithm and data structures for linking loader, machine
independent loader features, automatic library search, linkage editors, dynamic
linking, implementation example, MS DOS linkers.
UNIT - VI: Macro Processors
Basic macro processor functions, macro definition and expansion, macro processor
algorithm and data structures, machine independent macro processor features,
concatenation of macro parameters, generation of unique labels, conditional macro
expansion.
Text Book
1. Leland L. Beck, “System Software – An Introduction to Systems
Programming”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2000.
Reference Book
1. D. M. Dhamdhere, “Systems Programming and Operating Systems”, 2nd
Revised edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1999.
2. John J. Donovan “Systems Programming”, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition, 1972.

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 115

Open Elective - I
WEB PROGRAMMING
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To develop real time web applications.
• To get acquainted with skills for creating websites and web applications by
learning various technologies like HTML, CSS, JavaScript, XML, JSP and
JDBC.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify HTML tags with their purpose
• develop User Interface for web applications using HTML and CSS.
• design dynamic web pages using Java Script.
• use XML for storing data.
• design JSP applications
• apply the concept of sharing data between dynamic web pages
• create pure Dynamic web application using JDBC
• describe the usage of JDBC API
UNIT - I: HTML & CSS
HTML –HTML versions, Basic HTML Tags, working with Lists, Tables, Forms,
Frames,div, Images, Navigation.
UNIT - II: Cascading Style sheets
CSS rules, Types of CSS, Selectors ,CSS Properties for Styling Backgrounds,
Text, Fonts, Links, and Positioning.
UNIT - III: Java Script
Introduction to Java Script, Variables, Data types, Functions, Operators, Control
flow statements, Objects in Java Script with examples.
UNIT – IV: XML
Basic building blocks, DTD and XML Schemas, XML Parsers- DOM and SAX,
using CSS with XML and XML AJAX.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 116

UNIT - V: JSP
Basic of a JSP Page, JSP Processing, Generating Dynamic Content-Using
Scripting Elements, Implicit JSP Objects, Declaring Variables and Methods,
Passing Control and Data between pages, creation of Session
UNIT - VI: Database Access
JDBC Drivers, Database Programming using JDBC, Accessing a database from a
JSP Page.
Text Books
1. Web Technologies, “Black book”, Kogent Learning Solutions, Dreamtech
press.
2. Chris Bates, “Web Programming: building internet applications”,
WILEYDreamtech, 2nd edition.
Reference Books
1. Uttam K Roy, “Web Technologies”, Oxford.
2. John Duckett, “Beginning Web Programming”.
3. Wang Thomson, “An Introduction to web design and Programming”.

* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 117

Open Elective - I
MATHEMATICAL CRYPTOGRAPHY
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To give a simple account of classical number theory, prepare students towards
the concepts of Network Security and to demonstrate applications of number
theory (such as public-key cryptography).
• To students will have a working knowledge of the fundamental definitions and
theorems of elementary number theory, be able to work with congruences.
• To solve congruence equations and systems of equations with one and more
variables.
• To students will also have an exposure to cryptography.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the properties of divisibility and prime numbers, compute the
greatest common divisor and least common multiples and handle linear
Diophantine equations.
• understand the operations with congruences, linear and non-linear congruence
equations.
• understand and use the theorems: Chinese Remainder Theorem, Lagrange
theorem, Fermat’s theorem, Wilson’s theorem.
• use arithmetic functions in areas of mathematics.
• understand continue fractions and will be able to approximate reals by
rationals.
• understand the basics of RSA security and be able to break the simplest
instances.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Divisibility
Greatest common divisor, Fundamental theorem of arithmetic, Congruence,
Residue classes and reduced residue classes, Euler’s theorem, Fermat’s theorem,
Wilson Theorem, Chinese remainder theorem with applications.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 118

UNIT - II: Polynomial Congruences
Primitive roots, Indices and their applications, Quadratic residues, Legendre symbol,
Euler’s criterion, Gauss’s Lemma, Quadratic reciprocity law, Jacobi symbol.
UNIT - III: Arithmetic Functions
φ(x), d (x), µ(x), σ (x) , Mobius inversion formula, LinearDiophantine equations
UNIT - IV: Farey Series
Continued fractions, Approximations of reals by rationals, Pell’s equation.
UNIT - V: Introduction to Cryptography
Encryption schemes, Cryptanalysis, Block ciphers, Stream ciphers.
UNIT - VI: Public Key Encryption
RSA cryptosystem and Rabin encryption.
Text Books
1. Jeffrey Hoffstein, Jill Pipher, Joseph H. Silverman, An Introduction to
Mathematical Cryptography, springer, second edition (2014).
2. Gilbert Baumslag, Benjamin Fine, Martin Kreuzer, A Course in Mathematical
Cryptography, Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co KG(2015).
Reference Books
1. Hardy and Wright W.H., Theory of Numbers, Oxford University Press (1979).
2. Niven I., Zuckerman S.H. and Montgomary L.H., An Introduction to Theory
of Numbers, John Wiley and Sons (1991).
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 119

Open Elective - I
SEMICONDUCTOR PHYSICS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To know the physics and applications of semi conductor.
• To understand fundamental principles and applications of the electronic and
optoelectronic.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• classify semi conductors.
• discuss photonic devices.
• Interpret formation of band structure.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Electronic Materials (8)
Free electron theory, Density of states and energy band diagrams, Kronig-Penny
model (to introduce origin of band gap), Energy bands in solids, E-k diagram,
Direct and indirecT bandgaps, Types of electronic materials: metals,
semiconductors, and insulators.
UNIT - II: Semiconductors (10)
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, Dependence of Fermi level on carrier-
concentrationand temperature (equilibrium carrier statistics), Carrier generation
and recombination, Carrier transport: diffusion and drift
UNIT - III: Light-Semiconductor Interaction (6)
Optical transitions in bulk semiconductors: absorption, spontaneous emission,
and stimulateD Emission.
UNIT - IV: Engineered Semiconductor Materials (6)
Density of states in 2D, 1D and 0D (qualitatively). Practical examples of low-
dimensional systems such as quantum wells, wires, and dots: design, fabrication,
and characterization techniques. Hetero junctions and associated band-diagrams

Electronics and Communication Engineering 120

UNIT - V: Photo Detectors (6)
Types of semiconductor photo detectors -p-n junction, PIN, and Avalanche and
their structure, materials, working principle, and characteristics, Noise limits on
performance; Solar cells.
UNIT - VI: Semiconductor Light Emitting Diodes
Rate Equation for carrier density - Radiative and non-radiative recombination
mechanisms in semiconductor - LED: device structure, material, characteristics
and figures of merit.
Text Books
1. S. M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices: Physics and Technology, Wiley (2008).
2. J. Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, McGraw-
Hill Inc. (1995).
Reference Books
1. B. E. A. Saleh and M. C. Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., (2007).
2. A. Yariv and P. Yeh, Photonics: Optical Electronics in Modern
Communications, Oxford University Press, New York (2007).
3. P. Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Prentice Hall of
India (1997).
4. Online course: “Semiconductor Optoelectronics” by M R Shenoy on NPTEL
5. Online course: “Optoelectronic Materials and Devices” by Monica Katiyar
and Deepak Gupta on NPTEL.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 121

 ANALOG CIRCUITS LAB
II Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
To make the students familiarize with the
• design, simulation, and conduct of experiments to obtain the frequency
response/ performance characteristics of single-stage, cascode, differential,
tuned, feedback, and power amplifiers, RC and LC oscillators,.
• testing of op-amp in inverting and non-inverting configurations.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• perform experiment, take observations, present the results in proper form,
analyze and interpret results, draw conclusions by correlating with theory.
• use modern tools for simulation.
• design, simulate, hardware implement, test, and obtain performance
characteristics of - CS, CE, BJT cascode, BJT differential, single-tuned,
series-series feedback, shunt-shunt feedback, and class B complementary
symmetry power amplifiers.
• verify the operation of op amp in inverting and non-inverting configurations.
• design, simulate, hardware implement, and test Wien-bridge and Colpitts
oscillators.
• make oral presentations and prepare written reports.
List of Experiments
1. Common-source amplifier (design, simulation, hardware implementation and
testing)
2. Common-emitter amplifier (design, simulation, hardware implementation and
testing)
3. Cascode amplifier using BJTs
4. BJT differential amplifier
5. Op-amp operation in inverting and non-inverting configurations
6. Single-tuned amplifier (design, simulation, hardware implementation and
testing)
Electronics and Communication Engineering 122
 7. Series-series feedback amplifier
8. Shunt-shunt feedback amplifier
9. Wien-bridge oscillator using op-amp (design, simulation, hardware
implementation and testing)
10. Colpitts oscillator
11. Class -B complementary symmetry power amplifier (design, simulation,
hardware implementation and testing)
12. Open-ended experiment
Reference Books
1. Adel S. Sedra and Kenneth C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Oxford
University Press Inc., 2004.
2. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit
Theory”, Pearson Education Inc., 11th Edition, 2013.
3. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - I”, NPTEL
Video Course.
4. K. Radha Krishna Rao, “Electronics for Analog Signal Processing - II”, NPTEL
Video Course.
5. User manuals for basic electronic lab equipment.
6. Data sheets for electronic components.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 123

 DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN LAB
II Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To get acquainted with the concepts of various Digital Circuits
• To familiarize with the CAD Tools.
Learning Outcomes
After the completion of course, students will be able to
• learn the digital circuit concepts.
• design the digital circuits.
• develop digital circuits using CAD tools.
List of Experiments
Part-A: To design and simulate using Electronic Workbench
1. Full adder.
2. 8:1 multiplexer.
3. SR and D flip-flop.
4. Shift register
5. Asynchronous counter.
6. Open Ended Experiment
Part B: To design and simulate using CAD tools
1. 8:3 priority encoder.
2. Ring counter.
3. Asynchronous counter.
4. Simple Datapath
5. ALU Design
6. Open Ended Experiment
Reference Books
1. M. Morris Mano, “Digital Design”, 3rd Edition, PHI.
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with
Verilog Design”, 3rd Edition, McGrawHill.
3. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”,
2nd Edition, Prentice Hall PTR.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 124

Optional Elective - I
INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON PROGRAMMING
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with Python Programming .
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline features, history of Python programming language.
• classify literal constants, data Types and operators in python.
• demonstrate the use of data structures like lists, tuples and dictionaries in
python.
• use classes, objects, methods, and inheritance to write object oriented
programs.
• differentiate mutable and immutable data types.
• analyze different ways of building logic for executing programs using decision
control, iterative statements.
• develop applications/programs using standard data types in Python.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Basics of Python Programming
Features and history of Python, literal constants, data types, variables, operators,
input operation.
UNIT - II: Decision Control and Looping Statements
Conditional and un-conditional branching, iterative statements, nesting of decision
control statements and loops.
UNIT - III: Functions and Strings
Functions: Function definition, call, return statement, types of arguments recursive
functions, modules.
Strings -Basic string operations, string formatting operator, built-in functions.
UNIT - IV: Tuples and Lists
Tuples: Creating, accessing values, updating, deleting elements in a tuple, basic
tuple operations.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 125

Lists: Accessing, updating values in lists, basic list operations, mutability of lists.
UNIT - V: Dictionaries
Dictionaries: Creating a dictionary, adding an item, deleting items, sorting items,
looping over a dictionary, basic dictionary operations, built-in functions.
UNIT - VI: OOP in Python
Classes and objects, class method and self argument, _init_() method, calling a
class method from another class method, inheriting classes in Python.
Text Books
1. Reema Thareja, “Python Programming – Using Problem Solving Approach“,
Oxford University Press, 2014 Edition.
2. Dr. R. Nageswara Rao, “Core Python Programming”, 2017 Edition.
Reference Books
1. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference”, 2001 Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited.
2. Kenneth A. Lambert, ‘Fundamentals of Python – first programs”, 2012 Edition,
Cengage.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 126

Optional Elective - I
DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize the concepts of database systems and different issues involved
in the database design.
• To introduce how to write SQL for storage, retrieval and manipulation of data
in a relational database.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, students will be able to
• recognize the importance of database system over file processing system.
• analyze an information storage problem and derive an information model in
the form of an entity relationship diagram.
• write simple and complex queries using Structured Query Language (SQL)
for storage, retrieval and manipulation of data in a relational database.
• employ principles of normalisation for designing a good relational database
schema.
• describe the issues and techniques relating to concurrency and database
recovery in a multi-user database environment.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Database
Introduction, advantages of using DBMS, data models, levels of abstraction, entity-
relationship model: attributes and keys, relationship types, weak entity set, strong
entity set, specialization and generalization, database design for banking
enterprise, reduction to relational schemas.
UNIT - II: Relational Model and SQL
Relational Model: Basic concepts, schema and instances, keys, relational algebra,
SQL: DDL, DML, integrity constraints,defining different constraints on a table, set
operations, aggregate functions, group by and having clauses, nested queries.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 127

UNIT - III: Database Design
Functional dependencies: Partial, full, transitive and trivial dependencies, axioms,
decomposition: lossless join and dependency preserving decomposition, attribute
closure, normal forms: 1NF, 2NF, 3NF and BCNF.
UNIT - IV: Transaction Management
Transaction concept, ACID properties, transaction state diagram, schedules-serial,
concurrent and serializable schedules, serializability- conflict and view serializability,
recoverability.
UNIT - V: Concurrency Control
Concurrency Control- Concurrent execution of transactions, anomalies due to
concurrent execution, lock-based protocols-2PL, strict 2PL and rigorous 2PL,
timestamp-based protocols, Thomas write rule, deadlock handling-deadlock
prevention, deadlock detection and recovery.
UNIT - VI: Crash Recovery
Crash Recovery - Failure classification, different types of recovery techniques:
deferred update, immediate update, shadow paging, checkpoints.
Text Books
1. Korth and Sudarshan, Database system concept, TMH,3rd edition.
2. Raghu Ramakrishnan, Johannes Gehrke, Database Management Systems,
3rd edition,TMH.
Reference Books
1. Elmasri Navrate, Fundamentals of Database Systems,5th edition, Pearson
Education
2. C.J.Date, Introduction to Database Systems, 8th edition,Pearson Education
3. Peter Rob and C Coronel, Database Systems design, Implementation, and
Management, 7th Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 128

Optional Elective - I
ELECTRONIC SWITCHING SYSTEMS
II Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the operational characteristics of switching techniques.
• To introduce the concepts of working of different Switching types and networks,
Digital Subscriber Access.
• To familiarize with the digital transmission systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• distinguish different switching systems
• differentiate transmission and multiplexing systems
• understand the concepts of digital switching systems
• decimate the knowledge of fiber optic transmission systems.
• compare different interfaces of ISDN
• analyze the traffic characterization in different networks.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Switching and Transmission Systems
Analog network hierarchy, switching systems, transmission systems, signaling,
analog interfaces, digital network evolution, advantages and disadvantages of digital
voice networks.
UNIT - II: Digital Transmission and Multiplexing
Pulse transmission, asynchronous versus synchronous transmission, time division
multiplexing, time division multiplex loops and rings.
UNIT - III: Digital Switching
Switching functions, space division switching, time division switching, 2-d
switching, digital switching in an analog environment.
UNIT - IV: Fiber Optic Transmission Systems
Fibre optic transmission system elements, wavelength division multiplexing,
SONET/SDH multiplexing, SONET frame format, payload framing, virtual tributaries,
SONET optical standards, SONET networks, SONET rings.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 129

UNIT - V: Digital Subscriber Access
ISDN basic rate access architecture, S/T interface, ISDN U interface, ISDN
interface, digital subscriber loops, digital loop carrier systems, hybrid fiber coax
systems, voice band modems.
UNIT - VI: Digital Mobile Telephony and Traffic Analysis
Digital cellular, global system for mobile communications, CDMA cellular, traffic
characterization, network blocking probabilities.
Text Books
1. John C Bellamy, “Digital telephony”, 3rd Edition, Wiley 2009.
2. Marion cole, “Introduction to Telecommunications Voice, Data and the Internet”,
2nd Edition.
Reference Books
1. Wayne Tomasi, “Advanced electronic communication systems”, PHI,2004.
2. Tarmo Anttalainen , “Introduction to Telecommunications Network Engineering”,
2nd Edition, Artech house, INC. 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 130

 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS APPLICATIONS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the functioning of various linear ICs such as op-amp, timer,
voltage regulator, voltage controlled oscillator and phase locked loop.
• To introduce the concepts of active filters, D/A and A/D convertors.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• infer the DC and AC characteristics of operational amplifiers and its effect on
output and their compensation techniques.
• elucidate and design linear and non-linear applications using op-amps.
• design and analyze comparators, waveform generators and multivibrators
using functional ICs.
• design active filters and regulated power supplies for various applications.
• apply the concepts of VCO and PLL in the design of demodulator circuits.
• choose appropriate A/D and D/A converters for signal processing applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Operational Amplifier
The operational amplifier-circuit symbol, terminals; ideal and practical op-amp
specifications, block schematic, IC 741 pin configuration and internal circuit, DC
and AC characteristics of op-amp.
UNIT - II: Applications of Op-amp
Review of inverting and non-inverting configurations; summing amplifier, difference
amplifier, integrator and its design, differentiator, instrumentation amplifier and
precision rectifiers.
UNIT - III: Comparators and Waveform Generators
Comparator, schmitt trigger and its design, square wave generator, triangular wave
generator, IC 555 Timer-pin diagram, functional description, monostable
multivibrator, astable multivibrator and its design.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 131

UNIT - IV: Active Filters
RC active filters, transformation, design of first and second order low-pass and
high-pass butterworth filters, design of band-pass filters.
UNIT - V: Voltage Regulators and Phase-Locked Loops
Series op-amp regulator, IC voltage regulators, 723 general purpose regulator,
switching regulator, design of regulated power supply using 3-terminal and 723
ICs, Phase-Locked Loops (PLLs) – basic principles, phase detector/comparator,
Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO), low-pass filter.
UNIT - VI: D/A & A/D Converters
Basic DAC techniques, A-D converters, direct type ADCs, specifications of ADC/
DAC.
Text Book
1. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B.Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age
International (p) Ltd, Second Edition, 2003.
Reference Books
1. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifier and Analog Integrated
Circuits”, TMH, Fourth Edition, 2011.
2. G.B.Clayton, “Operational Amplifiers”, Elsevier Science, Fifth Edition, 2003.
3. K.Radha Krishna Rao, “Analog ICs”, NPTEL Video Course.
4. Paul R.Gray, Paul J.Hurst, Stephen H.Lewis, and Robert G. Meyer, “Analysis
and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Fourth
Edition, 2001.
5. Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, “OP-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, PHI,
Fourth Edition, 2010.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 132

 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To introduce pulse modulation techniques.
• To acquaint with different pulse digital modulation techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand basic concepts of digital communication systems.
• distinguish PCM and DM systems.
• elucidate different digital modulation techniques.
• determine the probability error for different digital modulation techniques.
• identify error detection & correction capabilities of linear block codes.
UNIT - I: Pulse Code Modulation
Elements of digital communication systems, elements of PCM- sampling,
quantizing, encoding, regeneration, decoding, reconstruction, multiplexing,
synchronization,companding in PCM systems, differential PCM systems (DPCM).
Course Content
UNIT - II: Delta Modulation
Delta modulation, noise in PCM & DM systems, comparison of PCM & DM
systems.
UNIT - III: PSK
Phase Shift Keying, Differential Phase Shift Keying, Quadrature Phase Shift Keying,
M-ary PSK.
UNIT - IV: ASK and FSK
Amplitude shift keying, frequency shift keying, similarity of BFSK and BPSK, M-
ary FSK.
UNIT - V: Data Transmission
Pass band transmission model, base band signal receiver, probability of error, the
optimum filter, probability of error using matched filter, coherent reception,
calculation of error probability of ASK, BPSK, BFSK, QPSK techniques using
coherent detection.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 133

UNIT - VI: Information Theory & Coding
Information and its properties, average information, entropy and its properties,
Shannon’s theorem, Shanon-Fano and Huffman coding, efficiency
calculations,matrix description of linear block codes, error detection and error
correction capabilities of linear block codes.
Text Books
1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications” John Wiley, 2005.
2. H. Taub and D. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, TMH,
2003.
Reference Books
1. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley,
2005.
2. John Proakis, “Digital Communications”,TMH, 1983.
3. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Analog and Digital Communication”, Oxford reprint, 3rd
Edition, 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 134

 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with antenna parameters and radiation mechanisms, antenna
arrays and its radiation patterns.
• To introduce antennas used at different frequencies UHF, VHF, microwave
frequencies.
• To impart the concepts of wave propagations.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the fundamental concepts of Antennas.
• differentiate antennas based on their radiation mechanism.
• design basic antenna arrays using multiplication of patterns.
• analyze the performance of non resonant radiators, VHF and UHF antennas.
• compare the performance of several antennas working at high frequencies.
• distinguish wave propagations based on frequency of operation.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Antenna Fundamentals
Basic concepts and antenna parameters – radiation patterns (E & H planes),
main lobe and side lobes, beam width, beam area, radiation intensity, beam
efficiency, directivity and gain, resolution; aperture concepts and types – aperture
area and efficiency, effective height; antenna theorems.
UNIT - II: Radiation Mechanism
Retarded potentials, radiation from small dipole, quarter wave monopole and half
wave dipole, current distribution, electric and magnetic field components, radiated
power, radiation resistance, directivity and aperture area.
UNIT - III: Antenna Arrays
Two element arrays – different cases; N element linear arrays – broadside and
end fire arrays, characteristics and comparison; multiplication of patterns, binomial
Arrays.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 135

UNIT - IV: Non-Resonant Radiators
Introduction; travelling wave radiators – basic concepts, V antenna, rhombic
antenna, construction details, design considerations.
VHF And UHF Antennas: Arrays with parasitic elements, Folded Dipoles, Yagi
Uda antenna, Helical Antenna.
UNIT - V: Microwave Antennas
Plane sheet and corner reflectors; paraboloidal reflectors – characteristics, types
of feeds, spill over, aperture blocking, offset feed, cassegrain feeds; horn antennas
– types, characteristics, optimum horns; lens antennas – features, dielectric and
metal plate lenses, applications.
UNIT - VI: Wave Propagation
Introduction, factors involved in wave propagation; ground wave propagation –
characteristics, wave tilt, flat earth considerations; ionosphere – formation of layers
and mechanism of propagation, reflection and refraction mechanisms; critical
frequency, Maximum Usable Frequency (MUF), optimum frequency, skip distance,
virtual height; space wave propagation - m curves and duct propagation, tropospheric
scattering.
Text Books
1. John D.Kraus and Ronald J.Marhefka, “Antennas”, TMH, 4th Edition, 2010.
2. E.C. Jordan & K.G. Balman,” Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems”,
Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 2000.
Reference Books
1. Constantine A.Balanis, “Antenna Theory”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition,
2002.
2. A.R.Harish and M.Sachidananda, “Antennas and wave propagation” , Oxford
University Press, 2008.
3. F.E.Terman, “Electronic and Radio Engineering”, McGrawHill, 4th Edition, 1955.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 136

 PRINCIPLES OF VLSI DESIGN
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize the students with the MOSFET characteristics, CMOS
processing, and VLSI circuits characterization, design, and testing.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• characterize the MOS devices
• draw layouts
• apply design techniques for VLSI circuits
• apply testing and verification principles for VLSI circuits
Course Content
UNIT - I: MOS Transistor Theory
Brief history, VLSI design flow, ideal I-V characteristics, C-V characteristics, non-
ideal I-V effects, DC transfer characteristics, switch-level RC delay models.
UNIT - II: CMOS Processing Technology
CMOS technologies, layout design rules, CMOS process enhancements,
technology related CAD issues.
UNIT - III: Circuit Characterization and Performance Estimation
Delay estimation, logical effort and transistor sizing, power dissipation,
interconnect, reliability, scaling.
UNIT - IV: Design Methodology
Design methodology, design flows, CMOS physical design styles.
UNIT - V: Special-purpose Subsystems
Packaging, power distribution, I/O, Clock.
UNIT - VI: Testing and Verification
Tests categories, testers, test fixtures, test programs, logic verification principles,
silicon debug principles, manufacturing test principles, design for testability,
boundary scan.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 137

Text Book
1. Neil H.E.Weste, David Harris, and Ayan Banerjee, “CMOS VLSI Design: A
Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson Education Inc., Third Edition,
2005 (Indian Reprint 2014).
Reference Books
1. Kamran Eshraghian, Douglas A Pucknell, and Sholeh Eshraghian, “Essentials
of VLSI Circuits and Systems”, PHI Learning, 2009.
2. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis
and Design”, TMH Education, Third Edition, 2003.
3. Carver Mead and Lynn Conway, “Introduction to VLSI Systems”, Addison
Wesley, First Edition, 1979.
4. Eugene D. Fabricius,” Introduction to VLSI design”, McGraw-Hill International
Edition, 1990.
5. IIT Bombay,” VLSI Design”, NPTEL Web Course.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 138

Professional Elective - I
CAD FOR VLSI
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To make the students familiarize with the VLSI design methodologies,
optimization of combinational circuits, layout, floorplan, and simulation and
synthesis techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand various methodologies for the design of VLSI systems.
• optimize combinational circuits.
• develop algorithms for the layout optimization.
• size floor plan and solve routing problems.
• analyze different simulation and synthesis techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: VLSI Design Methodologies
The VLSI design problem, design domains, actions, methods, and technologies;
algorithmic and system design, structural and logic design, transistor-level design,
layout design, verification methods, design management tools.
UNIT - II: Combinatorial Optimization
Unit-size placement problem, backtracking and branch-and-bound, dynamic
programming, integer linear programming, local search, simulated annealing, tabu
search, genetic algorithms.
UNIT - III: Layout Optimization
Design rules, symbolic layout, problem formulation, algorithms for constraint-
graph compaction, placement and partitioning-circuit representation, wire length
estimation, types of placement problem, placement algorithms, partitioning.
UNIT - IV: Floor planning and Routing
Floor planning-concepts, shape functions and floorplan sizing, routing-types of
local routing problems, area routing, channel routing, introduction to global routing,
algorithms for global routing.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 139

UNIT - V: Simulation
VLSI simulation, Gate-level modelling and simulation, switch-level modelling and
simulation.
UNIT - VI: Logic Synthesis
Introduction to combinational logic synthesis, binary-decision diagrams, two-level
logic synthesis, High-level synthesis-hardware models, internal representation of
input algorithm, allocation, assignment, and scheduling, scheduling algorithms.
Text Book
1. S.H.Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley &
Sons,2002.
Reference Books
1. N.A. Sherwani, “Algorithms for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2002.
2. Sadiq M. Sait, Habib Youssef, “VLSI Physical Design Automation: Theory
and Practice”, World Scientific 1999.
3. Steven M.Rubin, “Computer Aids for VLSI Design”, Addison Wesley Publishing
1987.
4. Prof. V. Kamakoti and Prof.Shankar Balachandran, “CAD for VLSI Design I”,
NPTEL Web Course, IIT Madras.
5. Prof. V. Kamakoti and Prof.Shankar Balachandran, “CAD for VLSI Design II”,
NPTEL Web Course, IIT Madras.
6. Coursera, “VLSI CAD Part I : Logic”, Online course.
(https://www.coursera.org/learn/vlsi-cad-logic)
7. Coursera, “VLSI CAD Part II : Layout”, Online course.
(https://www.coursera.org/learn/vlsi-cad-layout)
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 140

Professional Elective - I
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarized with the concepts of computer components, instruction set,
addressing modes and computer arithmetic.
• To impart the implementation of control unit, memory organization and various
I/O data transfer schemes.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• learn the basic structure and operations performed by the components of a
digital computer.
• know the concepts of micro-programming, micro code sequencing and
pipelining techniques.
• differentiate the hierarchical memory system including cache, virtual memories
and instruction level parallelism.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Computer System
Computer components, computer function, interconnection structures, bus
interconnection, integer representation, floating point representation.
UNIT - II: Central Processing Unit
Process Structure and Functions - Processor organization, register organization,
instruction cycle, instruction pipelining.
Instruction Sets: Characteristics and Addressing Modes – Machine instruction
characteristics, types of operands and operations, addressing, instruction format.
UNIT - III: Control Unit and Micro Programmed Control
Micro-operations, control of the processor, hardwired implementation, micro
programmed control – basic concepts, microinstruction sequencing,
microinstruction execution.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 141

UNIT - IV: Computer Arithmetic
Addition and subtraction, multiplication algorithms, division algorithms, floating
point arithmetic operations.
UNIT - V: Memory Organization
Memory hierarchy, main memory, auxiliary memory, associative memory, cache
memory, virtual memory, memory management hardware.
UNIT - VI: Input Output Organization & Introduction to ARM
Peripheral devices, input-output interface, asynchronous data transfer, modes of
transfer, priority interrupt, direct memory access.
Text Books
1. William Stallings, “Computer Organization and Architecture”, Pearson
Publications, 8th edition. (Unit I-III & ARM)
2. M. Morris Mano, “Computer System Architecture”, Pearson Publications, 3rd
edition. (Unit IV – VI)
Reference Books
1. Hamachar, Vranesic, “Computer Organization”, 5th edition, TMH.
2. V. Rajaraman, T. Radhakrishnan, “Computer Organization and Architecture”,
PHI Learning, 2007.
3. P.Pal Chaudhuri, “Computer Organization and Design”, 3rd Edition, PHI
Learning.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 142

Professional Elective - I
COMPUTER AND COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce principles and functionality of layered network
• To familiarize with the ethical, legal, and social issues related to computer
networking.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the topology and architecture of a computer network.
• differentiate the OSI and TCP reference models.
• apply protocols to different layers of a network hierarchy.
• understand different datalink protocols.
• identify the routing algorithm for given user application.
• understand the applications of computer networks.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Network Models
LAN, MAN and WAN, network topologies, protocols and standards, The OSI/
ISO reference model- layers in the OSI model, TCP/IP protocol suite, addressing.
Switching - circuit-switched networks, datagram networks, virtual-circuit networks.
UNIT - II: Data Link Control
Framing, flow and error control, error detection and correction, Stop and wait
protocol, Go-back N, selective repeat, HDLC protocols.
UNIT - III: MAC Sub Layer
Random access protocols, IEEE 802.3-MAC sub layer, physical layer. IEEE
802.11 and Bluetooth.
UNIT - IV: Network Routing Algorithms
Routing algorithms- shortest path, flooding, distance vector, link state routing.
IPv4 addresses-address space, notation; IPV4, IPV6, transition from IPv4 to IPv6,
mapping logical to physical address, mapping physical to logical address.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 143

UNIT - V: Congestion Control and QoS
Congestion control- open loop and closed loop congestion control; Quality of
Service, techniques to improve QoS;
Transport Layer- UDP, TCP- services, features, segment, connection
management, flow control, error control, and congestion control.
UNIT - VI: Application Layer
Domain name system- domain name space, distribution of name space, DNS in
the internet, resolution; Electronic mail- architecture, user agent, message transfer
agent, message access agent; WWW and HTTP.
Text Books
1. Behrouz. A. Forouzan, “Data Communication and Networking”, 4th Edition,
Tata McGraw-hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Andrew .S. Tanenbaum, “Computer Networks”, 4th Edition PHI Learning Private
Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
Reference Books
1. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internets”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education Asia, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Houston. H. Carr and Charles. A. Snyder, “Data Communications and Network
security”, Tata McGraw-hill, New Delhi, 2007
3. Peterson. L and Davie. B, “Computer Networks”, Morgan Kauffmann, 2008.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 144

Professional Elective - I
BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the basics of biological concepts and relate it to engineering.
• To familiarize with physiology of cardio-vascular system, respiratory system
and the elements of Patient Care Monitoring.
• To impart the knowledge on the patient monitoring displays, diagnosis &
techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• know the concept of bio-medical engineering, evolution, age, development,
advancements and applications.
• get awareness on noval theory related to human body and various components.
• analyze the operation of measuring the cardio-vascular system by knowing
its inner organization, sensor and transducer theory & plethysmographical
concepts.
• learn the principles of respiration and respiratory therapy equipment.
• understand the fundamental principles & techniques of diagnosys and bio-
telemetry, monitors, recorders.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Bio-Medical Instrumentation
Man instrumentation system-introduction & components, physiological system
of the body, sources of bio-electric potentials, resting & action potentials,Electro-
Cardiogram(ECG),Electro-Encephalogram(EEG), Electro Myogram (EMG),envoked
responses.
UNIT - II: Electrodes & Transducers
Bio-potential electrodes, basic transducers-transduction principles, biochemical
transducers, active & passive transducers, transducers of bio-medical applications,
pulse sensors, respiration sensors.
UNIT - III: Cardio-Vascular System & Respiratory System Measurements

Electronics and Communication Engineering 145

The heart & cardiovascular system, Electro-Cardiography, blood pressure
measurement, measurement of blood flow & cardiac output, the physiology of the
respiratory system, tests & instrumentation for the mechanics of breathing,
respiratory therapy equipment.
UNIT - IV: Patient Care & Monitoring
Elements of intensive care monitoring, patient monitoring displays, diagnosis,
calibration & repair ability of patient monitoring equipment, organization of the
hospital for patient care monitoring, pace-makers, defibrillators.
UNIT - V: Diagnostic Techniques & Bio-Telemetry
Principles of ultrasonic measurement, Ultrasonic Imaging, Ultrasonic Diagnosis
X-Ray & Radio-Isotope Instrumentations CAT Scan, Emission Computerized
Tomography, MRI, Introduction & components of bio-telemetry system.
UNIT - VI: Monitors, Recorders & Shocking Hazards
Monitors, recorders, shock hazards & prevention, physiological effects & electrical
equipment, methods of accident prevention, isolated power distribution system.
Text Books
1. Onkar N. Pandey, Rakesh kumar, “Bio-Medical Electronics and
Instrumentation”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2007.
2. Cromewell, Wiebell, P.feiffer, “Biomedical instrumentation and measurements”,
Prentice-Hall, 1973.
Reference Books
1. Joseph J.Carr, John M.Brown, “Introduction to Bio-Medical Equipment
Technology”, Pearson Publications, 4th Edition.
2. Khandapur, “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, TMH, 2nd Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 146

Open Elective - II
GEOINFORMATICS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course objectives
• To introduce the basic concepts and principles of remote sensing.
• To familiarize with structure and function of Geographic Information Systems.
• To illustrate the multidisciplinary nature of Geospatial applications.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• relate the scientific theories to the behaviour of electromagnetic spectrum.
• distinguish between different types of satellites and identify appropriate remote
sensing data products for mapping, monitoring and management applications.
• interpret Satellite images and processed outputs for extracting relevant
information.
• structure the concept of a spatial decision support system in its analog and
digital forms.
• perform tasks related to building a GIS database with location, attribute and
meta-data.
• list and elaborate applications of Geoinformatics in various fields.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Electro-Magnetic Radiation (EMR), its interaction with Atmosphere & Earth
Definition of remote sensing and its components – Electromagnetic spectrum,
wavelength regions important to remote sensing, wave theory, particle theory,
Stefan-Boltzmann and Wien’s Displacement Law – Atmospheric scattering,
absorption, atmospheric windows, spectral signature concepts, typical spectral
reflective characteristics of water, vegetation and soil.
UNIT - II: Platforms and Sensors
Types of platforms, orbit types, Sun-synchronous and Geosynchronous – Passive
and Active sensors, resolution concept, payload description of important Earth
Resources and Meteorological satellites – Airborne and Space-borne TIR (Thermal
Infrared Radiation) and microwave sensors.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 147

UNIT - III: Image Interpretation and Analysis
Types of Data Products – types of image interpretation, basic elements of image
interpretation, visual interpretation keys – Digital Image Processing, pre-
processing, image enhancement techniques – multispectral image classification,
supervised and unsupervised
UNIT - IV: Geographic Information System
Introduction to Maps, definitions, map projections, types of map projections,
map analysis – GIS definition, basic components of GIS, standard GIS software’s
– Data types, spatial and non-spatial (attribute) data – measurement scales –
Data Base Management Systems(DBMS).
UNIT - V: Data Entry, Storage and Analysis
Data models, vector and raster data – data compression – data input by digitisation
and scanning – attribute data analysis – integrated data analysis – modelling in
GIS for scenario analysis and planning.
UNIT - VI: RS and GIS Applications
Land cover and land use, agriculture, forestry, urban applications, hydrology, flood
zone delineation & mapping, groundwater prospects & recharge, reservoir storage
estimation.
Text Books
1. Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems, M.Anji Reddy, 4th
Edition, B.S.Publications.
2. Remote Sensing and GIS, Basudeb Bhatta, 2nd Edition, Oxford University
Press.
Reference Books
1. Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation, Lillesand, T.M, R.W. Kiefer and
J.W. Chipman , 7th Edition (2015), Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2. Remote Sensing Digital Image Analysis, Richard, John A, 5th Edition (2014),
Springer.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 148

Open Elective - II
ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To communicate the importance of institutional sanitation in maintaining public
health.
• To introduce the strategies for maintaining healthy living and working
environment.
• To delineate the role of environmental engineer in industrial environments.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the common communicable diseases and the solutions for controlling
them.
• suggest appropriate sanitation measures for water supply and sanitation in
un-sewered areas.
• describe the process of refuse disposal in rural areas.
• draw out the procedures adopted for maintaining hygiene in institutional
buildings.
• list out the occupational comfort parameters to be considered for designing
built environment.
• introduce the notion of occupational health, safety and the related management
approaches.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Epidemics, Epizootics
Origin and spread of Communicable diseases like Cholera, Smallpox, Tuberculosis,
Malaria, Filaria, and Plague, common methods (nose, throat, intestinal discharges)
– Role of Public Health Engineering in the preventive aspects of the above diseases
– Role of vectors in transmitting diseases and Rodent control methods.
UNIT - II: Rural water supply and Sanitation
Sanitary protection of wells, springs, economic methods of treatment – Excreta
disposal systems – Types of sanitary privies.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 149

UNIT - III:Refuse Sanitation
Quality and quantity of garbage, rubbish, ashes, street sweepings, night soil;
methods of conveyance and sanitary disposal methods, latest technologies
adopted to dispose off the solid wastes.
UNIT - IV: Food Hygiene and Sanitation
Milk and milk products, sanitary maintenance of catering, establishment, measures
– Sanitary requirements and maintenance of the public utility services like schools,
hospitals, offices and in other public buildings.
UNIT - V:Ventilation, Air Conditioning And Light
Composition of ambient air, air pollutants, bacteria, odours – Effective Temperature
– Comfort standards of ventilation, air interchange, natural ventilation, artificial
ventilation, air conditioning – Measurement of light, illumination standards, natural
lighting, artificial lighting.
UNIT - VI: Occupational Health and Safety
Occupational hazards in public buildings, schools, hospitals, eating
establishments, swimming pools – Cleanliness and maintenance of comfort –
Industrial plant sanitation – OHSAS 18001 and the WELL Building Standard and
rating for built environment.
Text Books
1. Municipal and Rural Sanitation, Victor M.Ehlers, Ernest W. Steel, 6th Edition,
McGraw Hill
2. Environmental Sanitation, Joseph A. Salvato, Nelson L. Nemerow, Franklin
J. Agardy , 5th Edition, John Wiley and Sons
3. OHSAS 18001 Manual
4. WELL Rating System Manual
Reference Books
1. Integrated Solid Waste Management, George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen,
Samuel A Vigil,McGraw Hill.
2. Not in my backyard – Solid Waste Management in Indian Cities, Sunita
Narain, Jain Book Agency.
3. National Building Code of India, Bureau of Indian Standards.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 150

Open Elective - II
MODELING AND SIMULATION OF ENGINEERING SYSTEMS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with programming skills using basic MATLAB and its associated
tool boxes.
• To impart knowledge on building SIMULINK and Graphical user interface.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop MATLAB programme for the solution of engineering system.
• build a SIMULINK model and GUI to simulate engineering system and asses
its performance.
• solve and visualize the dynamic performance of engineering systems through
MATLAB tool boxes.
• compute and analyse the data of a physical system using advanced
programming methods in MATLAB.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Variables, scripts, and operations
Getting Started, Scripts, Making Variables, Manipulating Variables, Basic Plotting
UNIT - II: Visualization and programming
Functions, Flow Control, Line Plots, Image/Surface Plots, Vectorization
UNIT - III: Solving equations and curve fitting
Linear Algebra, Polynomials, Optimization, Differentiation/Integration, Differential
Equations
UNIT - IV: Advanced methods
Probability and Statistics, Data Structures, Images and Animation, Debugging,
Online Resources
UNIT - V: Symbolics, Simulink®, file I/O, building GUIs
Symbolic Math, Simulink, File I/O, Graphical User Interfaces
UNIT - VI:
Examples on statistics, optimization, plots.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 151

Text Books
1. “Getting started with MATLAB” by Rudra pratap, Oxford University, 2002.
2. MATLAB and SIMULINK for Engineers by Agam Kumar Tyagi, OUP 2011
Reference Books
1. Spencer, R.L. and Ware, M (2008), Introduction to MATLAB, Brigham Young
Unviersity, available online, accessed, 7, 2008.
2. David F.Griffiths, October (2012) “An introduction to MATLAB” the Unviersity
of Dundee, available online, Acessed, October 2012.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 152

Open Elective - II
POWER SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the working of power plants in power generation and layout of
substations.
• To familiarize with the concepts of corona, insulators and sag in overhead
lines.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe the operation of thermal power station.
• describe the operation of nuclear and hydel power plants.
• distinguish various bus bar arrangements in substation
• analyze the phenomenon of corona.
• determine the sag in over head lines
Course Content
UNIT - I: Thermal Power Stations
Single line diagram of Thermal Power Station showing paths of coal, steam, water,
air, ash and flue gasses-Brief description of TPS components: Economizers,
Boilers, super heaters, Turbines ,condensers, chimney and cooling towers.
UNIT - II: Nuclear Power Stations
Working principle, Nuclear fuels. Nuclear reactor Components: Moderators, Control
roads, Reflectors and Coolants. Types of Nuclear reactors and brief description of
PWR, BWR and FBR.
UNIT - III: Hydal power stations
Selection of site, block diagram approach of hydro electric power plant and
classification of pumped storage power plants.
UNIT - IV: Air insulated substations
Equipments used in substations, Classification of substations: - Indoor & Outdoor
substations: Single line diagram of substation. Bus bar arrangements and their
classification.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 153

UNIT - V : Overhead Line Insulators and Corona
Types of Insulators, String efficiency and methods for improving string efficiency,
Corona - Description of the phenomenon, factors affecting corona, critical voltages
and power loss.
UNIT - VI: Sag and Tension Calculations
Sag and Tension calculations with equal and unequal heights of towers, effect of
Wind and Ice on weight of Conductor, Stringing chart and sag template and its
applications.
Text Books
1. A Text Book on Power System Engineering by M.L.Soni, P.V.Gupta,
U.S.Bhatnagar and A.Chakrabarti, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Pvt. Ltd., 1999.
Reference Books
1. Principles of Power Systems by V.K Mehta and Rohit Mehta S.Chand&
Company Ltd.New Delhi 2004.
2. Electrical Power Systems by C.L.Wadhawa New age International (P) Limited,
Publishers 1997.
3. Electrical Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution by S.N.Singh.,
PHI, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 154

Open Elective - II
ELEMENTS OF MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the principles of mechanical power transmission elements
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Identify suitable shaft couplings for a given application.
• describe various transmission elements like belts, ropes and chain drives.
• Explain different thread profiles and applications of power screws
• explain the working of various gears, gear trains and gear box.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Shaft Couplings
Shaft couplings: Rigid couplings – Muff, split muff and flange couplings, Flexible
coupling-Modified Flange coupling
UNIT - II: Belt Drives
Flat Belts: Introduction, Selection of a Belt Drive, Types of Belt Drives, Length of
Belts, Materials, Belt Joints, Types of Flat Belt Drives, Power transmitted.
UNIT - III: V-Belt, Rope Drives & Chain Drives
V-belts: Introduction, Types of V-belts, Ratio of Driving Tensions for V-belt, Power
transmitted.
Rope Drives: Introduction, Classification of rope drives, Power transmitted
Chain drives: Introduction, Chain drives, Polygonal effect, Selection of roller chains,
length of chain.
UNIT - IV: Power Screws
Forms of Threads, Multi-start Threads, Right Hand and Left Hand Threads, nut,
compound screw, differential screw
UNIT - V: Gears and Gear trains
Types, terminology, materials, law of gearing, velocity of sliding, forms of teeth,
path of contact, arc of contact, interference, Gear Trains - Types, differential of an
automobile.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 155

UNIT - VI: Gearbox
Introduction, types, constant mesh gearbox, sliding type gear box, single and
multi stage gear box
Text Books
1. Design of machine elements by Bhandari, Tata McGraw Hill book Co.3rd
Edition,2010.
2. Machine Design by P.C. Sharma & D.K. Agarwal. 4th Edition-
1996.S.K.Kataria & Sons
Reference Book
1. Design of Machine Elements by Sharma & Purohit ,PHI, 10th Edition,2011.
2. Design of Machine Elements by Kannaiah.5th Edition,1999.Scitech
Publication.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 156

Open Elective - II
MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To provide knowledge on materials handling equipment.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the basic concepts of material handling equipments.
• illustrate the working principle of conveyors, industrial trucks, hoppers, hoists
and cranes.
UNIT - I: Introduction
Types of industrial transport – classification and characteristics of materials –
classification and selection of materials handling.
UNIT - II: Conveyor Equipment
Classification of conveyors – description and uses of belt – conveyors – apron
conveyors -Roller conveyors – water – screw conveyors – pneumatic and hydraulic
conveyors, Computer controlled conveyor system.
UNIT - III: Industrial Trucks
Industrial trucks – main types – purpose of hand trucks – tractors and trailers –
self propelled trucks – fork trucks , Automated guided vehicles.
UNIT - IV: Auxiliary Equipment
Hoppers and gates – uses, auxiliary equipment – feeders – chutes – uses.
UNIT - V: Hoisting Appliances
types, description and uses of chain – ropes – types and description and purpose
of crane hooks – Grab buckets, lifts – excavators.
UNIT - VI: Cranes
Hand-propelled and electrically driven E.O.T overhead Traveling, cranes; Traveling
mechanisms of cantilever and monorail cranes.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 157

Text Books
1. Conveyor Equipment Manufacturer’s Association, “Belt conveyors for bulk
materials” 6th edition, The New CEMA Book.
2. Rudenko N., “Materials handling equipment”, Elnvee Publishers, 1970
3. Ishwar G Mulani and Mrs. Madhu I Mulani, “Engineering Science and
application design for belt conveyor”, Madhu I. Mulani, 2002.
Reference Books
1. Spivakovsy A.O. and Dyachkov V.K., “Conveying Machines, Volumes I and
II”, MIR Publishers, 1985.
2. Alexandrov, M., “Materials Handling Equipments”, MIR Publishers, 1981.
3. Boltzharol, A.,”Materials Handling Handbook”, The Ronald press company
1958.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 158

Open Elective - II
AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the electronic systems inside an automotive vehicle.
• To introduce the concepts of advanced safety systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• learn the fundamentals of automotive technology.
• describe the operation of microcomputer systems.
• acquire knowledge in automotive sensors and control systems.
• develop communications & navigation/routing in automotive vehicles.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Automotive Fundamentals
Use of electronics in the automobile, evolution of automotive electronics, the
automobile physical configuration, evolution of electronics in the automobile, survey
of major automotive systems, engine control or electronic control unit, ignition
system.
UNIT - II: Automotive Micro-Computer System
Binary number system, binary counters, Microcomputer fundamentals-digital versus
analog computers, basic computer block diagram, microcomputer operations,
CPU registers, accumulator registers, condition code register-branching;
microprocessor architecture, memory-ROM, RAM; I/O parallel interface, digital
to analog converter and analog to digital converters with block diagram.
UNIT - III: Basics of Electronics Engine Control
Motivation for electronic engine control, exhaust emissions, fuel economy, concept
of an electronic engine control system, engine functions and control, electronic
fuel control configuration, electronic ignition with sensors.
UNIT - IV: Sensors and Actuators
Introduction; basic sensor arrangement; types of sensors such as oxygen sensors,
crank angle position sensors, fuel metering/vehicle speed sensors and detonation
sensors, altitude sensors, flow sensors, throttle position sensors, solenoids,

Electronics and Communication Engineering 159

stepper motors, actuators – fuel metering actuator, fuel injector, and ignition
actuator.
UNIT - V: Electronic Vehicle Management System
Cruise control system, antilock braking system, electronic suspension system,
electronic steering control, and transmission control, safety: air bags, collision
avoidance radar warning system with block diagram, low tire pressure warning
system, advanced cruise control system.
UNIT - VI: Automotive Instrumentation System
Speech synthesis, sensor multiplexing, control signal multiplexing with block
diagram, fibre optics inside the car, automotive internal navigation system, GPS
navigation system, voice recognition cell phone dialling.
Text Books
1. William B. Ribbens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, SAMS/Elsevier
Publishing, 6th Edition. (UNIT I to VI).
2. Robert Bosch Gambh, “Automotive Electrics Automotive Electronics Systems
and Components”, John Wiley& Sons Ltd., 5th edition, 2007.
Reference Books
1. Ronald K Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-
Hill, 1999.
2. G. Meyer, J. Valldorf and W. Gessner, “Advanced Microsystems for Automotive
Applications”, Springer, 2009.
3. Robert Bosch, “Automotive Hand Book”, SAE, 5th Edition, 2000.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 160

Open Elective - II
INTRODUCTION TO MEMS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce lithography principles, mechanical sensors and actuators.
• To make it known the thermal sensors and actuators, magnetic sensors and
actuators.
• To present formally micro fluidic systems and chemical and bio medical micro
systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• define MEMS, lithography methods, sensors and actuators.
• describe the principles of MOEMS technology and its applications.
• elucidate different magnetic sensing and detection for MEMS.
• apply sensing principles and mechanisms the chemical and bio medical
micro systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Definition of MEMS, MEMS history and development, micro machining, lithography
principles & methods, structural and sacrificial materials, thin film deposition,
impurity doping, etching, surface micro machining, wafer bonding, LIGA.
Mechanical Sensors and Actuators: Principles of sensing and actuation: beam
and cantilever, capacitive, piezo electric, strain, pressure, flow, pressure
measurement by micro phone, MEMS gyroscopes, shear mode piezo actuator,
gripping piezo actuator, Inchworm technology.
UNIT - II: Thermal Sensors and Actuators
Thermal energy basics and heat transfer processes, thermistors, thermo devices,
thermo couple, micro machined thermo couple probe, Peltier effect heat pumps,
thermal flow sensors, micro hot plate gas sensors, MEMS thermo vessels, pyro
electricity, shape memory alloys (SMA), U-shaped horizontal and vertical electro
thermal actuator, thermally activated MEMS relay, micro spring thermal actuator,
data storage cantilever.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 161

UNIT - III: Micro-Opto-Electro Mechanical Systems
Principle of MOEMS technology, properties of light, light modulators, beam splitter,
micro lens, micro mirrors, digital micro mirror device (DMD), light detectors, grating
light valve (GLV), optical switch, wave guide and tuning, shear stress measurement.
UNIT - IV: Magnetic Sensors and Actuators
Magnetic materials for MEMS and properties, magnetic sensing and detection,
magneto resistive sensor, more on hall effect, magneto diodes, magneto transistor,
MEMS magnetic sensor, pressure sensor utilizing MOKE, mag MEMS actuators,
by directional micro actuator, feedback circuit integrated magnetic actuator, large
force reluctance actuator, magnetic probe based storage device.
UNIT - V: Micro Fluidic Systems
Applications, considerations on micro scale fluid, fluid actuation methods,
dielectrophoresis (DEP), electro wetting, electro thermal flow, thermo capillary
effect, electro osmosis flow, optoelectro wetting (OEW), tuning using micro fluidics,
typical micro fluidic channel, microfluid dispenser, micro needle, molecular gate,
micro pumps. RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) MEMS: RF based communication
systems, RF MEMS, MEMS inductors, varactors, tuner/filter, resonator, clarification
of tuner, filter, resonator, MEMS switches, phase shifter.
UNIT - VI: Chemical and Bio Medical Micro Systems
Sensing mechanism & principle, membrane-transducer materials, chem.-lab-on-
a-chip (CLOC) chemoresistors, chemocapacitors, chemotransistors, electronic
nose (E-nose), mass sensitive chemosensors, fluroscence detection, calorimetric
spectroscopy.
Text Book
1. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik “MEMS”, TMH Publishing co.
Reference Books
1. Chang Liu “Foundation of MEMS”, Prentice Hall Ltd.
2. Sergey Edwrd Lyshevski “MEMS and NEMS”, CRC Press, Indian Edition.
3. Tai-Ran Hsu “MEMS and Micro Systems: Design and Manufacture”, TMH
Publishers.
4. Richard A Layton, Thomas M Adams “Introductory MEMS”, Springer
International Publishers.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 162

Open Elective - II
DATA SCIENCE
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with statistical methods to analyze data using classification,
graphical and computational methods
• To introduce Data Wrangling approaches and descriptive analytics on large
data sets.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply statistical methods to data for inferences.
• analyze data using Classification, Graphical and computational methods.
• describe Data Wrangling approaches.
• perform descriptive analytics over massive data.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction and Linear Regression
Overview of random variables and distributions, statistical learning, assessing
model accuracy, descriptive statistics, dependent and independent events
Linear Regression: Simple and multiple linear regressions, comparison of linear
regression with k-nearest neighbors.
UNIT - II: Hypothesis Testing
Simple Hypothesis testing, student’s t-test, paired t and u test, correlation and
covariance, tests for association.
UNIT - III: Graphical Analysis
Histograms and frequency polygons, box-plots, quartiles, scatter plots, heat maps.
UNIT - IV: Computational Methods
Programming for basic computational methods such as Eigen values and Eigen
vectors, sparse matrices, QR and SVD.
UNIT - V: Data Wrangling
Data acquisition, data formats, imputation, the split-apply-combine paradigm.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 163

UNIT - VI: Descriptive Analytics
Data warehousing and OLAP, data summarization, data de-duplication, data
visualization using CUBEs.
Text Book
1. Gareth James, Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani, Daniela Witten, “An
Introduction to Statistical Learning with Applications in R”.
Reference Book
1. Mark Gardener, “Beginning R The statistical Programming Language”, Wiley.
Web link
www.statlearning.com
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 164

Open Elective - II
VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce key elements of virtual Reality with the components in VR
systems.
• To gain knowledge of various input and output devices required for interacting
in virtual world and augmented reality.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify basic elements of virtual reality
• describe various input and output devices required for VR experience
• classify human factors that affect VR experience
• distinguish augmented reality from virtual reality
• express the object position and orientation in virtual space.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
The three I’s of virtual reality, commercial VR technology and the five classic
components of a VR system.
UNIT - II: Input Devices
Trackers, Navigation, and Gesture Interfaces: Three-dimensional position trackers,
navigation and manipulation, interfaces and gesture interfaces.
UNIT - III: Output Devices
Graphics displays, sound displays and haptic feedback.
UNIT - IV: Human Factors
Methodology and terminology, user performance studies, VR health and safety
issues. Applications: Medical applications, military applications, robotics
applications.
UNIT - V: Augmented Reality
Introduction - head-up displays, helmet-mounted sights and displays, smart
glasses and augmenting displays

Electronics and Communication Engineering 165

UNIT - VI: Understanding Virtual Space
Visual and object space, defining position and orientation in three dimensions.
Text Books
1. John Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, Pearson Education.
2. Steve Aukstakalnis, “Practical Augmented Reality: A Guide to the
Technologies, Applications, and Human Factors for AR and VR”, Addison-
Wesley.
Reference Books
1. Brett S. Martin, “Virtual Reality”, Norwood House Press, 2017.
2. Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Augmented Reality: Concepts and
Applications”, Newnes.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 166

Open Elective - II
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the opportunities for open source software in the global market.
• To familiarize with different steps in implementing the open source.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• state the need and applications of open source software.
• compare and Contrast between Open source and commercial software
• demonstrate LINUX operating systems concepts.
• create database in MYSQL and perform operations on it.
• design and develop a web application using PHP.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Introduction to Open sources, Need of Open Sources, Advantages of Open Sources
and Application of Open Sources.
UNIT - II: LINUX
LINUX Introduction, General Overview, Kernel Mode and user mode , Process,
Advanced Concepts - Personalities, Cloning, Signals.
UNIT - III: Open Source Programming Languages
PHP- Introduction, Programming in web environment, variables, constants, data
types, operators Statements, Arrays.
UNIT - IV: Introduction to MySQL
MySQL: Introduction, Setting up account, Starting, terminating and writing your
own SQL programs, Record selection Technology, Working with strings, Date
and Time.
UNIT - V: Working with MySQL
Sorting Query Results, Generating Summary, Working with metadata, Using
sequences.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 167

UNIT - VI: Advanced PHP
OOP – String Manipulation, PHP and SQL database, PHP Connectivity, Debugging
and error handling.
Text Books
1. Remy Card, Eric Dumas and Frank Mevel, “The Linux Kernel Book”,
WileyPublications,2003.
2. Steve Suchring, “MySQL Bible”, John Wiley, 2002
Reference Books
1. RasmusLerdorf and Levin Tatroe, “Programming PHP”, O’Reilly, 2002.
2. Steven Holzner, “PHP: The Complete Reference”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, Indian Reprint 2009.
3. VikramVaswani, “MYSQL: The Complete Reference”, 2nd Edition, TataMcGraw
–Hill Publishing Company Limited, Indian Reprint 2009.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 168

Open Elective - II
CYBER LAWS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To expose the need of cyber laws to prosecute cybercrimes in the society.
• To familiarize with Licensing Issues Authorities for Digital Signatures.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline the pros and cons of Internet.
• operate on confidential data in a precautious manner.
• discuss Criminal Justice in India and its Implications.
• interpret the Cyber Consumers under the consumer Protection Act.
• devise the legal framework for Confidential Information.
• determine the e-commerce issues for copyright protection and defend personal
data from being hacked.
Course Content
UNIT - I: The IT Act, 2000- A Critique
Crimes in this Millennium, Section 80 of the IT Act, 2000 – A Weapon or a
Farce?,Forgetting the Line between Cognizable and Non - Cognizable Officers,
Arrest for”About to Commit” an Offence Under the IT Act, A Tribute to Darco,
Arrest But NoPunishment.
UNIT - II: Cyber Crime and Criminal Justice
Penalties, Adjudication and Appeals Under the IT Act, 2000: Concept of CyberCrime
and the IT Act, 2000, Hacking, Teenage Web Vandals, Cyber fraud andCyber
Cheating, Virus on Internet Deformation, Harassment and E- mail Abuse
UNIT - III: Cyber Criminality Strategies and Trends
Network Service Providers, Jurisdiction and CyberCrimes, Nature of Cyber
Criminality Strategies to Tackle Cyber Crime and Trends,Criminal Justice in India
and Implications.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 169

UNIT - IV: Digital Signatures, Certifying Authorities and e-Governance
Introduction to Digital Signatures, Certifying Authorities and Liability in the Eventof
Digital Signature compromise, E - Governance in the India. A Warming toBabudom,
Are Cyber Consumers Covered under the Consumer Protection, Goodsand
Services, Consumer Complaint Defect in Goods and Deficiency in
ServicesRestrictive and Unfair Trade Practices
UNIT - V: Traditional Computer Crime
Early Hacker and Theft of Components Traditional problems, Recognizing
andDefining Computer Crime, Phreakers: Yesterday’s Hackers, Hacking,
Computersas Commodities, Theft of intellectual Property.
UNIT - VI: Web Based Criminal Activity
Interference with Lawful Use of Computers, Malware, DoS (Denial of Service)
andDDoS (Distributed Denial of Service) Attacks, Spam ,Ransomware and
Kidnappingof Information, Theft of Information, Data Manipulation, and Web
EncroachmentOnline Gambling Online Fraud, Securities Fraud and stock
Manipulation, Ancillarycrimes
Text Books
1. Vivek Sood, “ Cyber Law Simplefied”, Tata McGraw Hill.
2. Marjie T. Britz, “Computer Forensics and Cyber Crime”, Pearson
Reference Book
1. Cyber Laws Texts and Cases, Ferrera, CENGAGE.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 170

Open Elective - II
QUALITY, RELIABILITY AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To equip students with basic practical skills with sufficient theory.
• To understand the principles involved in the application area.
• To develop the power of systematic thinking and reasoning, practical approach
and exposition in the students.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Construct the control charts to understand whether the process is under control.
• Solve various problems regarding quality and life testing of a given product(s).
• Form the real life situations/practical problems into LPP.
• Apply various algorithms like graphical method, simplex method, Charne’s
method, Hungarian method etc.
• Find the optimal Transportation cost and optimal assignment policy.
• Appreciate Travelling Salesman Problem.
• Identify the job sequence to the given situation and to find the total elapsed time.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Statistical Process Control
Importance of Statistical Quality Control (SQC) in industry, Statistical basis of
Shewart Control Charts, Construction of control charts for variables and attributes
(with fixed and varying sample sizes), Interdependence of control charts, Natural
tolerance limits and specification limits, process capability index, concept of Six
sigma and its importance.
UNIT - II: Accepting Sampling Plans
Producer’s Risk and Consumer’s Risk, Concept of AQL and LTPD. Single and Double
Sampling plans for attributes and derivation of their OC and ASN functions, design of
single and double sampling plans for attributes using Binomial distribution.
UNIT - III: Reliability
Introduction, Hazard function, Exponential distribution as life model, its memory less
property, Reliability function and its estimation, concepts of censoring and truncation,
system reliability - series, parallel and k out of N systems and their reliabilities.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 171

UNIT - IV: Linear Programming
Meaning and scope of OR, Convex sets and their properties. Definition – general
LPP, formulation of LPP, solution of LPP by Graphical method, Simplex algorithm,
concept of degeneracy and resolving it, concept of duality , duality as LPP, Dual-
Primal relationships.
UNIT - V: Transportation Problem
Definition of Transportation problem(TP) – TP as a special case of LPP, Feasible
solutions by North-west corner rule, Matrix minima method, Vogel’s Approximation
method. Optimal solution through MODI tableau method for balanced and
unbalanced TPs. Degenercy in TP and resolving it.
UNIT - VI: Assignment and Sequencing Promlems
Description of Assignment problem(AP) and its variations, AP as a special case
of TP and LPP (both balanced and unbalanced cases), Optimum solution by
Hungarian method. Travelling salesman problem.
Introduction to Sequencing problem, optimum sequence of N jobs on two an three
machines (without passing).
Text Books
1. Kanti Swaroop, P. K. Gupta and Man Mohan: Operations Research, Sultan
Chand Company.
2. L. S. Srinath: Reliability Engineering, Affiliated East-West Press.
3. Parimal Mukhopadhyay: Applied Statistics, New Central Book Agency.
4. Gass: Linear Programming, Mc Graw Hill.
5. R. C. Gupta: Statistical Quality Control.
Reference Books
1. V. K. Kapoor and S. C. Gupta: Fundamentals of Applied Statistics, Sultan Chand.
2. S. K. Sinha: Reliabilty and Life Testing
3. S. M. Ross: Probability Models, Harcourt India Pvt. Ltd.
4. D. C. Montgomory: Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, Wiley.
5. Hadly: Linear Programming, Addison – Wiley.
6. Taha: Operation Research: An Introduction, Mac Millan.
7. Wayne L. Wiston: Operations Research, Thomson, India edition, 4th Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 172

 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS APPLICATIONS LAB
III Year – I Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
To make the students familiarize with the
• design, conduct of experiments, and interpreting results of various op-amp
based circuits.
• design, conduct of experiments, and interpreting results of 555 timer
multivibrators.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• perform experiment, take observations, present the results in proper form,
analyze and interpret results, draw conclusions by correlating with theory.
• measure the parameters of IC 741 op-amp.
• design, hardware implement, and test op-amp adder, integrator, Schmitt
trigger, square and triangular wave generators, low-pass, high-pass, and band-
pass active filters.
• design, hardware implement, and test monostable and astable mutivibrator
circuits using 555 timer.
• design, hardware implement, and test regulated power supply using 3-terminal
/ 723 IC regulators.
• verify the lock range and capture range of PLL IC 565, operation of weighted
resistor / R-2R digital to analog converters, and analog to digital convertors.
• make oral presentations and prepare written reports.
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of IC 741 op-amp characteristics.
2. Design, implement, and test adder and integrator using IC 741 op-amp.
3. Design, implement, and test comparator and schmitt trigger using IC 741
op-amp.
4. Design, implement, and test square and triangular wave generators using
IC 741 op-amp.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 173

 5. Design, implement, and test monostable and astable multivibrators using
IC 555 timer.
6. Design, implement, and test low-pass and high-pass active filters.
7. Design, implement, and test band-pass active filter.
8. Design, implement, and test regulated power supply using 3-terminal / 723
IC regulators.
9. Verify the lock range and capture range of PLL IC 565.
10. Verify the operation of weighted resistor / R-2R digital to analog converters.
11. Verify the operation of analog to digital converters.
12. Open-ended experiment.
Reference Books
1. D. Roy Choudhury and Shail B.Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age
International (p) Ltd, Second Edition, 2003.
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifier and Analog Integrated
Circuits”, TMH, Fourth Edition, 2011.
3. G.B.Clayton, “Operational Amplifiers”, Elsevier Science, Fifth Edition, 2003.
4. K.Radha Krishna Rao, “Analog ICs”, NPTEL Video Course.
5. Paul R.Gray, Paul J.Hurst, Stephen H.Lewis, and Robert G. Meyer, “Analysis
and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Fourth
Edition, 2001.
6. Ramakanth A. Gayakwad, “OP-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits”, PHI,
Fourth Edition, 2010.
7. Datasheets of linear ICs.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 174

 ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB
III Year – I Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the various analog and digital modulation schemes.
• To introduce the error detection and correction capabilities of linear block,
codes.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• verify the sampling process with different sampling rates.
• compare the operation of various analog and digital modulation schemes.
• distinguish Frequency Shift Keying and Differential Phase Shift Keying
techniques.
• test linear block encoders and decoders.
List of Experiments:(Minimum 10 experiments)
1. Analyze and test AM- Modulation and Demodulation
2. Power Analysis of AM and FM signals using Spectrum Analyzer
3. Sampling Theorem verification.
4. Analyze and test DSB-SC Modulation and Demodulation
5. Analyze and test Frequency modulation and Demodulation
6. Pulse code modulation and demodulation
7. Delta modulation and demodulation
8. Frequency shift keying
9. Differential phase shift keying
10. Amplitude shift keying
11. Linear block encoder and decoder.
12. Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis
13. Time Division multiplexing
14. Open ended experiment.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 175

Reference Books
1. Simon Haykin, “Digital Communications” John Wiley, 2005.
2. H. Taub and D. Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, TMH,
2003.
3. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley,
2005.
4. John Proakis, “Digital Communications”,TMH, 1983.
5. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Analog and Digital Communication”, Oxford reprint, 3rd
Edition, 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 176

Optional Elective - II
DATA WAREHOUSING AND DATA MINING
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce concepts of Data mining, data pre-processing and Data
warehousing.
• To familiarize with concepts of association rule mining, classification, clustering
techniques and algorithms.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline different types of databases used in data mining.
• apply pre-processing methods on raw data to make it ready for mining.
• illustrate the major concepts and operations of multi dimensional data models.
• analyze the performance of association rules mining algorithms for finding
frequent item sets from the large databases.
• simplify the data classification procedure by selecting appropriate
classification methods / algorithms.
• classify various clustering methods and algorithms on data sets to create
appropriate clusters.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Motivation and importance of data mining, types of data to be mined: relational
databases, data warehouses, transactional databases, advanced database
systems, data mining functionalities.
UNIT - II: Data Pre-processing
Major tasks in data pre-processing, data cleaning: missing values, noisy data;
data reduction : overview of data reduction strategies, principal components
analysis, attribute subset selection, histograms, sampling; data transformation:
data transformation strategies overview, data transformation by normalization.
UNIT - III: Data Warehousing and Online Analytical Processing
Data warehouse: Basic concepts, OLAP vs. OLTP; Data warehousing: A multi-
tiered architecture; Data warehouse modelling: Data cube and OLAP; Data cube:

Electronics and Communication Engineering 177

A multidimensional data model, star, snowflake and fact constellation schemas
for multidimensional data models, the role of concept hierarchies, typical OLAP
operations.
UNIT - IV: Mining Frequent Patterns, Associations, and Correlations
Basic concepts, frequent item sets, closed item sets and association rules,
frequent item set mining methods: apriori algorithm, generations association rules
form frequent item sets, a pattern- growth approach for mining frequent item sets.
UNIT - V: Classification
Basic concepts, what is classification, general approach to classification, decision
tree induction, attribute selection measures: information gain, Bayes classification
methods: Bayes theorem, Naive Bayesian classification.
UNIT - VI: Cluster Analysis
Introduction, overview of basic clustering methods, partitioning methods: k-means,
k-medoids; hierarchical methods: agglomerative versus divisive hierarchical
clustering, density based method : DBSCAN.
Text Book
1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber & Jian pei, “Data Mining Concepts and
Techniques”, 3rd edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher an imprint of Elsevier,.
Reference books
1. Pang-Ning Tan, Michael Steinbach, Vipin Kumar “Introduction to Data Mining”,
1st edition, Pearson,.
2. Margaret H Dunham, “Data Mining Introductory and Advanced Topics”, 1st
edition, Pearson Education.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 178

Optional Elective - II
MECHATRONICS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart knowledge on design of complex engineering systems using
sensors, actuators, controllers.
• To familiarize with the intelligent systems used in Mechatronics.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the elements of Mechatronic Systems
• select suitable sensors, actuators and controllers to meet specific
requirements
• draw a parallelism between crisp set operations and fuzzy set operations
through the use of characteristic and membership functions respectively.
Course Content
UNIT - I:
Introduction: Definition of Mechatronics, Mechatronics in manufacturing,
Products, and design. Comparison between Traditional and Mechatronics
approach, advantages and disadvantages of Mechatronics systems.
UNIT - II:
Sensors and Transducers: Types, displacement, position, proximity, velocity,
motion, force, acceleration, torque, fluid pressure, liquid flow, liquid level,
temperature, light sensors and micro sensors.
UNIT - III:
Review of fundamentals of electronics. Data conversion devices, signal processing
devices, relays, contactors and timers. Microprocessors, microcontrollers and
PLCs.
UNIT - IV:
Actuators: Drives: stepper motors, servo drives. Ball screws, linear motion
bearings, cams, systems controlled by camshafts, electronic cams, indexing
mechanisms, tool magazines, and transfer systems. Description of PID Controllers.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 179

UNIT - V:
Hydraulic systems: flow, pressure and direction control valves, actuators, and
supporting elements, hydraulic power packs, and pumps. Design of hydraulic
circuits.
Pneumatics: Production, distribution and conditioning of compressed air, system
components and graphic representations.
Electro hydraulic, Electro pneumatic and hydro pneumatic servo systems.
UNIT - VI:
Fuzzy Set Theory: Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets, Classical Relations and
Fuzzy Relations, Properties of membership function, Fuzzy extension principle,
Fuzzy Systems: fuzzification and defuzzification and fuzzy controllers.
Text Books
1. Bolton. W, “Mechatronics”, Addison Wesley, 4th Edition, New Delhi.
2. Dan Nesulescu, “Mechatronics”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education
3. Michael B. Histand and David G. Aliatore, “ Introduction to Mechatronics and
Measurement Systems”, McGraw-Hill
Reference Books
1. Devadas Shetty, Richard A Kolk, “Mechatronics System Design”,
2. B.P. Singh (2002), “Advanced Microprocessor and Microcontrollers” New Age
International Publisher.
3. S. Russell and P. Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd Ed,
Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. H.J.Zimmermann, Fuzzy Set Theory and Its Applications, 2nd Ed., Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 1996.
5. S.N. Sivanandam and S.N.Deepa, “Principles of Soft Computing” Second
Edition, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 180

Optional Elective - II
INTRODUCTION TO MEMS
III Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce lithography principles, mechanical sensors and actuators.
• To make it known the thermal sensors and actuators, magnetic sensors and
actuators.
• To present formally micro fluidic systems and chemical and bio medical micro
systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• define MEMS, lithography methods, sensors and actuators.
• describe the principles of MOEMS technology and its applications.
• elucidate different magnetic sensing and detection for MEMS.
• apply sensing principles and mechanisms the chemical and bio medical
micro systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Definition of MEMS, MEMS history and development, micro machining, lithography
principles & methods, structural and sacrificial materials, thin film deposition,
impurity doping, etching, surface micro machining, wafer bonding, LIGA.
Mechanical Sensors and Actuators: Principles of sensing and actuation: beam
and cantilever, capacitive, piezo electric, strain, pressure, flow, pressure
measurement by micro phone, MEMS gyroscopes, shear mode piezo actuator,
gripping piezo actuator, Inchworm technology.
UNIT - II: Thermal Sensors and Actuators
Thermal energy basics and heat transfer processes, thermistors, thermo devices,
thermo couple, micro machined thermo couple probe, Peltier effect heat pumps,
thermal flow sensors, micro hot plate gas sensors, MEMS thermo vessels, pyro
electricity, shape memory alloys (SMA), U-shaped horizontal and vertical electro
thermal actuator, thermally activated MEMS relay, micro spring thermal actuator,
data storage cantilever.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 181

UNIT - III: Micro-Opto-Electro Mechanical Systems
Principle of MOEMS technology, properties of light, light modulators, beam splitter,
micro lens, micro mirrors, digital micro mirror device (DMD), light detectors, grating
light valve (GLV), optical switch, wave guide and tuning, shear stress measurement.
UNIT - IV: Magnetic Sensors and Actuators
Magnetic materials for MEMS and properties, magnetic sensing and detection,
magneto resistive sensor, more on hall effect, magneto diodes, magneto transistor,
MEMS magnetic sensor, pressure sensor utilizing MOKE, mag MEMS actuators,
by directional micro actuator, feedback circuit integrated magnetic actuator, large
force reluctance actuator, magnetic probe based storage device.
UNIT - V: Micro Fluidic Systems
Applications, considerations on micro scale fluid, fluid actuation methods,
dielectrophoresis (DEP), electro wetting, electro thermal flow, thermo capillary
effect, electro osmosis flow, optoelectro wetting (OEW), tuning using micro fluidics,
typical micro fluidic channel, microfluid dispenser, micro needle, molecular gate,
micro pumps. RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) MEMS: RF based communication
systems, RF MEMS, MEMS inductors, varactors, tuner/filter, resonator, clarification
of tuner, filter, resonator, MEMS switches, phase shifter.
UNIT - VI: Chemical and Bio Medical Micro Systems
Sensing mechanism & principle, membrane-transducer materials, chem.-lab-on-
a-chip (CLOC) chemoresistors, chemocapacitors, chemotransistors, electronic
nose (E-nose), mass sensitive chemosensors, fluroscence detection, calorimetric
spectroscopy.
Text Book
1. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik “MEMS”, TMH Publishing co.
Reference Books
1. Chang Liu “Foundation of MEMS”, Prentice Hall Ltd.
2. Sergey Edwrd Lyshevski “MEMS and NEMS”, CRC Press, Indian Edition.
3. Tai-Ran Hsu “MEMS and Micro Systems: Design and Manufacture”, TMH
Publishers.
4. Richard A Layton, Thomas M Adams “Introductory MEMS”, Springer
International Publishers.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 182

 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60

Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the basic concepts of discrete time signals and systems
• To introduce the concepts of Z-transform and frequency domain representation
of discrete time signals.
• To familiarize with the designing of digital filters and their realization.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze and process signals in the discrete domain.
• determine the Fourier series coefficients and z-transform of discrete time
signals.
• apply the various transform techniques on discrete time signals.
• design digital filters (IIR and FIR) for a given specifications.
• apply various windowing techniques in the design of FIR filter.
• realize digital filters (IIR and FIR).
Course Content
UNIT - I: Discrete Time Signals and Systems
Discrete time signals- classification, elementary discrete time signals, basic
operations on sequences; discrete time systems-classification, discrete time linear
Time Invariant systems and their properties, convolution sum.
UNIT - II: Z-Transform and Discrete Fourier Series
Z Transform of sequence, properties of ROC, properties of Z transform, inverse Z
transform- partial fraction method.
Discrete Fourier series: Fourier series for discrete time periodic signals, Fourier
Transform for discrete time non-periodic signals, energy density spectrum,
relationship of Fourier transform to Z transform, frequency response.
UNIT - III: Discrete Fourier Transform
Frequency sampling- Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), properties of DFT, linear
convolution of sequences using DFT, relationship between DFT and Z transform.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 183

UNIT - IV: Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT)
Fast Fourier Transform-Radix-2 decimation in time and in frequency FFT algorithms,
IDFT using FFT algorithms.
UNIT - V: Design of IIR Filters
Analog filter approximation-Butterworth and Chebyshev (Type-I) filters, design of
IIR filters from analog filters- Impulse Invariant technique, Bilinear transformation
UNIT - VI: Design of FIR Filters
Linear Phase FIR filters-frequency response, Fourier Series method of designing
FIR filter, design of FIR filters using windows (Rectangular, Bartlett, Hamming,
Hanning)
Realization of Digital Filters: Realization of IIR Filters- Direct form I, II; realization
of FIR filters- transversal structure, cascade realization
Text Books
1. John G. Proakis,Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications”, Pearson Education / PHI, 2013.
Reference Books
1. A.V.Oppenheim and R.W. Schaffer, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, PHI
2. Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, TATA McGraw Hill , 2006.
3. MH Hayes, “Digital Signal Processing”, Schaum’s Outline series,TATA Mc
Graw Hill, 2007.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 184

 CONTROL SYSTEMS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Tutorial :1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the basic concepts of control systems by developing
mathematical models for physical systems.
• To familiarize with the time domain behavior of linear control systems.
• To impart knowledge on analytical and graphical methods to quantify stability
of linear control systems.
• To introduce concepts on the state variable theory as a pre-requisite to
advance control systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop mathematical models for physical systems.
• employ the time domain analysis to quantify the performance of linear control
systems and specify suitable controllers.
• quantify time and frequency domain specifications to determine stability
margins.
• apply state variable theory to determine the dynamic behavior of linear control
systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Concepts of control systems- open loop and closed loop control systems and
their differences- different examples of control systems- classification of control
systems, feed-back characteristics, effects of feedback. mathematical models –
differential equations, impulse response and transfer function.
UNIT - II: Control Systems Components
Transfer function of DC servo motor - AC servo motor- synchro transmitter and
receiver, block diagram representation of systems considering -block diagram
algebra – representation by signal flow graph - reduction is using Mason’s gain
formula.
UNIT - III: Time Response Analysis
Standard test signals - time response of first order systems – characteristic
equation of feedback control systems, transient response of second order systems

Electronics and Communication Engineering 185

- time domain specifications – steady state response - steady state errors and
error constants, introduction to P, PI, PD and PID controllers.
UNIT - IV: Stability Analysis in S-Domain
The concept of stability – Routh’s stability criterion – qualitative stability and
conditional stability – limitations of Routh’s stability.
Root Locus Technique: The root locus concept - construction of root loci –
effects of adding poles and zeros to G(s) H(s) on the root loci.
UNIT - V: Frequency Response Analysis
Introduction, frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-determination of
frequency domain specifications and transfer function from the Bode diagram-
phase margin and gain margin-stability analysis from Bode plots. polar plots-
Nyquist plots- stability analysis.
UNIT - VI: State Space Analysis of Continuous Systems
Concept of state, state variables and state model, derivation of state models from
physical systems (Electrical), solving the time invariant state equations- state
transition matrix and its properties – concepts of controllability and observability.
Text Books
1. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal , “Control Systems Engineering”, New Age
International Limited Publishers, 2nd edition.
2. B.C.Kuo , “Automatic control systems”, john wiley and son’s 8th edition,
2003.
Reference Books
1. K.Ogata , “Modern control engineering “, prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 5th
Edition.
2. N.K.Sinha, “Control system “, New Age International (p) Limited Publishers,
3rd Edition, 1998.
3. Norman S-Nice, “Control system engineering”, Willey Studio Edition, 4th
Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 186

MICROPROCESSORS, MICROCONTROLLERS AND APPLICATIONS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Practical : 1 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the architecture of 8086 processor & 8051 microcontroller
and assembly language programming.
• To emphasize with the concepts of I/O Interfacing with 8086 and 8051.
• To introduce the fundamentals of ARM.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• recall and apply a basic concept of digital fundamentals to Microprocessor
based personal computer system.
• identify a detailed s/w & h/w structure of the microprocessor and
microcontroller
• illustrate how the different peripherals (8255) are interfaced with
Microprocessor
• interface various I/O devices to the 8051 microcontroller.
• know the ARM philosophy
Course Content
UNIT - I: Basics of Microprocessor & Microcontroller
A basic microprocessor system, the CPU, memory I/O organization of
microprocessor system, microprocessor architecture and its operations:
microprocessor initiated operations, internal data operations, peripheral or external
initiated operations, fetch and execute cycles, difference between microprocessor
and microcontroller.
UNIT - II: Architecture of 8086 Microprocessor
8086 Architecture, register organization, memory organization, 8086 pin diagram:
common function signals, minimum and maximum mode signals. interrupts,
interrupt structure, processing, timing diagrams.
UNIT - III:Assembly language of 8086& Interfacing
Addressing modes, classification of instructions, assembly directives, programs
using data transfer arithmetic, logical, branch, string instructions, evaluation of

Electronics and Communication Engineering 187

arithmetic expressions,strings etc.interfacing with memory & I/O, interfacing with
8255- stepper motor control.
UNIT - IV: Architecture of 8051
8051 Architecture, memory organization, ports, timers & serial communication,
addressing modes, instructions set of 8051.
UNIT - V: Applications of 8051
Interfacing with display devices: LED’s, 7 segment display unit, LCD unit,
temperature measurement system, relay control, A/D, D/A.
UNIT - VI: ARM Processor fundamentals
The RISC design philosophy, ARM design philosophy, Embedded system hardware,
registers, CPSR, pipeline, exceptions, interrupts and the vector table, core
extensions, architecture revisions.
Text Books
1. D.V Hall, “Microprocessors & Interfacing”, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2005. (Unit I-
Unit III)
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi and Rolin D. McKinlay, “The
8051 Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems”, Pearson, 2nd Edition (Unit
IV-Unit V).
Reference Books
1. Andrew N.Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, “ARM Systems Developer’s
Guides- Designing & Optimizing System Software”, Elsevier, 2008. (Unit VI)
2. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and
Applications with the 8085”, Penram Publication, 2000.
3. A. K. Ray and K.M. Bhurchandani, “Advanced Microprocessors and
Peripherals”, TMH, 2nd edition, 2006.
4. Barry B.Brey, “The Intel Microprocessors: Architecture, Programming, and
Interfacing”, PHI, 6th Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 188

 MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the microwave passive components, solid state devices and
procedures to measure different parameters in microwave frequency range.
• To familiarize with different types of optical fibers, light sources and detectors.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• design the microwave bench setup with different wave guide components
• distinguish microwave sources based on constructional, operational and
performance aspects
• demonstrate the use of microwave bench for calculating power, attenuation,
frequency and VSWR.
• understand the basic concepts of fiber optics.
• design a fiber optic communication network with suitable light sources for a
given application.
• design a fiber optic communication network with suitable optical detectors
for a given application.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction To Microwave Components
Microwave frequencies and applications, waveguide attenuators – resistive card
and rotary vane types; calculation of scattering matrix for E plane, H plane, Magic
Tee and directional coupler; ferrite components – Gyrator, Isolator, Circulator.
UNIT - II: Microwave Tubes
Classification of microwave tubes, two cavity Klystron – structure, velocity
modulation, output power; reflex Klystron – structure, power output and efficiency;
Travelling Wave Tube – structure, amplification process; 8-cavity cylindrical
travelling wave magnetron operation.
UNIT - III: Microwave Solid State Devices And Measurements
Gunn diode – Principle, RWH theory; IMPATT diode, description of microwave
bench, measurement of attenuation, frequency, VSWR and power using microwave
bench.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 189

UNIT - IV: Overview of Optical Fibres
The evolution of fibre optic systems, elements of an optical fibre transmission
link, optical fibre structures, nature of light, basic optical laws and definitions,
optical fibre modes and configurations.
UNIT - V: Optical Sources
LEDs- structures, quantum efficiency, modulation capability; Laser diodes -
principle, threshold conditions, external quantum efficiency, resonant frequencies.
UNIT - VI: Photo Detectors
Photodiodes – Principle, PIN and avalanche photo diodes; comparison of photo
detectors, noise in photo detectors.
Text Books
1. Samuel Y. Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, Pearson Education, 3rd
Edition, 2003.
2. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communications”,3rd edition, McGrawHill
Reference Books
1. M.Kulkarni “Microwave and Radar engineering”, Umesh publications, New
Delhi. 3rd Edition, 2008.
2. R.E. Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, IEEE Press, John Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2002.
3. Herbert J. Reich, J.G. Skalnik, P.F. Ordung and H.L. Krauss, “Microwave
Principles”, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Djafar K. Mynbaev and Lowell L. Scheiner, “Fiber Optic Communication
Technology”, Pearson Education Asia.
5. R.S.Rao, “ Microwave Engineering”, PHI New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2016.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 190

Professional Elective - II
ANALOG IC DESIGN
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts and design of analog integrated circuits.
• To expose the students to various circuits like amplifiers, switched capacitor
circuits, current mirrors, PLLs used in analog ICs.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• Apply the knowledge of Mathematics and semiconductor theory in analyzing
and designing of analog integrated circuits
• Demonstrate the knowledge and understanding of various current mirrors
and switched capacitor circuits
• Describe and determine the effect of feedback on the stability of amplifier
circuits.
• Select an appropriate A/D and D/A converter to meet specified performance
requirements.
Course Content
UNIT - I:
Basic Mos Device Physics: Second order effects, MOS Device Models
Single Stage Amplifiers: Basic concepts, MOS amplifiers-Common Source
stage, source follower, common gate stage, Cascode stage- folded cascode.
UNIT - II:
Differential Amplifiers: single ended and differential amplifiers, Basic differential
pair, Common mode response, Differential pair with MOS loads.
Current Mirrors: Simple CMOS current mirror with common source amplifier,
source degenerated current mirrors, High output impedance current, mirrors, Bipolar
current mirrors. Cascade, Wilson, Wildar current mirrors.
UNIT - III:

Electronics and Communication Engineering 191

Operational Amplifiers: one – stage op-amps, two stage op-amps-gains boosting
stage comparison, I/P range limitations, slew rate.
Feed Back and Stability: Feedback topologies, multi pole systems, phase
margin, frequency compensation.
UNIT - IV:
Switched Capacitors Circuits: Sampling switches, Switched-Capacitor
Amplifiers, Switched –Capacitor Integrator.
UNIT - V:
Phased Locked Loop Design: Basic loop architecture, derivation for lock range
and capture range. Charge pump PLL, small signal analysis of charge pump PLL.
UNIT - VI:
Nyquist Rate D/A Converters: Decoder based converter resistor storing
converters folded resister string converter – Binary scale converters – Binary
weighted resistor converters – Reduced resistance ratio ladders – R-2R based
converters – Thermometer code current mode D/A converters.
Nyquist Rate A/D Converters: Integrating converters – successive approximation
converters. DAC based successive approximation – flash converters time
interleaved A/D converters.
Text Books
1. David A Johns, Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated circuit Design”, John Wiley &
Sons (Unit: VI).
2. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, TMH, 2001
(Units: I to V)
Reference Books
1. Gray, Hurst Lewis, Meyer, “Analysis and design of Analog Integrated Circuits”,
John Wiley & Sons, 2000.
2. Franco Maloberti, “Analog Design for CMOS VLSI Systems”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2001.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 192

Professional Elective - II
NANO ELECTRONICS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand the limitations of silicon electronics, progress of
nanoelectronics and basic concepts of nano electronics.
• To know the fabrication techniques and scaling of nanodevices.
• To study the significance of tunneling effect in nanoelectronic devices and
the concepts of Coulomb blockade.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain various aspects of nano electronics.
• explore the fabrication techniques used for nanodevices.
• identify the importance of scaling.
• list of various applications of tunneling.
• demonstrate the concepts of coulomb blockade and electron transport
mechanisms.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Toward the Nanoscale
Scientific opportunities, technological motivations, improving materials on the
nanoscale, fabrication techniques on the nanoscale, improvement in
characterization methods for the nanoscale, new principles of device operation at
the nanoscale, nanotechnology for optoelectronics.
UNIT - II: Growth and Fabrication of Nanostructures
Bulk crystal and heterostructure growth, nanolithography, etching, and other means
of nanostructures and nanodevices, spontaneous formation and ordering of
nanostructures, clusters and nanocrystals, methods of nanotube growth- chemical
and biological methods for nanoscale fabrication, fabrication of nano-
electromechanical systems.
UNIT - III: Nanoscale MOSFETs
Introduction, MOSFET scaling, short- channel effects, multiple-gate MOSFETs,
FinFETs.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 193

UNIT - IV: Tunnel Junctions and Applictions of Tunneling
Tunneling through a potential barrier, potential energy profiles for material interfaces,
Application of tunneling.
UNIT - V: Coulomb Blockade
Coulomb blockade in a nanocapacitor, tunnel junction excited by a current source,
coulomb blockade in a Quantum Dot Circuit.
UNIT - VI: Nanostructure Devices
Resonant tunneling diode, single electron transistors, carbon nanotube transistor,
transport of spin and spintronics.
Text Books
1. Vladimir V. Mitin, Viatcheslav A. Kochelap, and Michael A. Stroscio,
“Introduction to Nanoelectronics: Science, Nanotechnology, Engineering, and
Applications”, Cambridge University Press, 2008 (UNITS: I & II).
2. George W.Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Pearson Education,
2009 (UNITS: IV - VI).
Reference Books
1. Anantha Chandrakasan, “FinFETs and Other Multi-Gate Transistors”, Springer,
2008 (UNIT: III).
2. Jerry G. Fossum and Vishal P. Trivedi, “Fundamentals of Ultra-Thin-Body
MOSFETs and FinFETs”, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2013
(UNIT: III) .
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 194

Professional Elective - II
SMART ANTENNAS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce beamforming concepts.
• To impart angle of arrival estimation techniques
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply different windowing techniques to obtain weights for desired antenna
pattern.
• make use of random variables for pre-processing of the signals.
• differentiate the performance of general antenna and smart antenna for spatial
processing of the signal.
• conceptualize adaptive beamforming.
• understand the concept of angle of arrival algorithms for beamforming.
• test the received signal performance with different algorithms and can choose
the suitable algorithm for the given application.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Array Weighting Fundamentals
Array weighting-Blackman weights, Hamming weights, Gaussian weights, Kaiser
Bessel weights, fixed beam arrays, fixed sidelobe cancelling,
UNIT - II: Principles of Random Variables and Process
Definition of random variables, probability density functions, expectation and
moments, common probability density functions, autocorrelation and power
spectral density, correlation matrix.
UNIT - III: Smart Antennas
Introduction, the historical development of smart antennas, early forms of spatial
processing, fixed weight beamforming basics: maximum S/I ratio, minimum mean
square error, maximum likelihood, and minimum variance. diversity, sectorization.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 195

UNIT - IV: Adaptive Beam Forming
Least mean squares (LMS), sample matrix inversion (SMI), recursive least squares
(RLS), constant modulus (CM)
UNIT - V: Angle of Arrival Estimation
Fundamentals of matrix algebra, array correlation matrix, non-blind beamforming,
blind beam forming, angle of arrival estimation methods: Bartlett AOA estimate,
Capon AOA estimate.
UNIT - VI: Smart Antenna Performance
Beamforming array performance, receive diversity performance, combined diversity
and beamforming performance, choosing a spatial processing technique.
Text Books
1. Frank B. Gross “Smart Antennas for Wireless Communications with MATLAB”,
McGraw –Hill, 2005.
2. Pieter van Rooyen, Michiel Lotter and Danie van Wyk “Space Time Processing
for CDMA Mobile Communications” Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2000.
Reference Books
1. Tapan K. Sarkar, Michel C. Wicks, M.S. Palma and Robert J. Bonnea “Smart
Antennas”, John Wiley & Sons – 2003.
2. S.Chandran “Adaptive Antenna Arrays: Trends and Applications” Springer,2004.
3. A Paulraj, Rohit nabar and Dhananjay Gore “Introduction to Space Time
Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 196

Professional Elective - II
CODING THEORY
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of information theory.
• To familiarize basic concepts of linear block codes and convolution codes.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop mathematical models for practical communication channels and
analyze information carrying capacity.
• understand source coding mechanism.
• analyze linear block codes and investigate the relationship between minimum
distance and error correction/detection capabilities
• analyze encoder and efficient decoder algorithms for convolutional codes.
• design and implement channel encoder and decoder in hardware/ software
to meet the required error performance in present day communication
applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Information Theory
Discrete messages, concept of amount of information and its properties, average
information, Entropy and its properties,information rate, mutual information and
its properties.
UNIT - II: Source Coding
Shannon’s theorem, Shanon-Fano coding, Huffman coding, efficiency calculations,
channel capacity of a Gaussian channel, bandwidth –S/N trade off.
UNIT - III: Linear Block Codes
Introduction, matrix description of linear block codes, error detection and error
correction capabilities of linear block codes, hamming codes.
UNIT - IV: Cyclic Codes
Binary cyclic codes, algebraic structure, encoding, syndrome calculation, and
table look-up decoding using standard array.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 197

UNIT-V: BCH and Reed Solomon Codes
BCH codes- decoding of BCH codes,the Berlekamp- Massey decoding algorithm.
Reed Solomon codes- generalized Reed Solomon codes, MDS codes.
UNIT - VI: Convolution Codes
Introduction, encoding of convolution codes, time domain approach, transform
domain approach, graphical approach: state, tree and trellis diagram,decoding
using Viterbi algorithm and sequential decoding, advantages of convolution codes
over block codes.
Text Books
1. W.C. Huffman and Vera Pless, “Fundamentals of Error correcting codes”,
Cambridge University Press, 2003.
2. Sam Shanmugam “Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, John Wiley,
2005.
Reference Books
1. Simon Haykin “Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 2005
2. Sklar, “Digital Communication”, Pearson Education.
3. Shu Lin and Daniel. J. Costello Jr., “Error Control Coding: Fundamentals and
applications”, 2nd Edition Prentice Hall Inc, 2004.
4. R.E. Blahut, “Theory and Practice of Error Control Coding”, McGraw Hill
1983.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 198

Open Elective - III
HYDROLOGY
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the knowledge of essential components of the hydrologic cycle
• To provide an overview and understanding of Unit Hydrograph theory and its
analysis.
• To familiarize with different methods of flood frequency analysis and flood
routing.
• To impart knowledge on groundwater movement and well hydraulics
• To familiarize with the relationships between soil, water and plant and their
significance in planning an irrigation system
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• measure and analyze the rainfall in any given area and develop intensity-
duration-frequency curves.
• quantify the abstractions from precipitation and the factors affecting
• determine runoff in a catchment and prepare the unit hydrograph which in-
turn determines the runoff for any given rainfall
• estimate flood magnitude and carry out flood routing
• determine hydraulic properties of an aquifer and specific capacity, efficiency
and yield of a well
• choose appropriate method of irrigation for different crops and cropping patterns
and determine the quality and quantity of water required for a crop
Course Content
UNIT - I: Hydrologic Cycle
Introduction: Engineering hydrology and its applications, Hydrologic cycle.
Precipitation: Types and forms of precipitation, rainfall measurement, types of
rain gauges, rain gauge network, average rainfall over a basin, consistency of
rainfall data, frequency of rainfall, intensity-duration-frequency curves, probable
maximum precipitation.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 199

UNIT - II: Abstractions
Abstractions: Evaporation, factors affecting evaporation, measurement of
evaporation, evaporation reduction, evapotranspiration, factors affecting
evapotranspiration, measurement of evapotranspiration - Infiltration, factors affecting
infiltration, measurement of infiltration, infiltration indices.
UNIT - III: Runoff
Runoff :Factors affecting runoff ,components of runoff, computation of runoff-rational
and SCS methods, separation of base flow ,Unit Hydrograph, assumptions,
derivation of Unit Hydrograph, unit hydrographs of different durations, principle of
superposition and S-hydrograph methods, limitations and applications of UH
UNIT - IV: Floods
Floods-Causes and effects, flood frequency analysis-Gumbel’s method, flood
control methods, flood routing-hydrologic routing, hydraulic routing, channel and
reservoir routing- Muskingum method of routing
UNIT - V Ground Water
Ground Water Occurrence: Ground water hydrologic cycle, origin of ground
water, rock properties effecting ground water, vertical distribution of ground
water, zone of aeration and zone of saturation, geologic formation as Aquifers,
types of aquifers, porosity, Specific yield and Specific retention.
UNIT - VI: Irrigation
Necessity and Importance of Irrigation, advantages and ill effects of Irrigation,
types of Irrigation, methods of application of Irrigation water, water logging and
drainage, standards of quality for Irrigation water, principal crops and crop seasons,
crop rotation.
Text Books
1. Engineering Hydrology, P. Jayaram Reddy, third edition, Laxmi publications
2. Irrigation and water power engineering, B.C. Punmia, Pande B.B Lal, Ashok
Kumar Jain & Arun Kumar Jain sixteenth edition, Laxmi publications.
Reference Books
1. Engineering Hydrology, K. Subramanya, third edition, Tata McGraw-Hill..
Hydrology principles, analysis and design, HM Raghunath, revised second
edition, New Age International Publishers.
2. Irrigation Water Resources and Water Power Engineering, P.N.Modi, seventh
edition, Standard Book House.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 200

Open Elective - III
PLANNING FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objective
• To familiarize the concept of sustainable development
• To introduce various components of sustainable development
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain the importance of sustainable development
• use various strategies for promoting sustainable development
• analyze important current issues and areas of debate in relation to sustainable
development.
• implement policy responses in environmental degradation.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Sustainable Development-explains and critically evaluates the concept of
sustainable development, Environmental degradation and poverty Sustainable
development: its main principles, the evolution of ideas about sustainability,
UNIT - II: Key Components in Sustainable Development
Strategies for promoting sustainable development, resistances to the concept,
and some alternative approaches. Examine some important current issues and
areas of debate in relation to sustainable development.
UNIT - III: Innovation for Sustainable Development
Innovation for sustainable development- Environmental management and innovation
strategies.
UNIT - IV: Theories of Sustainable Development
Societal transformations.Institutional theory.
UNIT - V: Governance and Policy Response
Governance for sustainable development.Policy responses to environmental
degradation.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 201

UNIT - VI: Research in Sustainable Development
Capacity development for innovation.Research methods.
Text Books
1. Basic Principles for Sustainable Development,Harris, J.M, 2004.
2. Some thoughts on the idea of sustainable development Ecological Economics,
Robinson, J. (2004), 48(4): 369-384.
Reference Books
1. Navigating towards Sustainable Development: A System Dynamics Approach,
Hjorth, P. and A. Bagheri (2006), Futures 38: 74-92.
2. Struggling with Sustainability – A Comparative Framework for Evaluating
Sustainable Development Programs ,Mog, J.M. (2004), World Development
32(12): 2139–2160. IISD Commentary on the OECD’s Draft Principles for
International Investor Participation in Infrastructure
3. Global Development and Environment Institute, working paper 00-04. Available
at:http://ase.tufts.edu/gdae/publications/Working_Papers/
Sustainable%20Development.PDF.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 202

Open Elective - III
ELECTRICAL AND HYBRID VEHICLES
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts on working principles of electric drives used for
different hybrid electric vehicles.
• To familiarize with the different energy storage systems and their management
strategies.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe hybrid vehicles and their performance
• analyze various power converter configurations of hybrid electric drives.
• analyze and suggest possible energy storage systems for different
applications.
• apply the appropriate energy management strategies for various applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Hybrid Electric Vehicles
History of hybrid and electric vehicles, electric vehicles, impact of modern drive-
trains on energy supplies.
UNIT - II: Hybrid Electric Drive-trains
Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction to various hybrid drive-train topologies,
power flow control in hybrid drive-train topologies
UNIT - III: Electric Drive-trains
Basic concept of electric traction Introduction to electric components used in
hybrid and electric vehicles, Configuration and control of DC and AC Motor drives
UNIT - IV: Energy Storage
Introduction to Energy Storage Requirements in Hybrid and Electric Vehicles,
Battery based energy storage and its analysis, Fuel Cell based energy storage
and its analysis, Super Capacitor based energy storage and its analysis.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 203

UNIT - V: Hybridization of different energy storage devices
Hybridization of different energy storage devices. Sizing the drive system: Matching
the electric machine, sizing the power electronics, selecting the energy storage
technology.
UNIT - VI: Energy Management Strategies
Introduction to energy management strategies used in hybrid and electric vehicles,
classification of different energy management strategies, comparison of different
energy management strategies, implementation issues of energy management
strategies.
Text Books
1. C. Mi, M. A. Masrur and D. W. Gao, “Hybrid Electric Vehicles: Principles and
Applications with Practical Perspectives”, John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
2. S. Onori, L. Serrao and G. Rizzoni, “Hybrid Electric Vehicles: Energy
Management Strategies”, Springer, 2015
Reference Books
1. M. Ehsani, Y. Gao, S. E. Gay and A. Emadi, “Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric,
and Fuel Cell Vehicles: Fundamentals, Theory, and Design”, CRC Press, 2004.
2. T. Denton, “Electric and Hybrid Vehicles”, Routledge, 2016.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 204

Open Elective - III
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular
stress on thermal power generation.
• To impart knowledge on the different types of control loops.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe the constructional details, working principles of various generating
stations.
• analyze the working of different types of controls and control loops.
• choose various measurements involved in power generation plants.
• understand the knowledge about the different types of devices used for
analysis.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Overview Of Power Generation
Brief survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and
wind power – importance of instrumentation in power generation – thermal power
plants – building blocks – details of boiler processes UP&I diagram of boiler –
cogeneration.
UNIT - II: Measurements In Power Plants
Electrical measurements – current, voltage, power, frequency, power – factor etc.
– non electrical parameters – flow of feed water, fuel, air and steam with correction
factor for temperature – steam pressure and steam temperature – drum level
measurement – radiation detector – smoke density measurement – dust monitor.
UNIT - III: Analyzers In Power Plants
Flue gas oxygen analyser – analysis of impurities in feed water and steam –
dissolved oxygen analyser – chromatography – PH meter – fuel analyser – pollution
monitoring instruments.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 205

UNIT - IV: Control Loops In Boiler
Combustion control – air/fuel ratio control – furnace draft control – drum level
control – main stem and reheat steam temperature control – super heater control
– attemperator –deaerator control – distributed control system in power plants –
interlocks in boiler operation.
UNIT - V: Turbine – Monitoring And Control
Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control – steam pressure control
– lubricant oil temperature control – cooling system
UNIT - VI: Analysis in Power Plant
Thermal conductive type, paramagnetic type-Oxygen analyzer, hydrogen purity
meter-chromatography – PH meter,fuel analyzer, pollution monitoring and control
Text Books
1. Sam G. Dukelow, ‘The control of Boilers’, Instrument Society of America,1991.
2. Modern Power Station Practice, Vol.6, Instrumentation, Controls and Testing,
Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1971.
3. E.L Wakil, M.M./Power Plant technology/Mc Graw Hill 1984.
4. J.Balasubramaniam & R.K Jain/Modern Power Plant Engineering/Khanna
Reference Books
1. Elonka,S.M.and Kohal A.L.Standard Boiler Operations, McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi,1994.
2. R.K.Jain, Mechanical and industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 1995.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 206

Open Elective - III
MATERIAL SCIENCE
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• to understand the properties of engineering materials, so as to manipulate
them for the desired engineering applications.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• compare the different types of conductors and semi conductors and their
applications
• classify magnetic materials based on their parameters
• understand the applications of dielectric principles in engineering devices.
• propose a corrosion prevention technique for a particular application
• summarize the different optical properties of metallic materials
• apply different characterization techniques for validation of metals.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Conductors, Semi Conductors and Resisters
Resistivity, Range of Resistivity- free electron theory - classical theory & quantam
theory. Semiconducting materials: Energy gap in solids - intrinsic semi conductors
- extrinsic semi conductors - element & compund semi conductors - crystal
structure - growth & purification of semi conductor crystals.
UNIT - II: Magnetic Materials
Magnetic Materials: Classification of magnetic materials based on spin -
Hard and soft magnetic materials - Dia, Para & Ferro types, atomic magnetic
moment - anti ferro magnetism.
UNIT - III: DIELECTRIC MATERIALS
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric susceptability - complex die electric constant -
Polarization mechanisms in dielectrics - Frequency and temperature
dependence of polarization mechanism - Dielectric loss - Dielectric waveguide
and dielectric resonator antenna - Piezoelectric, pyroelectric and ferroelectric
materials and their applications.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 207

UNIT - IV: Optical Properties of Materials
Introduction - electromagnetic radiation - light interactions with solids - Refraction,
Reflction, Absorption, Transmission, Opacity & Translucency in insulators -
Luminescence - Photo conductivity.
UNIT - V: Corrosion & Oxidation
Corrosion: Principles of corrosion - electrode potential - galvanic series - galvanic
cell - polarization - passivation - electro chemical considerations - corrosion rate
- forms of corrosion - corrosion prevention.
Oxidation: Mechanisms of oxidation - oxidation resistant materials.
UNIT - VI: Materials Characterization
X-ray diffraction, Neutron diffraction and Electron diffraction - X-ray
fluorescence spectroscopy - Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) - Differential
Thermal Analysis (DTA) - Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC).
Text Books
1. V. Raghavan, “Materials Science and Engineering”, PHI Learning Publication,
5th edition.
2. Rajendran, V. “Materials Science”,Tata McGraw- Hill,New Delhi,2011.
Reference Books
1. William D. Callister, “Materials Science and Engineering” 9th ed., John Wiley
and sons, Incorporated.
2. Sam Zhang, “Materials Characterization Techniques”, CRC Press.
3. J. M. D. Coey, “Magnetism and Magnetic Materials”, Cambridge University
Press.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 208

Open Elective - III
RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To study various types of non-conventional sources of energy and techniques
used in exploiting solar, wind, tidal and geothermal sources of energy and
bio-fuels.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the significance of renewable energy.
• describe the principles of solar radiation and design the solar collectors.
• know the functioning of basic components of wind energy and understand
the utilization of biomass in power generation.
• discuss the working principles of geothermal, ocean, tidal and wave energy
techniques.
• know the functioning of direct energy conversion techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Energy Sources and their availability, Role and potential of renewable source.
Principles of Solar Radiation: Solar constant, Solar Radiation outside the Earth’s
atmosphere, Solar Radiation at the Earth’s surface, instruments for measuring
solar radiation, solar radiation geometry, solar radiation on titled surfaces with
numerical problems.
UNIT - II: Solar Energy Storage and Applications
Different methods, sensible, latent heat and stratified storage, solar ponds. Solar
Applications-solar heating/cooling technique, solar distillation, drying, photovoltaic
energy conversion, solar central power tower concept and solar chimney. solar
collectors- flat plate, concentric collectors.
UNIT - III: Wind Energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance
characteristics, Betz criteria

Electronics and Communication Engineering 209

Bio-Mass: Biomass Energy Sources, methods for obtaining energy from biomass,
Biomass gasification.
UNIT - IV:
Geothermal Energy: Resources, types of wells, methods of harnessing the
energy.
Ocean Energy: OTEC, Principles, utilization, setting of OTEC plants,
thermodynamic cycles.
Tidal and wave energy: Potential and conversion techniques, Mini-hydel power
plants
UNIT - V:
Direct Energy Conversion (DEC): Need for DEC, limitations, principles of DEC.
Thermoelectric Power – See-beck, Peltier, Joule -Thomson effects, Thermo-electric
Power generators.
UNIT - VI: MHD Power Generation
Principles, dissociation and ionization, Hall effect, magnetic flux, MHD accelerator,
MHD engine, power generation systems, electron gas dynamic conversion.
Fuel cells: Principles, Faraday’s laws, thermodynamic aspects, selection of fuels
and operating conditions, applications.
Text Books
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, “Renewable energy resources”, Narosa.
2. B.H.Khan “Non – conventional Energy Resources” Tata McGraw Hill education
Pvt Ltd.
Reference Books
1. G.D. Rai, “Non-Conventional Energy Sources”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons
2. Twidell & Weir, “Renewable Energy Sources “ Sukhatme, “Solar Energy”,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 210

Open Elective - III
ASSISTIVE TECHNOLOGIES
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce different assistive technology devices
• To familiarize with the concepts of enhance speech communication and
independent living.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the legislative policies connected with assistive Technologies
• know the universal design principles in the context of general education
environments and curriculum materials.
• explore the process for finding the right technology and the right applications
and determine how to pay for it.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Assistive Technology (AT) Devices and Services
Assistive technology defined, historical overview of assistive technology,
multidisciplinary nature of service provision.
UNIT - II: Adaptations Framework for Considering Assistive Technology
Introduction to the adaptations framework, setting-specific demands, person-
specific characteristics, adaptations, evaluation of effectiveness of adaptations.
UNIT - III: Assistive Technology Assessments
Overview of assessment issues, overview of general assessments, assistive
technology assessments, assessment components.
UNIT - IV: Enhance Speech Communication
Nature of spoken language, introduction to augmentative and alternative
communication systems, selection techniques for aided communication systems,
overview of non-electronic systems and electronic devices.
UNIT - V: Mobility and Access to Information
Introduction to mobility adaptations, basic design considerations, seating and
positioning issues, introduction to information access, computer access,
telecommunication, listening and print access.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 211
UNIT - VI: Enhance Independent Living
Introduction to independent living, devices for daily life, switches and scanning,
environmental control units, access to management devices.
Text Books:
1. Diane P edrotty Bryant, Brian R. Bryant, Allyn and Bacon “Assistive
Technology for People with Disabilities”, 2nd edition, Psycho Educational
Services.
2. Amy G.Dell, Deborah A. Newton, Jerry G.Petroff, “Assistive Technology in
the class room Enhancing the school experiences of students with disabilities”,
Pearson Publications, 2nd edition.
Reference Books
1. Marion A.Hersh, Michael A.Johnson, “Assistive Technology for the Hearing
impaired, Deaf and Deafblind”, Springer Publications, 2003.
2. Meeko Mitsuko K.Oishi, lan M.Mitchell, H.F. Machiel vanderloss, “Design
and use of Assistive Technology”, Springer Publications, 2010.
3. Eckehard Fozzy Moritz, “Assistive Technologies for the Interaction of the
Elderly”, Springer Publications, 2014.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 212

Open Elective - III
BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the basics of biological concepts and relate it to engineering.
• To familiarize with physiology of cardio-vascular system, respiratory system
& the elements of Patient Care Monitoring.
• To impart the knowledge on the patient monitoring displays, diagnosis &
techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• know the concept of bio-medical engineering, evolution, age, development,
advancements and applications.
• get awareness on noval theory related to human body and various components.
• analyze the operation of measuring the cardio-vascular system by knowing
its inner organization, sensor and transducer theory & plethysmographical
concepts.
• learn the principles of respiration and respiratory therapy equipment.
• understand the fundamental principles & techniques of diagnosys and bio-
telemetry, monitors, recorders.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Bio-Medical Instrumentation
Man instrumentation system-introduction & components, physiological system
of the body, sources of bio-electric potentials, resting & action potentials,Electro-
Cardiogram(ECG),Electro-Encephalogram(EEG), Electro Myogram (EMG),envoked
responses.
UNIT - II: Electrodes & Transducers
Bio-potential electrodes, basic transducers-transduction principles, biochemical
transducers, active & passive transducers, transducers of bio-medical applications,
pulse sensors, respiration sensors.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 213

UNIT - III: Cardio-Vascular System & Respiratory System Measurements
The heart & cardiovascular system, Electro-Cardiography, blood pressure
measurement, measurement of blood flow & cardiac output, the physiology of the
respiratory system, tests & instrumentation for the mechanics of breathing,
respiratory therapy equipment.
UNIT - IV: Patient Care & Monitoring
Elements of intensive care monitoring, patient monitoring displays, diagnosis,
calibration & repair ability of patient monitoring equipment, organization of the
hospital for patient care monitoring, pace-makers, defibrillators.
UNIT - V: Diagnostic Techniques & Bio-Telemetry
Principles of ultrasonic measurement, Ultrasonic Imaging, Ultrasonic Diagnosis
X-Ray & Radio-Isotope Instrumentations CAT Scan, Emission Computerized
Tomography, MRI, Introduction & components of bio-telemetry system.
UNIT - VI: Monitors, Recorders & Shocking Hazards
Monitors, recorders, shock hazards & prevention, physiological effects & electrical
equipment, methods of accident prevention, isolated power distribution system.
Text Books
1. Onkar N. Pandey, Rakesh kumar, “Bio-Medical Electronics and
Instrumentation”, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2007.
2. Cromewell, Wiebell, P.feiffer, “Biomedical instrumentation and measurements”,
Prentice-Hall, 1973.
Reference Books
1. Joseph J.Carr, John M.Brown, “Introduction to Bio-Medical Equipment
Technology”, Pearson Publications, 4th Edition.
2. Khandapur, “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation”, TMH, 2nd Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 214

Open Elective - III
NODE AND ANGULAR JS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with defining own custom AngularJS directives that extend the
HTML language
• To introduce the concepts of client-side services that can interact with the
Node.js web server
• To understand the best practices for server -side JavaScript
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop single page applications that reduces app’s time to market without
plugins.
• identify the services, modules and directives to subdivide application logic
into modules and share code across apps
• explain the routing process in angular for managing URL’s.
• interpret command line applications in Node.js that allows developers a more
maintainable code
• develop code with use of Node.js and JSON services for web applications.
• examine how error events affect piped streams and handling events in Node.js
UNIT - I: Introduction to Node.js and JSON
Introduction, operators, decision and iterative statements, Node.js collections:
create array object, insert, access, update and remove data. JSON:Create JSON
object, display, access and edit data. JSON Array: Creation, display, access and
edit data. Check JSON attribute.
UNIT - II: Node.js Files, Functions and Strings
File modules, reading text, creating file. Functions: creating function, types of
functions, callback function. Strings: operations, string to numeric and vice-versa,
string parser.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 215

UNIT - III: Node.js Modules, Error Handling & Logging and Events
Create simple module, module class. Error handling and logging. Events: Events
module, once event listener, remove events.
UNIT - IV: Introduction to Angular
Introduction to TypeScript (TS), node package manager, introduction to Angular
4, create angular application using TS and angular CLI, webpack, gulp introduction.
UNIT - V: Elements in Angular
Angular components, controllers, modules, dependency injection, angular service,
providers and directives, pipes and filters, Angular forms-Reactive, lifecycle hooks.
UNIT - VI: Routing in Angular
Routing-module, component, lazy loading of components, apply route guards-
security, Angular material design.
Text Books
1. Andrew Grant, “Beginning AngularJS”, Apress Publishers.
2. Agus Kurniawan, “Nodejs Programming By Example”, PE Press.
Reference Books
1. Ken Williamson,”Learning AngularJS: A Guide to AngularJS Development”,
O’Relly Media.
2. Matt Frisbie, “AngularJS Web Application Development Cookbook”, Packt
Publishing Ltd.
3. David Herron, “Node.js Web Development”, 4th edition, Packt Publishing Ltd.
4. Marc Wandschneider, “Learning Node.js: A Hands-On Guide to Building Web
Applications in JavaScript”, Addison Wesley.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 216

Open Elective - III
CYBER SECURITY
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand security concepts, Ethics in Network Security.
• To familiarize with new algorithms (mathematical formulas) and statistical
measures that assesses relationships among members of large data sets.
• To identify the vulnerability of the Internet systems and recognize the
mechanisms of the attacks, and apply those to design and evaluate counter
measure tools.
• To gain knowledge on security threats, and the security services and
mechanisms to counter them.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• outline management framework.
• describe various tools that can be used in cyber security management.
• write a secure access client for access to a server.
• determine firewall requirements, and configure a firewall.
• employ policies and standards to solve security problems.
• use security techniques in an organisational context.
UNIT - I: Systems Vulnerability Scanning
Overview of vulnerability scanning, Open Port / Service Identification, Banner /
Version Check, Traffic Probe, Vulnerability Probe, Vulnerability Examples,
OpenVAS, Metasploit. Networks vulnerability scanning - Netcat, understanding
port and Services tools-Datapipe, Fpipe, Network reconnaissance –Nmap, THC-
Amap. Network sniffers and injection tools–Tcpdump and Windump.
UNIT - II: Network Defence Tools
Firewalls and packet filters: Firewall basics, packet filter vs firewall, how a firewall
protects a network, packet characteristic to filter, stateless vs stateful firewalls,
network address translation (NAT) and port forwarding, the basic of virtual private
networks, Snort: Intrusion detection system.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 217

UNIT - III: Web Application Tools
Scanning for web vulnerabilities tools: Nikto, HTTP utilities-Curl, OpenSSL and
stunnel, password cracking and Brute-Force tools–John the Ripper,L0phtCrack,
pwdump, HTC-Hydra.
UNIT - IV: Introduction to Cyber Crime and Law
Cyber crimes, types of cyber crime, hacking, attack vectors, cyberspace and
criminal behavior, clarification of terms, traditional problems associated with
computer crime.
UNIT - V: Introduction to Incident Response
Digital forensics, computer language, network language, realms of the cyber world,
a brief history of the Internet, recognizing and defining computer crime,
contemporary crimes, computers as targets, contaminants and destruction of
data, Indian IT ACT 2000.
UNIT - VI: Introduction to Cyber Crime Investigation
Firewalls and packet filters, password cracking, keyloggers and spyware, virus
and worms, Trojan and backdoors, steganography, attack on wireless networks.
Text Books
1. Mike Shema, “Anti-Hacker Tool Kit (Indian Edition)”, Publication Mc Graw
Hill.
2. Computer forensics and cyber crime : an introduction by Marjie T. Britz.
Reference Books
1. James Graham, Ryan Olson, Rick Howard, “Cyber Security essentials”, 1st
edition.
2. Chwan-Hwa (John) Wu, J. David Irwin, “Introduction to Computer Networks
and Cybersecurity”.
3. Nina Godbole and Sunit Belpure, “Cyber Security Understanding Cyber
Crimes, Computer Forensics and Legal Perspectives”, Publication Wiley.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 218

Open Elective - III
SCRIPTING LANGUAGES
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with JQuery, JSON, PERL, Ruby, AJAX to develop client-side
and server-side web applications.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• use jQuery with DOM to manipulate HTML elements, attributes and CSS.
• store and exchange data between server and browser using JSON.
• develop PERL scripts using arrays, hashes, control structures and
subroutines.
• write Ruby scripts usingdata types, arrays, hashes, control structures and
classes.
• retrieve data from a database using PHP and AJAX.
Course Content
UNIT - I : jQuery
Introduction, Selectors, Events, Effects, Manipulating HTML and CSS using jQuery
UNIT - II: JSON
Introduction, Syntax rules, JSON Vs XML, Data types, Objects, Arrays, Parsing
JSON and using stringify() function
UNIT - II: Introduction to PERL
Basic syntax, Perl language elements: variables, operators, control flow
statements, Arrays, Hashes and File handling; Regular expressions, Subroutines
UNIT - IV: Working with PERL
Packages and modules, Working with files, Retrieving documents from the web
with Perl.
UNIT - V: Ruby
Introduction to Ruby, Variables, types, simple I/O, Control, Arrays, Hashes,
Methods, classes, Iterators, Pattern Matching. Overview of Rails.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 219

UNIT - VI: AJAX A New Approach
Introduction, Creating XMLHttpRequest object, Integrating AJAX with PHP,
Retrieving data from a database using PHP and AJAX, Handling XML data using
PHP and AJAX.
Textbooks
• Kogent , HTML 5 Black Book, 2nd Edition, Dreamtech Press
• Dave Thomas, Programming Ruby 1.9 & 2.0: The Pragmatic Programmers’
Guide, 4th Edition, Pragmatic Bookshelf
• Randal L. Schwartz,ý Brian D. Foy ,ý Tom Phoenix, Learning Perl, 6th
edition,O’REILLY Publications.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 220

Open Elective - III
SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce plan and manage projects at each stage of the software
development life cycle (SDLC).
• To impart effective software projects that support organization’s strategic
goals.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the different software projects.
• prepare project plans that address real time management challenges.
• relate important risks facing a new project.
• design effective software development model to meet organizational needs.
• recognize appropriate methodology to develop a project schedule.
• apply appropriate techniques to assess ongoing project performance.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Conventional Software Management
The waterfall model, conventional software Management performance.
Evolution of Software Economics: Software Economics, pragmatic software
cost estimation.
Improving Software Economics: Reducing Software product size, improving
software processes, improving team effectiveness.
UNIT - II: Principles of Modern Software Management
The old way and the new: The principles of conventional software Engineering,
principles of modern software management, transitioning to an iterative process.
Life cycle phases: Engineering and production stages, inception, Elaboration,
construction, transition phases.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 221

UNIT - III: Checkpoints and Process Planning
Checkpoints of the process: Major mile stones, Minor Milestones, Periodic status
assessments.
Iterative Process Planning: Work breakdown structures, planning guidelines,
cost and schedule estimating.
UNIT - IV: Project Organizations
Project Organizations And Responsibilities: Line-of-Business Organizations,
Project Organizations, evolution of Organizations.
Process Automation: Automation Building blocks.
UNIT - V: Project Control and Process Instrumentation
The seven core Metrics, Management indicators, quality indicators, life cycle
expectations, pragmatic Software Metrics, Metrics automation, Tailoring the
Process- Process discriminants.
UNIT - VI: Future Software Project Management
Modern Project Profiles, Next generation Software economics, modern process
transitions.
Text Books
1. Walker Royce,Software Project Management, Pearson Education, 2005.
Reference Books
1. Bob Hughes and Mike Cotterell, Software Project Management, Tata McGraw-
Hill Edition.
2. Joel Henry, Software Project Management, Pearson Education.
3. PankajJalote, Software Project Management in practice, Pearson Education,
2005.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 222

Open Elective - III
ELEMENTS OF STOCHASTIC PROCESSES
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Outcomes
• To study and understand the systems which evolve randomly over time,
especially in long run.
• To survey the important tools of stochastic processes.
• To model and solve engineering problems arising in real life situations.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• formulate and solve probabilistic problems using random variables.
• distinguish between Poisson process and the exponential random variable
and apply this knowledge to solve problems involving memory less processes.
• use renewal theory to solve problems where Poisson is not a realistic
processes.
• ise Markov chain is discrete and continuous time to solve queuing problems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Generating Functions
Introduction, Definitions and elementary results, Convolutions, Compound
distributions, Partial fraction expansions, Moment and cumulant generating
functions.
UNIT - II: Recurrent Events
Definitions, Basic theorems, Delayed recurrent events.
Random Walk Models: Introduction, Gambler’s Ruin, Probability distribution of
ruin at nth trial and extensions.
UNIT - III: Markov Chains
Introduction, Notation and definition, classification of states, classification of chains,
Evaluation of Pn (transition probability matrix)
UNIT - IV: Markov Process
Discrete and continuous – The Poisson process, Use of generating functions,
Random variable technique, Solution of linear partial deferential equations.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 223

UNIT - V: Homogeneous and Non-Homogeneous Birth and Death Processes
Introduction, simple birth process, general birth process, divergent birth processes.
Simple death process, simple birth and death processes, the effect of immigration,
the general birth and death process, multiplication processes. Polya process, a
simple non-homogeneous birth and death process. The effect of immigration.
UNIT – VI: Queuing process
Introduction, Equilibrium theory, Queues with many servers, Monte carlo methods
in appointment systems, Non-equilibrium treatment of a sample queue, First
passage times, Diffusion process.
Text Book
1. The Elements of Stochastic Processes, Norman T.J. Bailey.
Reference Book
1. Stochastic Processes, J. Mehdi
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 224

Open Elective - III
ACADEMIC COMMUNICATION
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To acquaint the students with the process and elements of academic writing.
• To help them gain accuracy in the academic writing tasks they will be called
upon to perform as part of their graduate and postgraduate studies.
• To empower them to carry out academic writing tasks such as project report
writing with success.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the student will be able to produce
successful academic writing tasks (such as designing and reporting a survey/project,
writing discussion essays, and composing formal letters) with attention to:
• the writing process involving a good understanding of the purpose and the
register as well as organizational strategies such as introduction, main body,
conclusion, paragraphing;
• the elements of academic writing such as argument, cause and effect,
cohesion and coherence, generalizations, references, style, and visual
information; and
• the kind of accuracy, technical as well as grammatical, that writing in academic
contexts demands
Course Content
I. The Writing Process
a. Background to writing
i. The purpose of academic writing
ii. Common types of academic writing
iii. The features of academic writing
iv. Writing in paragraphs
b. From understanding to planning
i. The planning process ii. Analyzing essay titles
iii. Brainstorming

Electronics and Communication Engineering 225

 c. Organizing paragraphs
i. Paragraph structure ii. Development of ideas
iii. Linking paragraphs together
d. Introductions and conclusions
i. Introduction contents ii. Introduction structure
iii. Opening sentences iv. Conclusions
e. Re-writing and proof-reading
i. Re-writing ii. Proof-reading
II. Elements of Writing
a. Cohesion
i. Reference words ii. Preventing confusion
b. Comparisons
i. Comparison structures ii. Forms of comparison
iii. Using superlatives
c. Style
i. Components of academic style ii. Guidelines
d. Visual information
i. The language of change ii. Types of visuals
iii. Describing visuals iv. Labelling
III. Accuracy in Writing
a. Academic vocabulary b. Remedial grammar
c. Punctuation
IV. Writing Models
a. Formal/Professional emails b. CVs
c. Reports d. Scholarly essays
Suggesting Reading
1. Bailey, Stephen. (2011). Academic Writing A Handbook for International
Students. Routledge: London.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 226

MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER INTERFACING LAB
III Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the assembly language programming concepts and interfacing
with 8086 processor.
• To familiarize with the Embedded-C language programming concepts and
interfacing with 8051 microcontroller.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• acquire the knowledge of assembly language programming using 8086
microprocessor.
• perform various arithmetic and shift operations with 8086 based system.
• interface various I/O modules with 8086 based system.
• implement various real time applications using 8051.
List of Experiments
Part A: Assembly Language Programming Exercises / Experiments using 8086
Trainer kit
1. Implementation of simple decimal arithmetic and bit manipulation operations.
2. Implementation of code conversion between BCD, Binary, Hexadecimal and
ASCII.
3. Implementation of searching and sorting of 16-bit numbers.
4. Implementation of String manipulations.
Part B: Interfacing Exercises/Experiments with 8086 trainer kit through Assembly
Language Programming
1. Develop a stepper motor interface for rotating through any given sequence.
2. Develop a Digital-to-Analog Converter interface for waveform generation.
3. Develop an Analog-to-Digital Converter interface for analog signal to digital
conversion.
4. Implementation of 2’s complement and decoder functionalities using DIDO
interface.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 227

Part C: Assembly Language Programming Exercises/Experiments in 8051 using
Keil
1. Develop a Embedded C Program to interface seven segment display to port1
and port2 and display the count from 00 to FFH
2. Implement the functionality of traffic signal controller using 8051
microcontroller.
3. Develop an Embedded C Program to display the given string on LCD.
4. Open ended Experiment
Reference Books
1. D. V. Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing”, TMGH,2nd edition 2006
2. Barry B.Brey , “The Intel Microprocessors”, PHI, 7th edition 2006.
3. M.A. Mazidi, J.G. Mazidi, R.D. Mckinlay, “The 8051 microcontroller and
embedded systems”, Pearson, 2nd Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 228

 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB
III Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To analyze and manipulate digital signals for the representation of systems
using MATALB.
• To introduce the architecture of TMS320C6711 DSP and the programming of
DSP.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze and implement digital signal processing systems in time domain.
• compute linear and circular convolution and the discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) of discrete-time signals.
• perform the frequency response of frequency-selective digital filters using
Butterworth, chebyshev approximations and windows.
• implement DSP operations on TMS320C6711 DSP processor.
List of Experiments
1. Represent signal, its basic transformations, sum of sinusoidal signals and
multiplication of sinusoidal signals.
2. Obtain output of LTI system (without using default functions).
3. Perform linear convolution using the circular convolution (without using default
functions)
4. Obtain spectrum of the discrete time sequence (without using default
functions)
5. Obtain DFT using FFT(without using default functions)
6. Verify DFT properties (without using default functions)
7. Design IIR filter using Butterworth/Chebyshev Approximations.
8. Design FIR filter using windowing techniques.
9. Obtain power density spectrum of a sequence.
10. Linear convolution implementation on DSP chips.
11. Open-ended experiment-application of filters.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 229

Text Books
1. John G. Proakis,Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications”: Pearson Education / PHI, 2013.
2. A.V.Oppenheim and R.W. Schaffer , “Discrete Time Signal Processing “,
PHI
URL’S
1. www.ti.com/cn/lit/pdf/spru509c.pdf
2. www.ti.com/lit/ug/spru301c/spru301c.pdf
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 230

 VLSI LAB
III Year – II Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
To make the students familiarize with the
• design of analog and digital circuits.
• usage of EDA tool to simulate, draw schematic and layout, analyze, and test
of analog and digital circuits.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• design analog and digital circuits.
• use EDA tools to perform simulation, draw schematic and layout, analysis,
testing, and interpret results.
• write VHDL/Verilog code.
• make oral presentations and prepare written reports.
List of Experiments
A) Analog Design:
To design the circuits with given specifications and verify the following:
(a) Schematic: (i) DC analysis and (ii) Transient analysis
(b) Layout: (i) DRC (ii) LVS and (iii) RCX DRC – Design Rule Check; LVS –
Layout Versus Schematic; RCX –RC Extraction
1. Single-stage common-source amplifier
2. Single-stage differential amplifier
3. Single-stage operational amplifier
4. 4-bit R-2R DAC using opamp
B) Digital Design:
To write VHDL/Verilog code and test bench for verification, and observe the
waveform for the following:
1. Inverter (design with given specifications and verify (a) Schematic: (i) DC
analysis, (ii) Transient analysis (b) Layout: (i) DRC (ii) LVS and (iii) RCX; and
(c) as given above).

Electronics and Communication Engineering 231

 2. Buffer
3. Logic gates (AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR, XNOR, transmission gate)
4. Flip-flops (D, JK, T, RS)
5. Parallel and serial adders
6. 4-bit counters (Asynchronous and synchronous)
7. Successive approximation register (SAR) and SAR based ADC
C) Open-ended experiment (shall comprise all the VLSI design flow steps)
Reference Books
1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw-Hill
Edition, 2003.
2. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Revised
Second Edition, IEEE press, 2008.
3. Neil H.E.Weste, David Harris, and Ayan Banerjee, “CMOS VLSI Design: A
Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson Education Inc., Third Edition,
2005 (Indian Reprint 2014).
4. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis
and Design”, TMH Education, Third Edition, 2003.
5. Eugene D. Fabricius,” Introduction to VLSI design”, McGraw-Hill International
Edition, 1990.
6. IIT Bombay,” VLSI Design”, NPTEL Web Course.
7. User Manuals for EDA Tools.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 232

Optional Elective - V
BIG DATA ANALYTICS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the architectural concepts of Hadoop and introducing map reduce
paradigm.
• To disseminate knowledge on how to summarize, query, and analyze data
with Hive.
• To familiarize with business decisions and create competitive advantage with
Big Data analytics.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• summarize the importance of Big Data and its problems (storage and
analysis).
• outline the building blocks of hadoop and anatomy of file read and write.
• analyze data with hadoop MapReduce.
• generalize how MapReduce works when running a job.
• choose best programming tools for solving real world and industrial problems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Big Data
What is Big Data, characteristics of Big Data - The four Vs Why Big Data is
important, data, data storage and analysis, comparison with other systems, brief
history of Hadoop, apache Hadoop and the Hadoop eco system.
UNIT - II: The Hadoop Distributed File System
The design of Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS), architecture, building blocks
of Hadoop (Namenode, Datanode, Secondary Namenode, JobTracker,
TaskTracker), basic file system operations, anatomy of a file read, anatomy of a
file write.
UNIT - III: Introduction to Map Reduce
A weather dataset, analyzing weather data with UNIX tools, analyzing data with
Hadoop, Map and reduce, java map reduce, the old and new Java map reduce
APIs, data flow, combiner functions, running a distributed map reduce job.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 233

UNIT - IV: How Map Reduce works
Anatomy of a map reduce job run : job submission, job initialization, task
assignment, task execution, progress and status updates, job completion; shuffle
and sort : the map side, the reduce side.
UNIT - V: Pig
Admiring the Pig architecture, going with the Pig Latin Application Flow, working
through the ABCs of Pig Latin, evaluating local and distributed modes of running
Pig Scripts, checking out the Pig script interfaces, scripting with Pig Latin.
UNIT - VI: Hive
Getting started with apache hive, examining the hive clients, working with hive
data types, creating and managing databases and tables with hive, seeing how
the hive data manipulation language works, querying and analyzing data.
Text Books
1. Tom White, “Hadoop: The Definitive Guide”, 3rd Edition, O’Reilly.
2. Chuck Lam, “Hadoop in Action”, 1st edition ,Manning Publications.
3. Dirk deRoos, Paul C.Zikopoulos, Roman B.Melnyk,Bruce Brown, Rafael
Coss, “Hadoop for Dummies”, 1st edition, John Wiley ans Sons.
Reference Books
1. Dirk deRoos, Chris eaton, George Lapis, Paul Zikopoulos, Tom Deutsch
“Understanding Big Data Analytics for Enterprise Class Hadoop and Streaming
Data”, 1st Edition, TMH, 2012.
2. Srinath Perera, Thilina Gunarathne, “Hadoop Map Reduce Cookbook”, Packt
Publishing.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 234

Optional Elective - V
COGNITIVE RADIO NETWORKS
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce software defined radio evolution and cognitive radio.
• To make it known the characteristics of spectrum, regulation history and
issues.
• To present formally communication techniques and cognitive radio network
theory.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand concepts of software defined radio.
• define physical characteristics of spectrum and regulatory challenges.
• describe the spectrum sensing and its implications.
• differentiate different spectrum sharing schemes.
• elucidate different relay communication techniques exist.
• apply the entropy concepts to find the limits on the cognitive radio networks.
Course Content
UNIT - I : Introduction
Software defined radio, evolution of software-defined radio, cognitive radio, evolution
of cognitive radio, key applications, interoperability, dynamic spectrum access
UNIT - II : Radio Frequency Spectrum and Regulation
Spectrum: physical characteristics of spectrum and implications, regulatory history
and successes, emerging regulatory challenges and actions, regulatory issues
of cognitive access, spectrum measurements and usage, applications for spectrum
occupancy data,
UNIT - III: Spectrum Sensing and Identification
Primary signal detection: energy detector, cyclo-stationary feature detector,
matched filter, cooperative sensing, definition and implications of spectrum
opportunity, spectrum opportunity detection, fundamental trade-offs: performance
versus constraint, mac layer performance measures, global interference model,

Electronics and Communication Engineering 235

local interference model, fundamental trade-offs: sensing accuracy versus sensing
overhead.
UNIT - IV: Spectrum Access and Sharing
Unlicensed spectrum sharing, licensed spectrum sharing, secondary spectrum
access, non-real-time SSA, real-time SSA, negotiated access, possibility of quality
of service provisioning in a shared band, opportunistic access, overlay approach,
underlay approach
UNIT - V: User Cooperative Communications
User cooperation and cognitive systems, relay channels: general three-node relay
channel, wireless relay channel, user cooperation in wireless networks: two-user
cooperative network, cooperative wireless network, multihop relay channel
UNIT - VI: Information Theoretical Limits on CR Networks
Types of cognitive behavior, interference-avoiding behavior: spectrum interweave,
interference-controlled behavior: spectrum underlay, underlay in small networks:
achievable rates, underlay in large networks: scaling laws, interference-mitigating
behavior: spectrum overlay, opportunistic interference cancellation, asymmetrically
cooperating cognitive radio channels.
Text Books
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekoyee, and Y. Thomas Hou, ‘’ Cognitive
Radio Communications and Networks – Principles and Practice’’, Elsevier
Inc., 2010.
References Books
1. Kwang-Cheng Chen and Ramjee Prasad, ‘’Cognitive Radio Networks’’, John
Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2009.
2. Bruce A. Fette, ‘’Cognitive Radio Technology’’, Elsevier, 2009.
3. Joseph Mitola III,’’Software Radio Architecture: Object-Oriented Approaches
to Wireless System Engineering’’, John Wiley & Sons Ltd. 2000.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 236

Optional Elective - V
CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY
III Year – II Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce different types of security attacks and Services.
• To expose different cryptographic techniques and Algorithms.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• describe security attacks and services over networks.
• differentiate symmetric and asymmetric encryption techniques.
• apply integrity checking and authentication techniques.
• compare E-mail security and IP level security.
• use firewalls and intrusion detection techniques for system security.
• outline web security threats and counter measures.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Security Fundamentals
Security attacks, security services, security mechanisms, a model for network
security. non- cryptographic protocol vulnerabilities - session hijacking and spoofing.
software vulnerabilities - phishing, buffer overflow, format string attacks, SQL
injection.
UNIT - II: Secret Key Cryptography
Symmetric cipher model, block and stream ciphers, Data Encryption Standard
(DES), strength of DES, block cipher design principles and modes of operation,
triple DES, AES structure.
UNIT - III: Public-Key Cryptography
Public key cryptography, principles of public key crypto systems, RSA algorithm,
diffie-Hellman key exchange, introduction to elliptic curve cryptography.
UNIT - IV: Hash Functions and Digital Signatures
Cryptographic hash functions, applications of cryptographic hash functions, secure
hash algorithm, digital signatures, digital Signature schemes.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 237

UNIT - V: E-mail Security & IP Security
E-mail Security: PGP, S/MIME. IP Security: Overview, IP security architecture,
authentication header, encapsulating security payload.
UNIT - VI: Web Security & System Security
Web Security -Requirements, Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer
Security (TLS).
System Security -Firewall design principles, intrusion detection systems
Text Books
1. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network security principles and practice”
5thedition, Pearson education 2011.
2. Bernard Menezes, “Network security and cryptography”, Cengage learning
2011.
Reference Books
1. William Stallings,”Network Security Essentials”, 4th Edition, Pearson
education.
2. Eric Maiwald, “Fundamentals of Network Security”, 1st Edition,Dreamtech
press.
3. Buchmann, “Introduction to Cryptography”, Springer.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 238

 CMOS DIGITAL IC DESIGN
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize the students with the design of CMOS digital circuits.
• To make the students understand the impact of interconnects on the delay
offered by digital logic circuits.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• characterize the behaviour of CMOS inverter
• design various combinational andsequential circuits using CMOS logic
• identify different components contributing to delay offered by interconnects
• design complex digital circuits
• design memory based array structures.
Course Content
UNIT - I: The CMOS Inverter
The static CMOS inverter, static behaviour, dynamic behaviour, power, energy and
energy delay, technology scaling and its impact on the inverter metrics.
UNIT - II: Combinational Logic Design in CMOS
Static CMOS design, dynamic CMOS design, choosing a logic style, designing
logic for reduced supply voltages.
UNIT - III: Sequential Logic Design in CMOS
Timing metrics for sequential circuits, classification of memory elements, static
latches and registers, dynamic latches and registers, pipelining, non-bistable
sequential circuits.
UNIT - IV: Interconnects
Capacitive parasitics, resistive parasitics, inductive parasitics
UNIT - V: Designing Complex Digital Integrated Circuits
Standard-cell design approach, array-based design, configurable and reconfigurable
design.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 239

UNIT - VI: Designing Memory Array Structures
Semiconductor memories, memory core, memory peripheral circuitry, design of
PLA.
Text Book
1. Jan M. Rabaey, AnanthaChandrakasan, Borivoje Nikolic, “Digital Integrated
Circuits: A Design Perspective”, Pearson Education Inc., Second Edition.
Reference Books
1. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblebici “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis
and Design”, TMH Education, Third Edition, 2003.
2. David A. Hodges, Horace G. Jackson, Resve A Saleh, “Analysis and Design
of Digital Integrated Circuits” McGraw-Hill Higher Education; 3 edition (2003)
3. Amitava Dasgupta, “Digital Integrated Circuits”, NPTEL Video Course,
Department of Electrical Engineering,IIT Madras.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 240

 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60
Course Objective
• To introduce the concepts of embedded system design and to show how
such systems are developed using a concrete platform built around.
LearningOutcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• distinguish between the general computing system and the embedded system.
• differentiate general purpose processors and single purpose processors.
• model different state machines and concurrent process.
• specify different design technologies of software and hardware design.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Embedded system-definition, classification, application areas and purpose of
embedded systems, the typical embedded system-core of the embedded system,
memory, sensors and actuators, communication interface, embedded firmware.
Design challenge-optimizing design metrics, processor technology, ic technology,
design technology.
UNIT - II: Single Purpose Processors
RT-level combinational logic, sequential logic (RTlevel), custom single purpose
processor design (RT-level), optimizing custom single purpose processors.
UNIT - III: General Purpose Processors
Basic architecture, operation, pipelining, programmer’s view, development
environment, Application Specific Instruction-Set Processors (ASIPs) –
MicroControllers and Digital Signal Processors.
UNIT - IV: State Machine And Concurrent Process Models
Introduction, models Vs languages, finite state machines with data path model
(FSMD), using state machines, program state machine model (PSM), concurrent
process model.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 241

UNIT - V: Interfacing
Communication basics, arbitration, multilevel bus architectures, advanced
communication principles
UNIT - VI: Design Technology
Automation: Synthesis- parallel evolution of compilation and synthesis, synthesis
levels, logic synthesis, RT synthesis, behavioral Synthesis, systems synthesis
and Hardware/ Software Co-Design, verification: Hardware/Software co-simulation
Text Books
1. Frank Vahid, Tony D. Givargis, “Embedded System Design - A Unified
Hardware/Software Introduction”, John Wiley, 2002. (Unit II to VI).
2. Shibu.K.V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems” Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited, 2009 (Unit I).
Reference Books
1. Raj kamal, “Embedded Systems”, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2008.
2. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier Publications,
2005.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 242

 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 3 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To imparte the basic characteristics and errors associated with the
instruments.
• To familiarize with different types of electronic instruments.
• To introduce the essential components of industrial instruments and their
usage.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• classify the instruments based on static and dynamic characteristics.
• analyze the frequency component of a generated wave and its distortion
• learn the concepts of active and passive transducers.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Fundamentals of measurements
Performance characteristics of instruments, static characteristics- accuracy,
resolution, precision, expected value, error, sensitivity, errors in measurement;
dynamic characteristics- speed of response, fidelity, lag and dynamic error; DC
Volt meters-multi-range, AC voltmeters- multi range, DC ammeter, Aryton shunt,
Ohmmeters -series and shunt type.
UNIT - II: Digital Instruments
Ramp technique, dual slope integrating type DVM (Voltage to Time Conversion),
integrating type DVM (Voltage to Frequency Conversion), successive
approximations, digital ph meter, digital measurement of frequency, phase, speed
and capacitance.
UNIT - III: Signal Generators and oscilloscopes
Fixed and variable, standard and AF sine and square wave; function generators-
square, pulse, sweep; random noise, Dual beam, Dual trace and digital storage
Oscilloscope.
UNIT - IV: Bridges and Analyzers
Wheat stone bridge, Maxwell’s bridge, Schering bridge, Wien bridge, Q-meter,
wave analyzers, harmonic distortion analyzers, spectrum analyzers, FFT analyzer.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 243

UNIT - V: Transducers
Selecting a transducer, resistive, capacitive and inductive transducers priciples,
frequency generating transducers, reluctance pulse pickups, photo electric
transducer, flow measurement transducers.
UNIT - VI: Industrial Transducers
Strain gauges, LVDT, load cell, piezoelectric transducer, thermocouples,
thermistors, resistance temperature detector, data acquisition systems.
Text Books
1. A.D. Helfrick and W.D.Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
Measurement Techniques”, PHI, 5th Edition, 2002.
2. H.S.Kalsi, “Electronic Instrumentation”, TMH, 2nd Edition, 2004.
Reference Books
1. David A. Bell, “Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements”, PHI, 2nd Edition,
2003.
2. A K. Sawhney , “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements &
Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & Co., 2015.
3. Golding & Waddis, “Electrical Measurement and Measuring Instruments”
Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 244

Professional Elective - III
MIXED SIGNAL IC DESIGN
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
The student will be introduced to the
• basic principles of switched capacitor circuits and PLL applications.
• Understand the specifications and architectures of data converters, mixed
signal layout issues.
• advanced CMOS logic design and different building blocks of digital integrated
circuits.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the switched capacitor circuits.
• explore the fundamentals and different architectures of ADCs and DACs,
mixed signal layout issues.
• use PLLs for various applications.
• characterize various digital IC building blocks.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Switched Capacitor Circuits
General considerations, sampling switches, MOSFET as a switch, speed
considerations, precision considerations, charge injection cancellation, switched
capacitor amplifiers-unity gain sampler/buffer, non inverting amplifier, precision
multiply by two circuit, switched capacitor integrator, switched capacitor common
mode feedback.
UNIT - II: Data Converter Fundamentals
Analog verses discrete time signals, converting analog signals to digital signals,
sample and hold characteristics, digital to analog converter specifications, analog
to digital converter specifications, VLSI layout, layout steps, mixed signal layout
issues.
UNIT - III: DAC Architectures
Digital input code, resistor string, R-2R ladder networks, current steering, charge
scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC, Pipeline DAC.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 245

UNIT - IV: ADC Architectures
Flash, the two step flash ADC, the pipeline ADC, integrating ADCs, the successive
approximation ADC, the oversampling ADC.
UNIT - V: Phase-Locked Loop
Simple PLL, phase detector, basic PLL topology, charge pump PLLs, problem of
lock acquisition, phase/frequency detector and charge pump, basic charge pump
PLL, jitter in PLLs, delay locked loops, applications-frequency multiplication, skew
reduction, jitter reduction.
UNIT - VI: Advanced CMOS Logic Design
Domino–CMOS logic, No Race logic, differential CMOS, dynamic differential CMOS,
digital integrated system building blocks-multiplexers and decoders, barrel shifters,
counters, digital adders, digital multipliers.
Text Books
1. Behzad Razavi (2002), Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, TMH
Edition.
2. R. Jacob Baker (2003), CMOS Circuit Design, layout and simulation, PHI
3. Ken Martin (2002), Digital integrated circuit design, Oxford university press.
Reference Books
1. David A. Johns, Ken Martin (2013), Analog Integrated Circuit Design, Wiley
Student Edition.
2. R. Jacob Baker (2009), CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design, Wiley Wiley
Student Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 246

Professional Elective - III
CELLULAR AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce various issues of cellular radio system design.
• To expose students to different types of interferences occurred in cellular
systems.
• To familiarize the students to various multiple access techniques and wireless
systems.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the characteristics of radio environment.
• apply the concepts of frequency reuse and cell splitting to increase the
capacity of cellular system.
• analyse different interferences in a cell to improve the performance of the
system.
• create a cellular system model for a given region considering terrain
configuration.
• design an efficient frequency management and channel assignment scheme
by selecting proper handoff mechanism.
• conceptualize GSM and multiple access schemes.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Cellular Mobile Radio Systems
Introduction to cellular mobile system, performance criteria, uniqueness of mobile
radio environment, operation of cellular systems, analog cellular systems.
UNIT - II: Elements of Cellular Radio System Design
Concept of frequency reuse, co-channel interference reduction factor, desired C/
I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna system, cell splitting,
consideration of the components of cellular system.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 247

UNIT - III: Interference
Introduction to co-channel interference, real time co-channel interference, design
of antenna system, antenna parameters and their effects, diversity receiver, non-
cochannel interference.
UNIT - IV: Cell Coverage for Signal and Traffic
Signal reflections in flat and hilly terrain, effect of human made structures, phase
difference between direct and reflected paths, constant standard deviation, straight
line path loss slope, general formula for mobile propagation over water and flat
open area, near and long distance propagation antenna height gain, form of a
point to point model.
UNIT - V: Frequency Management and Channel Assignment
Numbering and grouping, setup, access and paging channels, channel
assignments to cell sites and mobile units, channel sharing and borrowing, underlay-
overlay arrangement, non fixed channel assignment.
Handoff Mechanism: Dropped call rates, types of handoff initiation, and types
of handoff, and vehicle locating methods.
UNIT - VI: Digital Cellular Networks
GSM architecture, GSM channels, multiplex access schemes – FDMA, TDMA,
CDMA
Text Books
1. W.C.Y. Lee, “Mobile Cellular Telecommunications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd
Edition; 2006.(Units: I to V)
2. Theodore. S. Rapport, “Wireless Communications”, Pearson Education, 2nd
Edition;2002. (Unit: VI)
Reference Books
1. Jon W. Mark and Weihua Zhqung, “Wireless Communication and Networking”,
PHI, 2005.
2. R. Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology”, R. Blake, Thompson Asia
Pvt. Ltd., 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 248

Professional Elective - III
DIGITAL TV ENGINEERING
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the television standards and TV signal transmission.
• To introduce the concepts of digital TV engineering.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand color Television standards and their specifications.
• conceptualize the operation of color Television system.
• find the applications of Digital TV.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to TV Standards
Standard scanning sequence, line frequency and frame frequency, Video band
width, composite video signal, blanking, synchronizing and equalizing pulses.
CCIR-B Standard specifications.
UNIT - II: Colour Television
Block diagram of colour TV receiver, PAL – D decoder, Separation of U and Vsignals,
Color burst separation and Burst phase discriminator, Indent and color killer circuits,
U & V demodulators, Colour signal mixing.
UNIT - III: Sync Separation and AFC
AGC, Keyed AGC and noise cancellation, Synchronous separation, K noise in
sync pulses and separation of frame and line sync pulses, Deflection Oscillators.
UNIT - IV: Digital Television Transmission Standards
ATSC terrestrial transmission standard, vestigial sideband modulation, DVB -T
transmission standard, ISDB-T transmission standard, channel allocations,
antenna height and power, MPEG-2.
UNIT - V: Performance Objectives for Digital Television
System noise, external noise sources, transmission errors, error vector magnitude,
eye pattern, interference, co-channel interference, adjacent channel interference,
analog to digital TV, transmitter requirements.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 249

UNIT - VI: Television Applications
Remote control circuit, CCTV systems, video tape recording and playback circuit,
HDTV, TV via satellite, Remote Control, DTH system.
Text Books
1. R.R.Gulati, “Monochrome Television Practice, Principles, Technology and
servicing.” Third Edition 2006, New Age International Publishers.(Units:I toIII,VI)
2. Gerald W. Collins, “Fundamentals of Digital Television Transmission”, John
Wiley, 2001.(Units: IV to VI)
Reference Books
1. A.M Dhake, “Television and Video Engineering”, 2nd ed., TMH, 2003.
2. R.P.Bali, “Color Television, Theory and Practice”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1994.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 250

Professional Elective - III
DSP PROCESSORS AND ARCHITECTURES
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the Architecture and interfacing of TMS320C54XX
processors.
• Conversant with applications of DSP processors.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply the concepts of Sampling, DFT and Filters.
• calculate DSP computational Errors.
• identify the Architectural features of DSP processors.
• interface I/O and memory devices with DSP Processors.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Computational Accuracy in DSP Implementations
Number formats for signals and coefficients in DSP systems, dynamic range and
precision, sources of error in DSP implementations, A/D Conversion errors, DSP
computational errors, D/A conversion errors, compensating filter.
UNIT - II: Architectures for Programmable DSP Devices
Basic architectural features, DSP computational building blocks, bus architecture
and memory, data addressing capabilities, address generation unit,
programmability and program execution, speed issues, features for external
interfacing.
UNIT - III: Programmable Digital Signal Processors – TMS320C54XX
Data addressing modes, memory space, program control, instructions and
programming, on-chip peripherals, interrupts pipeline operation.
UNIT - IV: Analog Devices Family of DSP Devices
Analog devices family of DSP devices-ALU and MAC block diagram, shifter
instruction, base architecture of ADSP 2100, ADSP-2181 high performance
processor.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 251

UNIT - V: Blackfin Processor
Introduction to Blackfin processor-The Blackfin Processor, introduction to micro
signal architecture, overview of hardware processing units and register files,
address arithmetic unit, control unit, bus architecture and memory, basic
peripherals.
UNIT - VI: Applications of Programmable DSP Devices
Introduction, DSP- based biotelemetry receiver: Pulse Position Modulation,
decoding scheme for the PPM Receiver, biotelemetry receiver implementation,
ECG signal processing for heart rate determination, brain tumor detection using
DSP processor.
Text Books
1. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan –,”Digital Signal Processing” , Thomson
Publications, 2004.
2. K Padmanabahan, R.Vijayarajeswaran, Ananthi. S, “A practical Approach to
Digital Signal Processing”, New Age International, 2006/2009
Reference Books
1. Woon-SengGan, Sen M. Kuo, “Embedded Signal Processing with the Micro
signal Architecture”, Wiley - IEEE Press, 2007.
2. B. Venkataramani and M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors, Architecture,
Programming and Applications”, 2004, TMH.
3. Jonatham Stein, “Digital Signal Processing”, John Wiley, 2005.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 252

Professional Elective - IV
SYSTEM ON CHIP DESIGN
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To provide an overview on System-On-Chip design technology.
• To introduce components in a typical SoC system.
• To familiarize with the concept of different processor cores.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand architecture designs and their design issues, Core Libraries and
EDA Tools required for SoC Design.
• explore design methodology for Logic Cores, Soft and Hard Cores, Memory
and Analog Cores.
• perform SoC Design validation, prototyping and verification.
• design SoCs for various applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Architecture Designs
Architecture and Design Issues of SoC, Hardware Software Co-Design, Co-Design
Flow, Core Libraries, EDA Tools and Web Pointers.
UNIT - II: Design Methodology for Logic Cores
SoC Design Flow, Guidelines for Design Reuse, Synchronous Design, Memory
and Mixed-Signal Design, On-Chip Buses, Clock Distribution, Clear/Set/Reset
Signals, Physical Design, Deliverable Models
UNIT - III: Design Process for Soft and Firm Cores
Design Flow, Design Process for Hard Cores, Sign-Off Checklist, Deliverables –
Soft Core and Hard Core, System Integration – Designing with Hard Cores,
Designing with Soft Cores, System Verification.
UNIT - IV: Design Methodology for Memory Cores and Analog Cores
Memory Cores: Embedded Memories and Design Methodology, Specifications of
Analog Circuits, Circuit Techniques, Memory Compiler, Simulation Models.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 253

Analog Cores: Analog-To-Digital Converter, Digital-To-Analog Converter, Phase-
Locked Loops, High Speed Circuits
UNIT - V: Design Validation
Core-Level Validation, Core Validation Plan, Test Benches, Core-Level Timing
Verification, Core Interface Verification, Protocol Verification, Gate-Level Simulation,
SoC Design Validation, Co-Simulation, Emulation, Hardware Prototypes.
UNIT - VI: Core and SoC Design Examples
Micro Processor Cores, V830 R/AV Super Scalar RISC Core, Design Of Power
PC 603e G2 Core, Memory Core Generators, Core Integration And On-Chip Bus,
Examples Of Soc, Media Processors, And Testability Of Set-Top Box SoC.
Text Book
1. Rochit Raj Suman,”System-on-a-chip: Design and Test”, Artech House, 2000
Reference Books
1. Jason Andrews – Newness”Co-Verification of Hardware and Software for ARM
System on Chip Design (Embedded Technology) “, BK and CDROM.
2. Prakash Rashinkar, Peter Paterson and Leena Singh L “System on Chip
Verification – Methodologies and Techniques”, Kluwer Academic Publishers,
2001.
3. Ricardo Reis,”Design of System on a Chip: Devices and Components”, 1st
Ed., Springer 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 254

Professional Elective - IV
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To understand the design issues in ad hoc and sensor networks.
• To familiarize the architecture, protocols of wireless sensor networks.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain the concepts, network architectures and applications of ad hoc and
wireless sensor Networks
• analyse the protocol design issues of ad hoc and sensor networks.
• design routing protocols for ad hoc and wireless sensor networks with respect
to some protocol design issues.
• evaluate the QoS related performance measurements of ad hoc and sensor
networks.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Fundamentals of wireless communication technology- the electromagnetic
spectrum, radio propagation mechanisms, characteristics of the wireless channel,
applications of Ad Hoc and Sensor networks, design challenges in Ad hoc and
Sensor Networks.
UNIT - II: Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations
Personal area networks, hidden node problem, exposed node problem, topologies
of PAN’S, topologies of MANETS, topologies of WANETS.
UNIT - III: MAC Protocols For Ad Hoc Wireless Networks
Issues in designing a MAC Protocol- classification of MAC protocols- contention
based protocols-contention based protocols with reservation mechanisms
contention-based protocols with scheduling mechanisms – multi channel
MACIEEE 802.11.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 255

UNIT - IV: Routing Protocols and Transport Layer in Ad Hoc Wireless
Networks
Issues in designing a routing and transport layer protocol for Ad hoc networks
proactive routing, reactive routing (on-demand), hybrid routing- classification of
transport layer solutions-TCP over Ad hoc wireless networks.
UNIT - V: Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs) and MAC Protocols
Sensor network architecture, data relaying and aggregation strategies, MAC layer
protocols: self-organizing, hybrid TDMA/FDMA and CSMA based MAC- IEEE
802.15.4.
UNIT - VI: Sensor Network Platforms and Tools
Sensor node hardware–Berkeley motes, programming challenges, node-level
software platforms, node-level simulators, state-centric programming.
Application of WSN: Ultrawide band radio communication, wireless fidelity
systems. future directions, home automation, smart metering applications.
Text Books
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy, and B. S. Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks:
Architectures and Protocols “, Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference,
2008.
2. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless
Sensor Networks”, Wiley, 2005.
Reference Books
1. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, “Ad Hoc & Sensor
Networks: Theory and Applications”, World Scientific Publishing Company,
2006.
2. Feng Zhao and Leonides Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks”, Elsevier
Publication - 2002.
3. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor
NetworksTechnology, Protocols, and Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
4. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 256

Professional Elective - IV
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce fundamentals of satellite communications, satellite launching
vehicles and subsystems of the satellite.
• To familiarize link design in satellite communications, multiple access
techniques and GPS.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• demonstrate the knowledge of orbital parameters and satellite launching
techniques.
• compare the role of various satellite subsystems.
• design satellite link for required specifications.
• understand the coordination of earth stations for efficient utilization of the
satellite by means of multiple accessing techniques.
• develop a virtual satellite earth station.
• navigate the receiving station by global positioning system.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
A brief history of satellite communications, orbital mechanics and launchers: orbital
mechanics, look angle determination, orbital perturbations, orbit determination,
launches and launch vehicles, orbital effects in communication systems
performance.
UNIT - II: Satellite Subsystems
Attitude and orbit control system, telemetry, tracking, command and monitoring,
power systems, communication subsystems.
UNIT - III: Satellite Link Design
Basic transmission theory, system noise temperature and G/T ratio, design of
down links, up link design, design of satellite links for specified C/N, system
design example.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 257

UNIT - IV: Multiple Access
Frequency division multiple access (FDMA), intermodulation, calculation of C/N.
Time division Multiple Access (TDMA), frame structure, examples, satellite
switched TDMA. onboard processing, DAMA, code division multiple access
(CDMA), spread spectrum transmission and reception.
UNIT - V: VSAT Systems
Introduction, overview of VSAT systems, network architectures, access control
protocols, basic techniques, VSAT earth station engineering.
UNIT - VI: Satellite Navigation & The Global Positioning System
Radio and satellite navigation, GPS position location principles, GPS receivers
and codes, satellite signal acquisition, GPS navigation message, GPS signal
levels, GPS receiver operation, GPS C/A code accuracy, differential GPS.
Text Books
1. Timothy Pratt, Charles Bostian and Jeremy Allnutt “Satellite
Communications”, 2nd Edition John Wiley India, 2006.
2. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Robert A Nelson and Henri G. Suyderhoud “Satellite
Communications Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Publications, 2003.
Reference Books
1. M. Richharia “Satellite Communications: Design Principles”, BS Publications,
2nd Edition, 2003.
2. D.C Agarwal “Satellite Communication”, Khanna Publications, 5th Edition.
3. K.N. Raja Rao “Fundamentals of Satellite Communications”, PHI, 2004
4. Dennis Roddy “Satellite Communications”, McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 1996.
5. G.S.Rao “Global navigation satellite systems-with essentials of satellite
systems”, McGrawHill.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 258

Professional Elective - IV
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce fundamental concepts of image processing and different
operations on image elements.
• To expose to the practical problems associated with processing of an image.
• To familiarize with advanced image processing operations.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the need for image transforms, types and their properties.
• process the images for the enhancement of certain properties or for optimized
use of the resources.
• explore causes for image degradation and to develop various restoration
techniques.
• evaluate the image compression techniques
Course Content
UNIT - I: Fundamentals of Image Processing and Image Transforms
Introduction, fundamental steps in image processing, components of image
processing system, image sensing and acquisition, image formation model,
image sampling and quantization, pixel relationships, image distance measures.
Image Transforms - Need for image transforms, properties of DFT, Discrete
Cosine Transform, Hadamard transform, Walsh transform, Haar transform, Slant
transform.
UNIT - II: Image Enhancement
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations, histogram processing, spatial filtering
smoothing and sharpening. Frequency Domain: Filtering in frequency domain –
smoothing and sharpening filters, homomorphic Filtering.
UNIT - III: Image Restoration
Image degradation model, noise modeling, image restoration in the presence of
only noise-mean filters, order statistic filters, band reject filters, band pass filters,
notch filter inverse filter, wiener filter.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 259

UNIT - IV: Image Segmentation and Morphology
Detection of discontinuities, edge detection, threshold based segmentation, region
based segmentation – region growing, region splitting and merging.
Morphology: dilation, erosion, opening and closing, hit or miss transformation,
basic morphological algorithms.
UNIT - V: Image Compression
Image Compression: Fundamentals, image compression model, types of
redundancy, variable length coding, arithmetic coding, LZW coding, bit-plane
coding, runlength coding.
UNIT - VI: Color Image Processing
Color Image Processing: Color fundamentals, color models-RGB,CMYK and
HSI, color transformations.
Applications of Image Processing: Content based image retrieval systems,
digital watermarking, image mosaicing and image compositing.
Text Books
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd
edition, Pearson Eduction, 2003.(Units: I-V except image transforms)
2. S.Sridhar, “Digital Image Processing”,Oxford University Press,2011. (Unit-I
image transforms and Unit-VI).
Reference Books
1. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of
India,2nd edition 2004.
2. S.Jayaraman, “Digital Image Processing”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 260

Open Elective - IV
DISASTER MANAGEMENT
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with disaster occurrence, strategies and remedial measures.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• explain the aspects of disaster management and various types of disasters.
• assess and evaluate the impact of hazards on structures.
• identify the vulnerability conditions against disasters.
• adopt the rehabilitation procedures.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Concept of Disaster Management.Types of Disasters.Disaster mitigating
agenciesand their organizational structure at different levels.
UNIT - II: Overview of Disaster Situations in India
Vulnerability of profile of India and Vulnerability mapping including disaster – prone
areas, communities, places. Disaster preparedness – ways and means; skillsand
strategies; rescue, relief reconstruction. Case Studies: Lessons andExperiences
from Various Important Disasters in India
UNIT - III: Flood and Drought Disaster
Raising flood damage, assessing flood risk, flood hazard assessment, flood
impactassessment, flood risk reduction options. Drought and development,
reliefmanagement and prevention, drought mitigation and management-
integratingtechnology and people.
UNIT - IV: Landslide and Earthquake Disaster
Land slide hazards zonation mapping and geo environmental problems
associatedwith the occurrence of landslides. The use of electrical resistivity method
in thestudy of landslide.Causes and effects of earth quakes. Secondary effects.
Criteria for earthquake resistant design.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 261

UNIT - V: Cyclone and Fire Disaster
Cyclone occurrence and hazards.Cyclone resistant house for coastal
areas.Disaster resistant construction role of insurance sector.Types of fire. Fire
safetyand fire fighting method, fire detectors , fire extinguishers.
UNIT - VI: Rehabilitation
Rehabilitation programmes, Management of Relief Camp, information systems
&decision making tools
Text Books
1. Disaster Management – Future Challenges and Opportunities, Jagbir Singh,
2007, I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2. Disaster Management – Global Challenges and Local Solutions, Rajib shah
& R R Krishnamurthy, 2009, Universities press.
Reference Books
1. Disaster Science & Management, Tushar Bhattacharya, 2012, Tata McGraw
Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Disaster Management, H K Gupta, 2003, Universities press.
3. Natural Disaster management, Jon Ingleton, Leigh Trowbridge,1999, Tudor
Rose Holdings Ltd.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 262

Open Elective - IV
REPAIR AND RETROFITTING TECHNIQUES
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with durability aspects, quality of concrete causes of
deterioration.
• To impart the knowledge on inspection and assessment of distressed
structures, strengthen measures and demolition procedures.
• To familiarize with various concrete materials for repairs, and various
precautions during retrofitting.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify and evaluate the degree of damage in structures.
• explain the cause of deterioration of concrete structures.
• point out the causes of distress in concrete
• explain the concept of Serviceability and Durability.
• assess damage to structures and select suitable retrofitting and repair
techniques
• apply different materials for repairing
Course Content
UNIT - I: Assessment, Maintenance and Repair Strategies
Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation, Facets of Maintenance, importance of
Maintenance, Various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating
a damaged structure, causes of deterioration.
UNIT - II: Serviceability and Durability of Concrete
Quality assurance for concrete – Strength, Durability and Thermal properties, of
concrete Cracks, different types, causes – Effects due to climate, temperature,
Sustained elevated temperature, Corrosion - Effects of cover thickness and cracking.
UNIT - III: Materials for Repair
Special concretes and mortar, concrete chemicals, special elements for
accelerated strength gain, Expansive cement, polymer concrete, sulphur infiltrated
concrete, Ferro cement, Fibre reinforced concrete.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 263

UNIT - IV: Techniques for Repair and Protection Methods
Rust eliminators and polymers coating for rebars during repair, foamed concrete,
mortar and dry pack, vacuum concrete, Gunite and Shotcrete, Expoxy injection,
Mortar repair for cracks, shoring and underpinning. Methods of corrosion protection,
corrosion inhibitors, corrosion resistant steels, coatings and catholic protection.
Engineered demolition techniques for dilapidated structures.
UNIT - V: Repair, Rehabilitation and Retrofitting of Structures
Repairs to overcome low member strength.Deflection, Cracking, Chemical
disruption, weathering corrosion, wear, fire, leakage and marine exposure.
UNIT - VI: Work Site Safety
General safety-vehicles, eye and ear protection, clothing; Tool safety-drills and
bits, power saws, power mixers, ladders, screwdrivers and chisels; co-worker
safety.
Text Books
1. Concrete Structures, Materials, Maintenance and Repair, Denison Campbell,
Allen and Harold Roper, edition-1991, Longman Scientific and Technical
UK.
2. Repair of Concrete Structures, Allen R.T. & Edwards S.C, edition-1991 Blakie
and Sons, UK.
Reference Books
1. Concrete Technology-Theory and Practice, M.S.Shetty, Edition-2006 S.Chand
and Company.
2. Structural Health Monitoring, Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures,
Ravishankar.K, Krishnamoorthy.T.S, Edition-2004, Allied Publishers.
3. Hand book on Seismic Retrofit of Buildings, CPWD and Indian Buildings
Congress, Narosa Publishers Edition-2004.
4. Hand book on Repair and Rehabilitation of RCC buildings, Published by
CPWD, Delhi, Edition-2002.
5. Repair and protection of concrete structures, Noel P.Mailvaganam, Edition-
1991 CRC Press London.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 264

Open Elective - IV
MODERN OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the concepts of evolutionary optimization
• To introduce the principles of soft computing optimization algorithes such as
Genetic Algorithm, Particle Swarm Optimization, Differential Evolution and
Ant Colony Optimization.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• distinguish the various optimization techniques.
• describe the concepts of various optimization techniques.
• develop suitable algorithms for the implementation of optimization techniques.
• apply suitable optimization technique to solve various engineering optimization
problems
Course Content
UNIT - I: Definition-Classification Of Optimization Problems
Unconstrained and Constrained optimization-Optimality conditions, Evolution in
nature-Fundamentals of Evolutionary algorithms- Evolutionary Strategy and
Evolutionary Programming.
UNIT - II: Genetic Algorithm
Basic concepts- search space- working principle -encoding-fitness function -
Genetic Operators-Selection: Roulette-wheel, Boltzmann, Tournament, Rank and
Steadystate-Elitism- Crossover: single-pint, two-point, multi-point, uniform, matrix
and cross over rate, mutation, mutation rate.
UNIT - III: Variations of GA & PSO
Variations of GA: Adaptive GA and Real coded GA - Issues in GA implementation-
Particle Swarm Optimization: Introduction- Fundamental principles of Particle
Swarm Optimization-Velocity Updating-Advanced operators-Parameter selection.
UNIT - IV: Variations of PSO
Implementation issues-Convergence issues, Multi-objective PSO (Dynamic
neighbourhood PSO-Vector evaluated PSO)-Variations of PSO: weighted, repulsive,
stretched, comprehensive learning, combined effect PSO and clonal PSO.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 265

UNIT - V: Differential Evolution
Introduction-Fundamental principles of Differential Evolution- different strategies
of differential evolution-function optimization formulation-mutation and crossover
operators-estimation and selection-Discrete Differential Evolution.
UNIT - VI: Ant Colony Optimization
Introduction-Fundamental principles of Ant colony optimization-Ant foraging
behaviour-initialization-transition strategy-pheromone update rule- applications.
Text Books
1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Multi objective optimization using Evolutionary
Algorithms”,John Wiley and Sons, 2008.
2. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms in search, Optimization and machine
learning,1989
3. Particle Swarm Optimization, An overview by Riccardo Poli, James
Kennedy,Tim Blackwell, pringer
4. Differential Evolution, A Practical Approach to Global Optimization,
Authors:Price, Kenneth, Storn, Rainer M., Lampinen, Jouni A. , Springer
5. Ant Colony Optimization by Marco Dorigo, Thomas Stutzle, MIT Press.
Reference Books
1. “Modern optimization techniques with applications in Electric Power Systems”,
Soliman Abdel Hady, Abdel Aal Hassan Mantawy, Springer,2012.
2. ‘Introduction to Genetic Algorithms”, M. Mitchell, Indian reprint, MIT press
Cambridge, 2nd edition, 2002.
3. R.C. Eberhart, Y.Sai and J. Kennedy, Swarm Intelligence , The Morgan
Kaufmann Series in Artificial Intelligence, 2001.
4. “Biomimicry for optimization, Control and Automation, K.M. Passino, Springer-
Verlag, London, UK, 2005.
5. “New Optimization Techniques in Engineering, G. C. Onwubolu, & B. V.
Babu,Springer- Verlag Publication, Germany, 2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 266

Open Elective - IV
ELECTRICAL POWER UTILIZATION
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the mechanics of train movement.
• To impart knowledge on various heating methods and laws of illumination.
• To familiarize with the concepts of refrigeration and air-conditioning.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze the appropriate type of traction system.
• select a suitable method of heating for a given application.
• design an illumination system.
• calculate the required tonnage capacity for a given air-conditioning system.
• select a suitable charging method.
• evaluate domestic wiring connection and debug any faults occured.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Electrical Traction
Features of an Ideal Traction System, Systems of Electrical Traction, Traction
Supply System, Mechanism of Train Movement, Speed- Time Curve, Traction
Motors, Tractive Effort and Horse Power, Speed Control Schemes, Electric
Braking,Recent Trends in Traction.
UNIT - II: Electric Heating
Classification, Heating Element, Losses in Oven and Efficiency, Resistance
Furnace, Radiant Heating, Induction Heating, High Frequency Eddy Current
Heating, Dielectric Heating, Arc Furnace, Heating of Furnace, Electric Welding,
Methods and Equipments.
UNIT - III: Illumination
Radiant Energy, Terms and Definitions, Laws of Illumination, Polar Curves,
Photometry, MSCP, Integrating Sphere, Luminous Efficacy, Electrical Lamps,
Design of Interior and Exterior Lighting Systems, Illumination Levels for Various
Purposes, Light Fittings, Factory Lighting, Flood Lighting, Street Lighting, Energy
Conservation in Lighting.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 267

UNIT - IV: Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Control of Temperature, Protection of Motors, Simple Heat-Load and Motor
Calculations, Various Types of Air Conditioning, Functioning of Complete Air
Conditioning System, Type of Compressor Motor, Cool Storage, Estimation of
Tonnage Capacity and Motor Power.
UNIT - V: Electro-Chemical Processes
Electrolysis – Electroplating – Electro deposition – Extraction of metals current,
Efficiency - Batteries – types – Charging Methods.
UNIT - VI: Basics of Domestic Electrical Wiring
Types of Cables, Flexible Wires Sizes and Current Capacity, Use of Fuse, MCB
and MCCB (Working and Construction), Idea about Megger, Earthling – Domestic
and Industrial.
Text Books
1. “Utilisation of Electric Energy” Garg and Girdhar, 1982, Khanna Publisher.
2. “Art and Science of Utilization of Electrical Energy”, Pratab H., Second Edition,
Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi.
Reference Books
1. “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy”,Wadhwa C.L.,
1993, Wiley Eastern Limited,
2. “Electric Energy Utilization and Conservation”, S.C.Tripathy, 1993, Tata
McGraw Hill.
3. “Utilization of Electric Power”, R.K. Rajaput,Laxmi Publications, 1st Edition,
2007.
4. “Utilization of Electric Power”, N.V.Suryanarayana, New Age International, 2005.
5. “Generation, Distribution and Utilization of Electrical Energy, C.L.Wadhwa,
New Age International, 4th Edition, 2011.
6. Refrigiration and Air-conditioning, M. Prasad, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1995 .
7. “Utilization of Electrical Energy”, Taylor E. Openshaw, 1968, Orient Longman.
8. “Utilization of Electric Power and Electric Traction”, Gupta J. B., 2002, S. K.
Kataria and Sons.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 268

Open Elective - IV
GREEN ENGINEERING
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the knowledge needed to minimize impacts of products, processes
on environment for sustainable development.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• evaluate the impact of technology on environment
• compare biological ecology to industrial ecology
• design eco friendly product.
• create sustainable products, facilities, processes and infrastructure
• asses the life cycle of a product to evaluate its impact on energy and materials
use
• determine the effects of air and water quality
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Humanity and technology, the concept of sustainability, quantifying sustainability,
industrial ecology
UNIT - II: Frame work for green engineering
The relevance of biological ecology to industrial ecology, metabolic analysis,
technology and risk, the social dimensions of industrial ecology.
UNIT - III: Implementation
Technological product development,design for environment and sustainability-
customer products- buildings and infrastructure.
UNIT - IV: Life Cycle Assessment
An introduction to life cycle assessment, the LCA impact and interpretation stages,
streamlining the LCA process.
UNIT - V: Analysis of Technological Systems-material flow and energy
Systems Analysis, industrial ecosystems, material flow analysis, energy and
industrial ecology,
Electronics and Communication Engineering 269
UNIT - VI: Analysis of Technological Systems-air-water
Air quality impacts, carbon cycles and energy balance, water quality impacts,
urban industrial ecology, modelling in industrial ecology.
Text Books
1. T E Graedel, Braden R Allenby “Industrial ecology and sustainable engineering”
Prentice Hall.
2. David T. Allen, David R Shonnard “Sustainable Engineering Concepts, Design
and Case Studies” Prentice Hall.
References Books
1. Bradley A. Striebig, Adebayo A. Ogundipe, Maria Papadakis “Engineering
applications in sustainable design and development” Cengage Learning.
2. Anastas, Paul T, Zimmerman, Julie B, “Innovations in Green Chemistry and
Green Engineering”, Springer, First Edition.
3. Daniel A. Vallero, Chris Brasier, “Sustainable Design: The Science of
Sustainability and Green Engineering”, Wiley, First Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 270

Open Elective - IV
NON DESTRUCTIVE EVALUATION
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the concepts of various NDE techniques to identify the
defect in a mechanical elements.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• choose a suitable non destructive method to find the defect in the given
mechanical components using radiography, ultrasonic test, magnetic particle
test etc.,
UNIT - I: Introduction to Non-Destructive Testing
Radiographic test, Sources of X and Gamma Rays and their interaction with Matter,
Radiographic equipment, Radiographic Techniques, Safety Aspects of Industrial
Radiography
UNIT - II: Ultrasonics Test
Principle of Wave Propagation, Reflection, Refraction, Diffraction, Mode Conversion
and Attenuation, Sound Field, Piezo-electric Effect, Ultrasonic Transducers and
their Characteristics, Ultrasonic Equipment and Variables Affecting Ultrasonic
Test, Ultrasonic Testing, Interpretations and Guidelines for Acceptance, Rejection
- Effectiveness and Limitations of Ultrasonic Testing.
UNIT - III: Liquid Penetrant Test
Liquid Penetrant Test, Basic Concepts, Liquid Penetrant System, Test Procedure,
Effectiveness and Limitations of Liquid Penetrant Testing
UNIT - IV: Magnetic Particle Test
Magnetic Materials, Magnetization of Materials, Demagnetization of
Materials,Principle of Magnetic Particle Test, Magnetic Particle Test Equipment,
Magnetic Particle Test Procedure, Standardization and Calibration, Interpretation
and Evaluation, Effective Applications and Limitations of the Magnetic Particle
Test.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 271

UNIT - V: Eddy Current Test
Principle of Eddy Current, Eddy Current Test System, Applications of Eddy Current
Testing Effectiveness of Eddy Current Testing
UNIT - VI: Industrial Applications of NDE
Span of NDE Activities Railways, Chemical Industries, Automotive Industries, NDE
of pressure vessels, castings, welded constructions.
Text Books
1. Non-Destructive Test and Evaluation of Materials, J Prasad, GCK Nair, TMH
Publishers.
2. Ultrasonic Testing by Krautkramer and Krautkramer.
3. Non-Destructive Testing, Warress, JMc Gonmade.
References Books
1. Ultrasonic inspection training for NDT: E. A. Gingel, Prometheus Press.
2. ASTM Standards, Vol 3.01, Metals and alloys.
3. Non-Destructive, Hand Book – R. Hamchand.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 272

Open Elective - IV
CYBER PHYSICAL SYSTEMS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To prototype the Smart objects and provides a holistic understanding of
development Platforms, connected products of Internet of things (IoTs).
• To familiarize with real World IoT Design Constraints, Industrial Automation
and Commercial Building Automation in IoT.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• develop prototypes using appropriate Platforms of internet-connected products.
• assess and improve the reliability & security of a simple Cyber-Physical
System.
• differentiate various methodologies and tools of automatic synthesis of controls
and software
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Cyber physical System
Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS); history; key features; CPs design challenges;
model-based design and design methodologies; simulation, validation, verification,
and synthesis; platform-based design and contract-based design.
UNIT - II: Modeling
Introduction to models of computation; languages and tools for system design;
mathematical background; notions of complexity and computability, finite state
machines; synchronous/reactive model.
UNIT - III: Analysis
Cyber-Physical System requirements (functional, extra-functional, safety, liveness,
reliability, real-time); specification languages; temporal logic; overview of
requirement analysis and validation techniques, core engines for algorithmic system
verification;
UNIT - IV: Introduction to Internet of Things
Definition and evolution of IoT, architecture of IoT, resource management, data
management and analytics, security issues, identity management and

Electronics and Communication Engineering 273

authentication, privacy, standardization and regulatory limitations, opportunities
for IoT.
UNIT - V: IoT Enabling Technologies
Wireless Sensor Networks: Overview, history, the node, connecting nodes,
networking nodes. securing communication- standards. cloud computing, Big
data analysis, communication protocols, wireless communication protocols,
wireless communication protocols and application protocols.
UNIT - VI: Use cases and IoT applications
Home automation, smart building, smart health, location tracking, environment,
energy, agriculture, smart cities and other IoT electronic industries.
Text Books
1. E. A. Lee and S. A. Seshia, “Introduction to Embedded Systems, A
Cyber-Physical Systems Approach,” 2nd Edition, http://LeeSeshia.org, 2015.
2. R. Alur, “Principles of Cyber-Physical Systems,” MIT Press, 2015.
Reference Books
1. Arshdeep Bahga, Vijay Madisetti “Internet of Things - A Hands-on Approach”,
Published by Arshdeep Bahga & Vijay Madisetti, 1st Edition.
2. Dieter Uckelmann, Mark Harrison Florian, Michahelles “Architecting the
Internet of things”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 1st Edition.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 274

Open Elective - IV
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the basic concepts of signals and systems.
• To introduce various transform techniques on signals.
• To develop an understanding of sampling and correlation techniques on signals.
Course Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• classify the signals and various operations on signals.
• perform Fourier analysis on the signals.
• analyze the various systems.
• perform correlation operational on signals.
• apply the various sampling techniques on continuous time signals.
• analyze the various continuous time signals through transformation (Fourier
and Laplace) techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Signal Analysis
Classification of signals, basic operations on signals-amplitude and time scaling,
time shifting, addition and multiplication, introduction to elementary signals-unit
step, impulse, ramp, parabolic, rectangular, triangular, sinusoidal, exponential,
signum, sinc and gaussian functions.
UNIT - II: Fourier Series Representation of Continuous Time Signals
Trigonometric and exponential Fourier series, relationship between trigonometric
and exponential Fourier series, representation of a periodic function by the Fourier
series over the entire interval, convergence of Fourier series, alternate form of
trigonometric series, symmetry conditions-even and odd, complex Fourier
spectrum.
UNIT - III: Fourier Transform
Representation of an arbitrary function over the entire interval: Fourier transform,
Fourier transform of some useful functions and periodic function, properties of
Fourier transform, energy density spectrum, Parseval’s theorem.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 275

Sampling: Sampling theorem for band limited signals- explanation, reconstruction
of signal from samples, aliasing, sampling techniques- impulse, natural and flat
top sampling.
UNIT - IV:LTI Systems
Properties of systems, Linear Time Invariant (LTI) system, response of LTI system-
convolution integral, properties of LTI system, transfer function and frequency
response of LTI system.
Signal Transmission Through LTI Systems: Filter characteristics of LTI systems,
distortion less transmission through LTI system, signal bandwidth, System
bandwidth, ideal LPF, HPF and BPF characteristics, causality and physical
realizability- Paley-Wiener criterion, relationship between bandwidth and rise-time.
UNIT - V: Correlation of Continuous Time Signals
Cross correlation and auto correlation of continuous time signals (finite and nonfinite
energy signals), relation between convolution and correlation, properties of cross
correlation and autocorrelation, power density spectrum, relation between auto
correlation function and energy/power spectral density function.
UNIT - VI: Laplace Transform
Laplace transform of signals, properties of Region of Convergence (ROC), unilateral
Laplace transform, properties of unilateral Laplace transform, inversion of unilateral
and bilateral Laplace transform, relationship between Laplace and Fourier
Transforms.
Text Books
1. B.P.Lathi, “Signals, Systems &Communications”, BS Publications, 2003 (Units
I-VI).
2. A.V. Oppenheim, A.S. Willsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”,PHI,
2nd Edition (Units I, III, VI)
Reference Books
1. Simon Haykin and Van Veen, “Signals &Systems”, Wiley, 2nd edition
2. Michel J. Robert , “Fundamentals of Signals and Systems”, TMGH Int. Edition,
2008
3. C.L.Philips, J.M. Parr and Eve A. Riskin, “Signals, Systems and Transforms”,
Pearson Education, 3rd Edition, 2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 276

Open Elective - IV
DIGITAL FORENSICS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To provide a comprehensive overview of digital forensic process.
• To familiarize with the different roles a computer in crime investigation.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• formulate a Digital Forensic Process
• employ fundamental computer theory in the context of computer forensics
practices
• apply the principles of effective digital forensics investigation techniques
• explain the role of digital forensics in the field of information assurance and
information security
• evaluate the effectiveness of available digital forensic tools
• outline the file storage mechanisms of DOS systems
• examine computer incidents in crime scene
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Digital Forensics
What is Computer Forensics?, Differences between Computer Forensics and
Digital Forensics, History of Digital Forensics, Use of Computer Forensics in Law
Enforcement, Computer Forensics Assistance to Human Resources/Employment
Proceedings, Computer Forensics Services, Benefits of Professional Forensics
Methodology, Steps taken by Computer Forensics Specialists, Types of Computer
Forensics Technology.
UNIT - II: Computer Forensics Evidence and Capture
Data Recovery, Data Back-up and Recovery, The Role of Back-up in Data Recovery,
The Data-Recovery Solution, Evidence Collection and Data Seizure: Why Collect
Evidence? Collection Options, Obstacles, Types of Evidence, the Rules of
Evidence, Volatile Evidence, General Procedure, Collection and Archiving, Methods
of Collection, Artifacts, Collection Steps, Controlling Contamination: The Chain of
Custody.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 277

UNIT - III: Duplication and Preservation of Digital Evidence, Computer Image
Verification and Authentication, Processing Crime and Incident
Scenes: Identifying Digital Evidence, Collecting Evidence in Private-Sector Incident
Scenes, Securing a Computer Incident or Crime Scene, Seizing Digital Evidence
at the Scene, Storing Digital Evidence, Obtaining a Digital Hash, Reviewing a
Case.
UNIT - IV: Digital Forensics Analysis and Validation
Determining what data to collect and analyze, Validating Forensic data, Data-
Hiding Techniques, Examining Encrypted Files, Recovering Passwords, Performing
Remote Acquisitions, Virtual Machines, Network Forensics and performing Live
Acquisitions, Email Investigations, Mobile Device Forensics.
UNIT - V: Current Digital Forensics Tools
Types of Forensics Tools, Tasks performed by Forensic Tools, Tool Comparisons,
Software Tools – Command-line Forensics Tools, UNIX/Linux Forensics Tools,
other GUID Forensics Tools, Hardware Tools – Forensic Workstations, Using a
Write-Blocker, Validating and Testing Forensic Software - Using National Institute
of Standards and Technology (NIST) Tools, Using Validation Protocols.
UNIT - VI: Working with Windows and DOS Systems
File Systems, exploring Microsoft File Structures, examining NTFS disks, whole
Disk Encryption, Windows Registry, Microsoft Start-up Tasks, MS-DOS Start-up
Tasks, and Virtual Machines.
Text Books
1. John R.Vacca, “Computer Forensics: Computer Crime Scene Investigation”,
2nd edition, Charles River Media.
2. Bill Nelson, Amelia Phillips, Christopher Steuart, “Guide to Computer
Forensics and Investigations”, 3rd edition, CENGAGE Learning.
Reference Books
1. Tony Sammes and Brian Jenkinson, “Forensic Computing, A Practitioners
Guide”, 1st edition. Springer
2. Christopher L. T. Brown, “Computer Evidence: Collection and Preservation”,
2nd edition, Firewall Media.
3. Jesus Mena, “Homeland Security, Techniques and Technologies”, 1st edition
Firewall Media.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 278

Open Elective - IV
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE AND DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To identify the process of decision making and use of model for decision
making.
• To use various visualization tools for delivery of knowledge.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the need of Business Intelligence
• explain the process of decision making
• use mathematical model for decision making
• compare simple linear regression model with multiple linear regression model
for prediction.
• choose a marketing model to design sales territory
• construct charts, graphs and widgets to deliver the knowledge for decision
makers
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Business Intelligence
Effective and timely decisions, Data, information and knowledge, Role of
mathematical models, Business intelligence architectures, Ethics and business
intelligence.
UNIT - II: Decision support systems
Definition of system, Representation of the decision-making process, Evolution of
information systems, Definition of decision support system, Development of a
decision support system.
UNIT - III: Mathematical models for decision making
Structure of mathematical models, Development of a model, Classes of models.
Regression: Structure of regression models, Simple linear regression, Multiple
linear regression.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 279

UNIT - IV: BI Applications
Marketing Models: Relational Marketing, Sales force Management, Business case
studies.
UNIT - V: Data envelopment analysis
Efficiency measures, Efficient frontier, The CCR model, Identification of good
operating practices.
UNIT - VI: Knowledge Delivery
Visualization, Scorecards and Dashboards, Geographic Visualization, Integrated
analytics, Considerations: Optimizing the presentation for the Right message.
Text Books
1. Carlo Vercellis, “Business Intelligence: Data Mining and Optimization for
Decision Making”, Wiley Publications.
2. David Loshin, “Business Intelligence: The Savvy Manager’s Guide”, 2nd edition,
Morgan Kaufman Publications.
Reference Books
1. Efraim Turban, Jay E Aronson, Teng-Peng Liang, Ramesh Sharda, “Decision
Support and Business Intelligence Systems”, 8th Edition, Pearson.
2. Jiawei Han and Micheline Kamber, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”,
2nd edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers.
3. Larissa T. Moss and Shaku Atre, “Business Intelligence Roadmap: The
complete Project Life Cycle of Decision Making”, 1st edition, Addison Wesley.
4. Cindi Howson, “Successful Business Intelligence: Secrets to Making BI a
Killer App”, McGraw- Hill.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 280

Open Elective - IV
ADHOC AND SENSOR NETWORKS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To acquire fundamental concepts of ad hoc networks.
• To learn design considerations of wireless sensor networks.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• evaluate architecture and protocols in adhoc and wireless sensor networks.
• identify applications of adhoc and WSN’s.
• illustrate wireless sensor networks design aspects.
• synthesize routing protocols for adhoc wireless networks.
• outline Transport layer and security protocols for Ad hoc wireless networks.
• summarize layer wise functionalities of wireless sensor networks.
• describe MAC protocols in adhoc and WSN’s.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
Fundamentals of wireless communication technology, the electromagnetic
spectrum, radio propagation mechanisms, characteristics of the wireless
channel.Ad hoc wireless networks: introduction, cellular and Ad hoc wireless
networks, applications of ad-hoc networks, issues in ad hoc wireless networks.
UNIT - II: MAC Protocols for Adhoc Wireless Networks
Issues in designing a MAC protocol for ad hoc wireless networks, classifications
of MAC protocols, Contention based protocols.
UNIT - III: Routing protocols for Adhoc Wireless Networks
Issues in designing a routing protocol for ad hoc wireless networks, classifications
of routing protocols, table-driven routing protocols, on-demand routing protocols.
UNIT - IV: Transport layer and Security Protocols for Adhoc Wireless Networks
Introduction, Issues, design goals, classification of transport layer solutions, TCP
over ad hoc wireless networks: TCP-F, TCP-ELFN, TCP-BUS, ATCP, split-TCP.
Network security attacks.
Electronics and Communication Engineering 281
UNIT - V: Sensor Networks Design Considerations-I
Introduction, energy consumption, sensing and communication range, design
issues, localization scheme, clustering of SN’s, MAC layer, Applications of wireless
sensor networks.
UNIT - VI: Sensor Networks Design Considerations-II
Routing layer, flat versus hierarchical, operation-based protocols, location-based
protocols, high level application layer support.
Text Books
1. Carlos de Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal, “Ad Hoc and Sensor
Networks: Theory and Applications”, 2nd Edition, World Scientific Publications,
2011.
2. C. Siva Ram Murthy, B.S. Manoj “Ad Hoc wireless networks: Architectures
and protocols “, Pearson, 2017.
Reference Books
1. Prasant Mohapatra and Srihanamurthy, “Ad Hoc Networks Technologies and
Protocols”, Springer, Springer International Edition, 2009.
2. Subir kumar sarkar, C. Puttamadappa, T.G.Basavaraju, “Ad hoc mobile
wireless networks:principles, protocols and applications”, Taylor & Francis
India Pvt Ltd - New Delhi, 2007.
3. Jagannathan, sarangapani, “wireless ad hoc and sensor networks protocols,
performance, and control”, CRC press, 2007.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 282

Open Elective - IV
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL SYSTEMS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To provide the foundation knowledge in information retrieval.
• To familiarize about different applications of information retrieval techniques
in the Internet or Web environment.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify basic theories in information retrieval systems.
• identify the analysis tools as they apply to information retrieval systems.
• understand the problems solved in current IR systems.
• describes the advantages of current IR systems.
• understand the difficulty of representing and retrieving documents.
• understand the latest technologies for linking, describing and searching the
web.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Information Storage and Retrieval System
Introduction, Domain Analysis of IR systems and other types of Information
Systems, IR System Evaluation. Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms
related to Information Retrieval: Basic Concepts, Data structures, Algorithms.
UNIT - II: Inverted files
Introduction, Structures used in Inverted Files, Building Inverted file using a sorted
array, Modifications to Basic Techniques.
UNIT - III: Signature Files
Introduction, Concepts of Signature Files, Compression, Vertical Partitioning,
Horizontal Partitioning.
UNIT - IV: New Indices for Text
PAT Trees and PAT Arrays: Introduction, PAT Tree structure, Algorithms on the
PAT Trees, Building PAT trees as PATRICA Trees, PAT representation as arrays.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 283

UNIT - V: Stemming Algorithms
Introduction, Types of Stemming Algorithms, Experimental Evaluations of Stemming
to Compress Inverted Files.
UNIT - VI: Thesaurus Construction
Introduction, Features of Thesauri, Thesaurus Construction,Thesaurus construction
from Texts, Merging existing Thesauri.
Text Books
1. William B. Frakes, Ricardo Baeza-Yates, “Information Retrieval: Data
Structures and Algorithms”, Prentice Hall.
2. Ricardo Baeza-Yates, Bertheir Ribeiro-Neto, “Modern Information Retrieval”,
Pearson Education.
3. Robert R. Korfhage, “Information Storage and Retrieval”, John Wiley & Sons.
Reference Books
1. Gerald Kowalski, Mark T Maybury, “Information Storage and Retrieval
Systems-Theory and Implementation”, 2nd edition, Kluwer Academic Press,
1997.
2. David A. Grossman, Ophir Frieder, “Information Retrieval:Algorithms and
Heuristics”, 2nd edition, Springer.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 284

Open Elective - IV
FUZZY LOGIC
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To impart the knowledge of fuzzy set theory and its applications in Engineering.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• distinguish between crisp set and fuzzy set.
• compose the operations on fuzzy sets to characterize the belongingness of
elements in the sets
• construct fuzzy relations to draw inferences
• illustrate the methods of defuzzification to drive the control mechanism.
• apply fuzzy logic to control automatic engineering systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Crisp Sets Vs Fuzzy Sets
Crisp sets an overview, Concept of fuzziness, the notion of Fuzzy sets, basic
concepts of fuzzy sets.
UNIT - II: Operations of Fuzzy Sets
Fuzzy set operations-fuzzy complement, fuzzy union, fuzzy intersection,
combinations of operations.
UNIT - III: Fuzzy Relations
Fuzzy Cartesian product ,Fuzzy relations, operations on fuzzy relations, properties
of fuzzy relations, lamda cut for fuzzy relations and composition, Fuzzy tolerance
and equivalence relations.
UNIT - IV: Fuzzification and Defuzzification
Features of membership function, fuzzification, defuzzification to crisp set,
Defuzzification to scalars (centroid method, centre of sums method, mean of
maxima method).

Electronics and Communication Engineering 285

UNIT - V: Fuzzy Logic
Introduction to fuzzy logic, Crisp connectives vs Fuzzy logical connectives,
Approximate reasoning.
UNIT - VI: Applications of Fuzzy Systems
Fuzzy Control System, Control System Design Problem, Simple Fuzzy Logic
Controller, general applications of fuzzy logic (washing machine, air conditioner
controller).
Text Books
1. Timothy J.Ross., Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications - Second Edition,
Wiley Publications, 2007, New Delhi.
2. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, Neural networks, Fuzzy logic, and
genetic algorithms synthesis and applications- – Prentice-Hall of India private
limited, 2008, New Delhi.
Reference Books
1. H.J. ZIMMERMAN, Fuzzy set theory and its applications, 4th edition ––
SPRINGER, 2006. New Delhi.
2. Recommended Text S.Nanda and N.R.Das “Fuzzy Mathematical concepts,
Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 286

 MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS LAB
IV Year – I Semester
Practical :4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits :2 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the behavioural aspects of various microwave sources and
optical sources
• To introduce the measurement procedures of important parameters in
microwave engineering and optical engineering
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• experiment with microwave sources like reflex klystron, Gunn diode and optical
sources like LED’s & Lasers.
• conduct measurements using a standard microwave test bench, analog and
digital optical links for microwave and optical signal characteristics.
• develop test bench for characterizing a given microwave component.
List of Experiments
Part – A: (Minimum 7)
1. Reflex Klystron characteristics.
2. Gunn diode characteristics.
3. Attenuation measurement.
4. Directional coupler characteristics.
5. VSWR Measurement.
6. Impedance measurement.
7. Waveguide parameters measurement.
8. S matrix of Circulator.
9. S matrix of Magic Tee.
Part – B: (Minimum 5)
1. Characterization of LED.
2. Characterization of Laser diode.
3. Intensity modulation of laser output through an optical fiber.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 287

 4. Measurement of data rate for digital optical link.
5. Measurement of numerical aperture.
6. Measurement of losses in plastic fiber.
Reference Books
1. Samuel Y. Liao , “Microwave Devices and Circuits” , PHI, 3rd Edition,1994.
2. R.E. Collin, “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, IEEE Press, John Wiley,
2nd Edition, 2002.
3. Peter A. Rizzi, “Microwave Engineering Passive Circuits” –PHI, 1999.
4. M.L. Sisodia and G.S.Raghuvanshi, “Microwave Circuits and Passive Devices”
Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Age International Publishers Ltd., 1995.
5. R. Chatterjee, “Elements of Microwave Engineering”, Affiliated East-West
Press Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1988.
6. Gerd Keiser, “Optical fiber communications” –3rd Edition, McGrawHill.
7. Djafar K. Mynbaev and Lowell L. Scheiner, “Fiber Optic Communication
Technology” (Pearson Education Asia)
8. User manuals for Microwave Lab equipment.
9. Data sheets for optical sources.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 288

Optional Elective - VII
DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts on digital control systems and their associated
components.
• To impart knowledge on z–transformations for the analysis of digital control
systems.
• To familiarize with the concepts on state model representation of discrete–
time systems and its stability testing methods.
• To impart knowledge on design of state feedback controller using pole
placement method.
Learniang Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• specify the components of digital control systems.
• employ z–transformations to analyze digital control systems.
• assess the stability of digital systems and suggest methods to improve
stability margins.
• employ the state–space representation for the analysis and design of digital
systems.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction And Signal Processing
Introduction to analog and digital control systems – advantages of digital systems
– typical examples – signals and processing – sample and hold devices – sampling
theorem and data reconstruction – frequency domain characteristics of zero order
hold.
UNIT - II: Z–Transformations
Z–Transforms–theorems – finding inverse z–transforms – formulation of difference
equations and solving – block diagram representation – pulse transfer functions
and finding open loop and closed loop responses.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 289

UNIT - III: State Space Analysis and The Concepts of Controllability and
Observability
State space representation of discrete time systems – state transition matrix and
methods of evaluation – discretization of continuous – time state equations –
concepts of controllability and observability – tests.
UNIT - IV:Stability Analysis
Mapping between the S–Plane and the Z–Plane – primary strips and
complementary strips – stability criterion – modified Routh’s stability criterion
and jury’s stability test.
UNIT - V: Design of Discrete–Time Control Systems By Conventional Methods
Transient and steady state specifications – design using frequency response in
the w–plane for lag and led compensators – root locus technique in the z– plane.
UNIT - VI: State Feedback Controllers
Design of state feedback controller through pole placement – necessary and
sufficient conditions – Ackerman’s formula.
Text Books
1. K. Ogata, “Discrete Time Control systems”, Pearson Education/PHI, 2nd
Edition
2. M. Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill
Companies, 1997.
Reference Books
1. Kuo, “Digital Control Systems”, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. M.Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, TMH.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 290

Optional Elective - VII
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objective
• To familiarize the concepts of AI for representation of knowledge and problem
solving.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the problems that are amenable and can be solved by using AI
techniques.
• analyse the problem solving and game playing techniques.
• specify the classical Artificial Intelligence algorithms, which are used to solve
the heuristic search and game playing problems.
• apply the basic principles and algorithms of Artificial Intelligence to recognise,
model and solve the state space search, knowledge representation and
reasoning problems.
• formulate the Reasoning model and state the conclusion for the uncertainty
problems using actions and their effects over the time.
• describe expert systems and their applications.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
Introduction, history, intelligent systems, foundations of AI, applications, tic-tac-
toe game playing, current trends in AI.
UNIT - II: Problem solving and game playing
State-space search and control strategies: Introduction, general problem solving,
characteristics of problem, exhaustive searches, heuristic search techniques-
Hill climbing, iterative-deepening A*, problem reduction, constraint satisfaction.
Game playing: Introduction, game playing, min-max algorithm, alpha-beta pruning.
UNIT - III: Logic Concepts
Introduction, propositional calculus, proportional logic, natural deduction system,
axiomatic system, semantic table system in proportional logic, resolution in
proportional logic, resolution in predicate logic and unification algorithm.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 291

UNIT - IV: Knowledge Representation
Introduction, approaches to knowledge representation, knowledge representation
using semantic network, knowledge representation using frames.
Advanced knowledge representation techniques: Introduction, conceptual
dependency theory, script structure.
UNIT - V: Reasoning in Uncertain Situations
Introduction to non-monotonic reasoning, truth maintenance systems, logics for
non-monotonic reasoning, classical planning problem: Goal stack, hierarchical
planning.
UNIT - VI: Expert Systems and Applications
Introduction phases in building expert systems, expert system versus traditional
systems, rule-based expert systems, blackboard systems, model-based expert
system, case-based expert system and hybrid expert system and application of
expert systems.
Text Books
1. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata McGraw Hill edition,
2nd edition.
2. Stuart J. Russell, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, 2nd edition.
Reference Books
1. Patrick Henry Winston, “Artificial Intelligence”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education.
2. Russel and Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence”, 3rd edition, Pearson Education,
PHI.
3. Patterson, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems”, 2nd
edition, PHI publication.
Web Links
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_cs19
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/artificial_intelligence/index.htm
3. https://www.ibm.com/developerworks/library/cc-beginner-guide-machine-
learning-ai-cognitive/index.html
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 292

Optional Elective - VII
TRANSFORM TECHNIQUES
IV Year – I Semester
Lecture : - Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with wavelet transforms and multi rate analysis.
• To impart the knowledge of wavelet packets and wavelet generation.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• analyze various signals using Fourier and wavelet transforms.
• apply different transform techniques for the analysis of one and two dimensional
signals.
• describe various filter banks and signal reconstruction techniques.
• perform different processing operations using thresholding techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: STFT and Introduction of Wavelet Transform Time – frequency
analysis: window function, short time Fourier transform, discrete short time Fourier
transform, continuous wavelet transform, discrete wavelet transform, wavelet series,
interpretation of the time-frequency plot.
UNIT - II: Transforms -Walsh, Hadamard, Haar and Slant transforms, DCT, DST,
KLT, singular value decomposition; definition, properties.
UNIT - III: Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) - Short comings of STFT,
need for wavelets, wavelet basis- concept of scale and its relation with frequency,
continuous time wavelet transform equation- series expansion using wavelets,
CWT, tiling of time scale plane for CWT. Haar, Mexican hat, Shannon, and
Daubechies wavelets.
UNIT - IV: Multi resolution analysis-Image pyramids,subband coding,multi
resolution expansions, two-channel filter banks, perfect reconstruction condition,
relationship between filter banks and wavelet basis.
UNIT - V: Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT)- DWT, structure of DWT filter
banks,scaling function and its properties,wavelet function and its properties,
Daubechies wavelet function, applications of DWT.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 293

UNIT - VI: Wavelet Packets and Lifting- Wavelet packet transform and
algorithms, hard and soft thresholding, multidimensional wavelets, bi-orthogonal
basis - B-splines, lifting scheme of wavelet generation, multi wavelets.
Text Books
1. K.P.Soman and K.I Ramachandran, “Insight into Wavelets – from theory to
practice” PHI, Second Edition,2008.(All Units)
2. Jaideva C Goswami, Andrew K Chan,”Fundamentals of Wavelets- Theory”,
Algorithms and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1999. (Units: I, III,
IV, V)
Reference Books
1. Raghuveer M.Rao and Ajit S. Bopardikar, “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing
Theory and Applications”, Pearson Edu, 2003.
2. S.Jayaraman, S.Esakkirajan, T.Veera Kumar , “Digital Image Processing”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 294

Professional Elective - V
LOW POWER VLSI CIRCUITS
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To make the students familiarize with the sources of power dissipation and
power minimization techniques.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• identify the requirements for low power
• distinguish static and dynamic power dissipations
• apply voltage scaling approaches to reduce dynamic power
• apply various methods to minimize switched capacitance
• identify suitable leakage power minimization technique
• describe low power design methodologies such as adiabatic circuits.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Low Power Requirements
Historical background, requirements for low power, sources of power dissipation,
low power design methodologies.
UNIT - II: Sources of Power Dissipation
Short circuit power dissipation, switching power dissipation, glitching power
dissipation, leakage power dissipation.
UNIT - III: Supply Voltage Scaling Approaches
Device feature size scaling, architectural level approaches, voltage scaling using
high-level transformations, multilevel voltage scaling.
UNIT - IV: Switched Capacitance Minimization Approaches
Hardware software trade-off, bus encoding, clock gating, glitching power
minimization, logic styles for low power.
UNIT - V: Leakage Power Minimization Approaches
Variable-Threshold voltage CMOS (VTCMOS) approach, transistor stacking, Multi-
Threshold-voltage CMOS (MTCMOS) approach, power gating.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 295

UNIT - VI: Adiabatic Logic Circuits
Adiabatic charging, adiabatic amplification, adiabatic logic gates, pulsed power
supply, partially adiabatic circuits.
Text Books
1. Jan M. Rabaey and Massoud Pedram, “Low Power Design Methodologies”,
Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1996 (Unit-I).
2. Ajit Pal, Low Power VLSI Circuits and Systems, Springer India, 2015 Edition
(Units - II to VI)
Reference Books
1. Sung Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits”, Tata
Mcgraw Hill, Third Edition.
2. Neil H. E. Weste and K. Eshraghian, “Principles of CMOS VLSI Design”,
Addison Wesley (Indian reprint), Second Edition.
3. A. Bellamour and M. I. Elmasri, “Low Power VLSI CMOS Circuit Design”,
Kluwer Academic Press, 1995.
4. Anantha P. Chandrakasan and Robert W. Brodersen, “Low Power Digital
CMOS Design”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1995.
5. Kaushik Roy and Sharat C. Prasad, “Low-Power CMOS VLSI Design”, Wiley-
Interscience, 2000.
6. Prof. Ajit Pal, Department of Computer Science and Engineering, IIT Kharagpur,
Low Power VLSI Circuits & Systems, NPTEL video course.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 296

Professional Elective - V
REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with the basic concepts of real time operating system, skills
necessary to design and develop embedded applications by means of real
time operating systems.
• To get acquaint with the Unix / Linux and RTLinux basic concepts and
programming.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• apply the concepts of real time operating system.
• develop software for embedded systems using the system design techniques.
• identify how to port RTOS on a microcontroller based development board.
• model real-time applications using Unix/Linux and RTLinux programming.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction to Real Time Operating Systems
Multiple processes and multiple threads in an application, tasks, task states,
task and data, OS services, process management, timer functions, event functions,
memory management, device, file and IO systems management, interrupt routines
in RTOS environment and handling of interrupt source calls, Real-Time Operating
Systems, basic design using an RTOS.
UNIT - II: Real Time Operating Systems
RTOS task scheduling models interrupt latency and response of the tasks as
performance metrics, OS security issues, basic functions and types of RTOS for
embedded systems, basic features of RTOS mCOS-II, Vx works, Windows CE
and OSEK.
UNIT - III: Target Image Creation
Off-the-shelf operating systems, operating system software, target image creation
for Windows XP embedded, porting RTOS on a micro controller based development
board.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 297

UNIT - IV: Programming in Linux
Overview and programming concepts of Unix/Linux, shell programming, system
programming – fork demo, semaphores and Mutex.
UNIT - V: Programming in RTLINUX
Overview of RT Linux, Core RT Linux API, program to display a message periodically,
Semaphore management, Mutex management.
UNIT - VI: Case Studies-Program Modeling with RTOS
Case study - digital camera hardware and software architecture, coding for sending
application layer byte streams on a TCP/IP network using RTOS Vx works. Case
study of embedded systems - for an adaptive cruise control system in a car and
for a smart card.
Text Books
1. Rajkamal: “Embedded Systems-Architecture, Programming and Design”, Tata
McGraw Hill Publications, 2nd Edition, 2008 (For units: I, II & VI).
2. Dr. K.V.K.K. Prasad: “Embedded/Real-Time Systems”, Dream Tech
Publications, 2003. (For units: I, III, IV & V)
Reference Books
1. Jean J.Labrosse, “Embedding system building blocks”, CMP publishers, 2nd
Edition.
2. Rob Williams, “Real time Systems Development”, Butterworth Heinemann
Publication, 2006.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 298

Professional Elective - V
SPEECH PROCESSING
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To familiarize with speech production, speech analysis and speech processing.
• To introduce the concepts of coding of speech, speech enhancement, speech
and speaker recognition systems
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand how speech is produced.
• perform speech analysis and homomorphic processing of speech signals.
• code the speech signals using linear predictive analysis.
• enhance the speech signals and recognize speech as well as speaker.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Speech Production
Anatomy and Physiology of Speech organs- Lungs, Larynx and vocal tract,
Articulatory Phonetics, Acoustic Phonetics, Acoustic theory of speech production,
Lossless Tube Models, Digital Models for Speech Signals.
UNIT - II: Speech Analysis
Short–Time Speech Analysis: Windowing, Spectra of Windows, Time domain
parameters- Signal analysis in time domain, Short time average energy, magnitude,
zero-crossing rate and auto correlation function, Frequency domain (Spectral)
Parameters : Short–Time Fourier Transform Analysis, Spectral Displays, Formant
Estimation and Tracking, Energy separation.
UNIT - III: Homomorphic Speech Processing
Homomorphic systems for Convolution, Complex cepstrum of speech, Pitch
detection, formant estimation, Homomorphic Vocoder.
UNIT - IV: Linear predictive coding (LPC) of Speech
Basic principles of Linear predictive Analysis, Computation of Gain, Solution of
LPC Equation- Cholesky Decomposition solution for covariance method and
Durbin’s Recursive Solution for the Autocorrelation Equations, Prediction error

Electronics and Communication Engineering 299

Signal, Frequency domain interpretation of mean squared prediction error,
Applications of LPC parameters –pitch detection and Formant analysis using
LPC parameters.
UNIT - V: Speech enhancement
Nature of interfering sounds, Spectral subtraction, Filtering and adaptive noise
cancellation, Multi-Microphone Adaptive Noise Cancellation.
UNIT - VI: Networks for speech recognition
Hidden Markov Model (HMM), training and testing using HMMs, adapting to
variability in speech.
Speech Recognition Systems: Isolated Digit Recognition system and continuous
Digit Recognition system, LPC Distance measures .
Speaker Recognition Systems:Verification vs Recognition, Speaker verification
system and speaker identification system
Text Books
1. Douglas O Shaughnessy, “Speech Communications”, Second Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2000 (Units I, II, V,VI).
2. L.R. Rabiner and S.W. Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Person
Education (Units I,III, IV, VI).
Reference Books
1. Thomas F. Quatieri , “Discrete –Time Speech signal Processing Principles
and Practice”, Person Education.
2. Dr. Shaila D. Apte, “Speech and Audio Procesing” , WILEY Precise Textbook.
3. Claudio Becchetti and Klucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition Theory and
C++ Implementation”,WILEY.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 300

Professional Elective - V
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL PROCESSING
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the concepts of Wiener and Kalman filtering.
• To familiarize with the concepts of linear and non-linear adaptive signal
processing techniques.
Course Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the concept of adaptive filters.
• apply Wiener and Kalman filters for signal processing applications.
• apply LMS and RLS algorithms for adaptive filter applications.
• understand the concepts of linear and non-linear adaptive signal processing
techniques.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction To Adaptive Filtering
Introduction to stochastic processes, linear adaptive filter structure, real and
complex forms of adaptive filter, non-linear adaptive filter, adaptation approaches:
Wiener filter theory method of least squares.
UNIT - II: Optimal Wiener Filtering
Mean-Square Error criterion, linear optimum filtering statement, principle of
orthogonality, Wiener-Hopf equation, error performance surface, numerical
examples, channel equalization, linear constrained minimum variance filter.
UNIT - III: Kalman Filtering
Statement of Kalman filtering problem, estimation of state using innovation, variance
of Kalman filtering, extended Kalman filtering.
UNIT - IV: Linear Adaptive Filtering
Method of steepest descent, stability of steepest descent, least mean square
algorithm, adaptive prediction, adaptive equalization, robustness of LMS algorithm,
block adaptive filter, fast LMS algorithm, unconstrained frequency-domain adaptive
filtering, methods of least squares.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 301

UNIT - V: Recursive Least Squares
Matrix inversion lemma, weighted recursive least squares algorithm, adaptive noise
canceller, convergence analysis of RLS algorithm, adaptive equalization, state-
space formulation of RLS problem, adaptive beam-forming, order recursive adaptive
Filter.
UNIT - VI: Non-Linear Adaptive Filtering
Introduction to blind de-convolution, back-propagation learning, radial basis function
learning, stochastic gradient approach, Markov model, singular value
decomposition.
Text Books
1. Simon Haykin,”Adaptive Filter Theory”, Prentice Hall International”, 3rd
Edition., 2002.
2. Bernard Widrow and Samuel Stearns,”Adaptive Signal Processing”, Pearson
Education, 2nd Edition., 1995.
Reference Books
1. Ali H. Sayed,”Fundamentals of Adaptive Filtering”, Wiley, 1st Edition., 2003.
2. Farhang-Boroujeny B.,”Adaptive Filters Theory and Applications”, John Wiley
& Sons, 1st Edition.,1998.
3. Mohamed Ibnkahla(Edited),”Adaptive Signal Processing in Wireless
Communications”, CRC Press, Taylor &Francis Group, 1st Edition., 2009.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 302

Professional Elective - VI
ASIC DESIGN
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce design issues and tools related to ASIC.
• To familiarize placement and routing algorithms.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• understand the different types of ASICs and its Design Flow.
• analyze the Characteristics and Performance of Programmable ASICs, Logic
cells, I/O Cells and Interconnects.
• measure goals and objectives related to Floor planning, Placement and
Routing.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Programmable ASICs and ASIC Logic Cells
Programmable ASICs: Antifuse, Static RAM, EPROM and EEPROM Technology.
Programmable ASIC Logic Cells: Actel ACT and Xilinx LCA
UNIT - II: Programmable ASIC I/O Cells and Interconnect
Programmable ASIC I/O Cells: DC Output, AC Output, DC Input, AC Input,
Clock Input and Power Input.
Programmable ASIC Interconnect: Xilinx LCA and Xilinx EPLD.
UNIT - III: ASIC Construction
Physical Design, CAD Tools, System Partitioning, Estimating ASIC Size and
Power Dissipation
UNIT - IV: Floorplanning
Floorplanning Goals and Objectives - Measurement of Delay in Floorplanning -
Floorplanning Tools - Channel Definition - I/O and Power Planning - Clock Planning.
UNIT - V: Placement
Placement Terms and Definitions, Placement Goals and Objectives – Measurement
of Placement Goals and Objectives - Placement Algorithms - Timing-Driven
Placement Methods, A Simple Placement Example.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 303

UNIT - VI: Routing
Global Routing - Goals and Objectives - Measurement of Interconnect Delay -
Global Routing Methods - Global Routing Between Blocks – Timing Driven Methods
Detailed Routing - Goals and Objectives - Measurement of Channel Density –
Left Edge Algorithm - Constraints and Routing Graphs - Area Routing Algorithms
- Multilevel Routing
Special Routing - Clock Routing - Power Routing
Text Books
1. M.J.S. Smith, “Application – Specific Integrated Circuits” Pearson Education,
India.
2. H.Gerez, “Algorithms for VLSI Design Automation”, John Wiley, 1999.
Reference BookS
1. J.M.Rabaey, A. Chandrakasan, and B. Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuit
Design Perspective (2/e)”, PHI 2003
2. D. A.Hodges, “Analysis and Design of Digital Integrated Circuits (3/e)”, MGH
2004.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 304

Professional Elective - VI
EMBEDDED C
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the basic concepts of embedded systems, processors, and
programming languages.
• To familiarize with various interfaces, memory, and power consumption.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• distinguish C and Embedded C.
• select the processor, memory and operating system for an application.
• design and develop an application using Embedded C.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Embedded Hardware and Software
Introduction to embedded system, selection: processor, programming language
and operating system; steps in developing embedded software.
Programming 8051 in C: data types and time delay, I/O programming, logical
operations, data conversion, data serialization
UNIT - II: Programming 8051 in C
8051 Timer programming: simple programs on timers 0 and 1 with some delay in
mode1 and mode 2, 8051 serial port programming: Transmitting and receiving
data in 8051.
UNIT - III: I/O Port Programming
Basic techniques for reading from port pins, reading and writing bytes, reading
and writing bits, reading and writing bits, need for pull-up resistors, dealing with
switch bounce, reading switch inputs.
UNIT - IV: Object Oriented Concepts
Object-oriented programming with C, the project header (MAIN.H), the port header
(PORT.H), restructuring the goat-counting example.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 305

UNIT - V: Real-time Constraints
Introduction, creating ‘hardware delays’ using timer 0 and timer 1, generating a
precise 50 ms delay, creating a portable hardware delay, use of timer 2, need for
‘timeout’ mechanism, creating loop timeouts, testing loop timeouts, reliable switch
interface, creating hardware timeouts, testing a hardware timeout.
UNIT - VI: Creating an Embedded Operating System
Introduction, the basis of simple embedded OS, Introducing sEOS, using Timer 0
or Timer 1, important design considerations when using sEOS
Text Books
1. Michael J. Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 2008.( Units
I,III,IV,V,VI)
2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, Rolin D. McKinlay, “The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition,
2008. ( Units I,II)
Reference Books
1. Zdravko Karakehayov, Knud Smed Christensen, Ole Winther, “Embedded
Systems Design with 8051 Microcontrollers”, Marcel Dekker, Special Indian
Edition, 2010.
2. Michael Barr, “Programming Embedded Systems in C and C++”, Oreilly,
2003.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 306

Professional Elective - VI
RADAR ENGINEERING
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objectives
• To introduce the fundamentals concepts in radar.
• To familiarize with working of different radar systems.
• To impart the knowledge of detection of radar signals in noise.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• compute different parameters from radar data.
• conceptualize the radar operation.
• distinguish moving target and pulse Doppler radars.
• understand the operation of different radar receivers.
• track different objects by using radar in different noise conditions.
• realize radar systems for electronic warfare.
Course Content
UNIT - I: Introduction
The Radar equation- introduction, detection of signals in noise, receiver noise and
S/N ratio, probability function, probability of detection and false alarm, radar cross
section of targets, transmitter power, pulse repetition frequency.
UNIT - II: CW Radar
Principle, doppler effect, block diagram, operation, measurement of velocity and
elevation of target, applications. FMCW radar: block diagram, principle of operation,
applications, salient features.
UNIT - III: MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar
Introduction, principle, MTI Radar with- power amplifier transmitter and power
oscillator transmitter, delay line cancellers, frequency response, blind speeds,
staggered PRFs.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 307

UNIT - IV: Tracking Radar
Tracking with Radar, mono-pulse tracking, conical scan, sequential lobing. Radar
receivers – noise figure and noise temperature, duplexers and receiver protectors,
radar displays.
UNIT - V: Detection of Radar Signals in Noise
Introduction, matched filter receiver – response characteristics and derivation,
correlation detection, detection criteria, detector characteristics, automatic
detection, constant false alarm rate receiver
UNIT - VI: Electronic Warfare
Electronic counter measures and electronic counter-counter measures,
introduction, electronic counter measures, radar jamming, electronic counter-
counter measures, electronic support, stealth applications.
Text Books
1. Merrill I Skolnik “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 3rd Edition, TMH, 2006
2. G.S.N.Raju “Radar Engineering and fundamentals of Navigational Aids”, I.K
International, 2008.
Reference Books
1. KK Sharma “Fundamentals of RADAR”, sonar and Navigation Engineering,
SK Kataria&Sons, 4th Edition,2014.
2. Byron Edde “Radar: Principles, Technologies, Applications”, Pearson
Education.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 308

Professional Elective - VI
MULTI RATE SIGNAL PROCESSING
IV Year – II Semester
Lecture : 4 Internal Marks : 40
Credits : 3 External Marks : 60
Course Objective
• To familiarize with the concepts of interpolation and Decimation
• To familiarize with the concepts of different types of filter banks and structures.
Learning Outcomes
Upon successful completion of the course, the students will be able to
• acquire the knowledge of multirate signal processing .
• design perfect reconstruction and near perfect reconstruction filter bank
system and to learn to assess the computational efficiency of multirate
systems.
• analyze the quantization effects in filter banks.
• recognize the use of filter banks in applications such as speech processing
and communication
Course Content
UNIT - I: Basic Multirate Operations
Decimation and Interpolation, time-domain characterization, frequency-domain
characterization, cascade equivalences, filters in sampling rate alteration systems.
UNIT - II: Uniform DFT Filter Banks
Polyphase decomposition,digital filter banks- uniform DFT filter banks, polyphase
implementation of uniform filter banks, Nyquist filters.
UNIT - III: Two Channel Quadrature-Mirror Filter (QMF) Bank
Filter bank structure, analyses of two channel QMF bank, alias free filter bank,
alias free realization, alias free FIR QMF bank, alias free IIR QMF bank, perfect
reconstruction two channel QMF bank.
UNIT - IV: M-Channel Perfect Reconstruction Filter Banks
Uniform band and non uniform filter bank - tree structured filter bank- errors created
by filter bank system- polyphase representation- perfect reconstruction systems.

Electronics and Communication Engineering 309

UNIT - V: Paraunitary Perfect Reconstruction (PR) Filter Banks
Paraunitary PR Filter Banks- filter bank properties induced by paraunitarity- two
channel FIR paraunitary QMF Bank, linear phase PR filter banks: necessary
conditions for linear phase property, quantization effects: types of quantization
effects in filter banks, coefficient sensitivity effects, dynamic range and scaling.
UNIT - VI: Cosine Modulated Filter Banks
Cosine modulated pseudo QMF Bank- alas cancellation, eliminating phase
distortion, closed form expression for the filters, polyphase structure, PR systems
Text Books
1. P. P. Vaidyanathan. “Multirate systems and filter banks.” Prentice Hall. PTR.
1993.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra. “ Digital Signal Processing: A computer based approach.”
McGraw Hill. 1998.
Reference Books
1. J.G. Proakis. D.G. Manolakis. “Digital Signal Processing: Principles.
Algorithms and Applications”, 3rd Edn. Prentice Hall India, 1999.
2. N.J. Fliege. “Multirate digital signal processing .” John Wiley 1994.
3. R.E. Crochiere. L. R. “Multirate Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall.
Inc.1983.
* * *

Electronics and Communication Engineering 310